2004 s430 s500 S55amg s600 S4305004matic

S-Class Operators Manual
S 430
S 430 4MATIC
S 500
S 500 4MATIC
S 55 AMG
S 600
Our company and staff congratulate you Please read this manual carefully, then
on the purchase of your new return it to your vehicle where it will be
Mercedes-Benz. handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your designed to acquaint you with the opera-
sire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen-
We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 19 Getting started ................................... 29

Product information................................ 9 Cockpit................................................. 20 Unlocking ............................................. 30
Operators Manual ............................... 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 22 Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 30
Service and warranty information .. 10 Multifunction steering wheel ................ 24 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 32
Important notice for California Center console ..................................... 25 Adjusting .............................................. 34
retail buyers and lessees of Upper part ...................................... 25 Seats .............................................. 34
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Lower part ...................................... 26 Steering wheel................................ 37
Maintenance .................................. 12 Overhead control panel ........................ 27 Mirrors............................................ 38
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Door control panel................................ 28 Driving.................................................. 40
Change of address or ownership.... 12 Fastening the seat belts ................. 40
Operating your vehicle outside Starting the engine ......................... 43
the USA or Canada......................... 13 Switching on headlamps................. 47
Where to find it.................................... 14 Turn signals and high beam ............ 47
Symbols............................................... 15 Windshield wipers........................... 48
Operating safety .................................. 16 Problems while driving.................... 50
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16 Parking and locking.............................. 51
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17 Parking brake ................................. 52
Reporting safety defects...................... 18 Switching off headlamps................. 53
Reporting safety defects ................ 18 Turning off the engine..................... 53
Contents
Rear seat head restraints............. 110

Safety and Security ........................... 57 Controls in detail ............................... 87 Lumbar support ........................... 112
Occupant safety................................... 58 Locking and unlocking ......................... 88 Multicontour backrest*................ 112
Airbags ........................................... 59 SmartKey ....................................... 88 Drive-dynamic seat* .................... 113
Seat belts ....................................... 64 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ........ 91 Seat heating*............................... 114
Preventive occupant safety Opening the doors from the inside. 96 Seat ventilation* .......................... 117
(PRE-SAFE) ..................................... 68 Opening the trunk lid from the Rear seats.................................... 118
Children in the vehicle.................... 69 outside ........................................... 97 Memory function ............................... 121
Override switch for rear passenger Opening the trunk lid from the Storing positions into memory..... 122
compartment.................................. 74 inside ............................................. 97 Recalling positions from memory. 122
Panic alarm .......................................... 76 Closing the trunk lid....................... 98 Storing exterior rear view mirror
Activating ....................................... 76 Trunk lid opening/closing system* 99 parking position ........................... 122
Deactivating ................................... 76 Trunk lid emergency release ........ 104 Lighting ............................................. 124
Driving safety systems......................... 77 Separately locking the trunk lid ... 105 Exterior lamp switch .................... 124
ABS ................................................ 77 Separately unlocking the trunk lid 105 Combination switch ..................... 128
BAS ................................................ 78 Power closing assist for doors and Hazard warning flasher ................ 128
ESP................................................. 79 trunk lid........................................ 106 Interior lighting ............................ 129
Four wheel electronic traction Automatic central locking ............ 106 Courtesy lighting.......................... 130
system (4MATIC) with the ESP ....... 82 Locking and unlocking from the Instrument cluster ............................. 131
Anti-theft systems................................ 83 inside ........................................... 107 Instrument cluster illumination .... 131
Immobilizer..................................... 83 Seats ................................................. 108 Coolant temperature gauge ......... 132
Anti-theft alarm system.................. 83 Easy-entry/exit feature ................ 108 Trip odometer .............................. 132
Tow-away alarm ............................. 85 Removing and installing front seat Tachometer.................................. 133
head restraints............................. 109 Outside temperature indicator..... 133
Contents
Control system .................................. 134 Good visibility ..................................... 174 Ventilated storage compartment
Multifunction display.................... 134 Rear view mirror ........................... 174 (except S 55 AMG) ....................... 192
Multifunction steering wheel........ 135 Electrically folding exterior rear Rear passenger compartment
Menus .......................................... 137 view mirrors .................................. 176 adjustable air vents ...................... 192
Standard display menu ................ 139 Windshield wipers......................... 177 Rear passenger compartment
AUDIO menu ................................ 139 Headlamp cleaning system* climate control*............................ 193
CD changer* operating mode ...... 142 (Standard on S 500, S 600, Power windows .................................. 195
TEL menu* ................................... 144 S 55 AMG) .................................... 177 Opening and closing the windows 195
NAVI menu................................... 147 Sun visors ..................................... 178 Synchronizing the power windows 198
Distronic* menu........................... 147 Rear window sunshade* ............... 179 Sliding/pop-up roof............................ 199
Trip computer menu..................... 148 Rear door window sunshade* ....... 179 Opening and closing the
Malfunction memory menu .......... 150 Automatic climate control .................. 180 sliding/pop-up roof....................... 199
Settings menu.............................. 151 Setting the temperature................ 183 Synchronizing the sliding/
Automatic transmission..................... 164 Adjusting air distribution............... 184 pop-up roof ................................... 202
One-touch gearshifting................. 165 Adjusting air volume ..................... 186 Driving systems.................................. 203
Gear ranges ................................. 166 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ........ 186 Cruise control ............................... 203
Gear selector lever position ......... 167 Defrosting ..................................... 187 Distronic* ..................................... 206
Steering wheel gearshift control Air recirculation mode .................. 187 AIRMATIC ..................................... 218
(Speedshift) S 55 AMG................. 168 Charcoal filter ............................... 188 Active Body Control (ABC)* .......... 220
Program mode selector switch..... 170 Rear window defroster.................. 189 Parktronic* (Parking assist).......... 224
Accelerator position..................... 170 Deactivating the climate control Loading .............................................. 229
Manual shift program S 55 AMG .. 171 system .......................................... 190 Roof rack* .................................... 229
Emergency operation Air conditioning............................. 190 Loading instructions ..................... 229
(Limp home mode) ....................... 173 Residual heat and ventilation........ 191 Cargo tie-down hooks................... 230
Contents
Useful features .................................. 231 At the gas station .............................. 269

Storage compartments................. 231 Operation ......................................... 257 Refueling...................................... 269
Ashtrays ....................................... 238 The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ......... 258 Check regularly and before a
Cigarette lighters.......................... 239 Driving instructions............................ 259 long trip ....................................... 270
Heated steering wheel* ............... 240 Drive sensibly save fuel............. 259 Engine compartment ......................... 272
Telephone*................................... 241 Drinking and driving ..................... 259 Hood ............................................ 272
Tele Aid ........................................ 242 Pedals .......................................... 259 Engine oil ..................................... 273
Garage door opener ..................... 250 Power assistance ......................... 259 Transmission fluid level................ 278
Infrared reflecting windshield....... 256 Brakes.......................................... 260 Active Body Control* (ABC*)
Driving off .................................... 261 fluid level ..................................... 278
Parking......................................... 261 Coolant ........................................ 278
Tires ............................................. 262 Battery ......................................... 280
Hydroplaning................................ 263 Windshield washer system and
Tire traction.................................. 263 headlamp cleaning system*......... 281
Tire speed rating .......................... 263 Tires and wheels................................ 282
Winter driving instructions ........... 264 Important guidelines .................... 282
Standing water............................. 265 Life of tires................................... 283
Passenger compartment .............. 266 Direction of rotation..................... 283
Driving abroad.............................. 266 Checking tire inflation pressure ... 283
Control and operation of radio Rotating wheels ........................... 291
transmitters ................................. 266 Winter driving .................................... 292
Catalytic converter....................... 267 Winter tires .................................. 292
Emission control .......................... 267 Block heater (Canada only) .......... 293
Coolant temperature.................... 268 Snow chains................................. 293
Contents
Maintenance...................................... 294 Replacing wiper blades ...................... 359

Clearing the service indicator ...... 294 Practical hints .................................. 303 Removing wiper blades................. 359
Service term exceeded ................ 294 What to do if ? ................................. 304 Installing wiper blades .................. 360
Calling up the service indicator.... 295 Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 304 Flat tire............................................... 361
Resetting the service indicator..... 295 Lamp in center console................. 311 Preparing the vehicle .................... 361
Vehicle care....................................... 296 Messages in the display................ 312 Mounting the spare wheel ............ 361
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........ 296 Where will I find ...? ............................ 344 Battery ............................................... 366
First aid kit.................................... 344 Disconnecting the battery ............ 367
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, Removing the battery ................... 367
luggage bowl, spare wheel............ 344 Charging and reinstalling battery.. 367
Unlocking/locking in an emergency... 348 Reconnecting the battery ............. 368
Unlocking the vehicle.................... 348 Jump starting...................................... 369
Locking the vehicle ....................... 349 Towing the vehicle.............................. 371
Replacing batteries in Installing towing eye bolt .............. 373
the SmartKey/ SmartKey with Fuses.................................................. 374
KEYLESS-GO* ............................... 349 Fuse boxes in passenger
Fuel filler flap ................................ 351 compartment ................................ 374
Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 352 Fuse boxes in engine
Sliding/pop-up roof ...................... 352 compartment ................................ 375
Replacing bulbs .................................. 353 Emergency engine shut-down....... 376
Bulbs............................................. 353
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 355
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 358
Contents
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 391

Technical data.................................. 377 Capacities .................................... 391 Technical terms............................... 401
Spare parts service ............................ 378 Engine oils.................................... 393
Warranty coverage............................. 379 Engine oil additives ...................... 393
Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 393 Index................................................. 407
Information Booklet...................... 379 Brake fluid.................................... 394
Identification labels............................ 380 Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 394
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 381 Fuel requirements ........................ 394
S 430 / S 500 (all models)........... 381 Gasoline additives ........................ 395
S 55 AMG..................................... 381 Coolants....................................... 395
S 600 ........................................... 381 Windshield and headlamp washer
Engine................................................ 382 system ......................................... 398
Rims and tires.................................... 384 Consumer information ....................... 399
Same size tires............................. 385 Uniform tire quality grading ......... 399
Mixed size tires ............................ 387
Spare wheel ................................. 388
Electrical system................................ 389
Main dimensions and weights............ 390
Main dimensions .......................... 390
Weights ........................................ 390
Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories ap-
held responsible for them, even if in indi- proved by us are available at your autho-
We recommend using genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- rized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies receive comprehensive information, also
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- on permissible technical modifications,
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, and where proper installation will be per-
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. formed.
their reliability, safety and special suitabili- Please do not use them.
ty for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
9
Introduction
Operators Manual
Operators Manual
This Operators Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operators Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. New Car Limited Warranty
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in Emission System Warranty
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are Emission Performance Warranty
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operators Vermont only)
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws)
the operation of any equipment, your au- care and operating procedures.
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be The Operators Manual and Service Book-
glad to demonstrate the proper proce- let are important documents and should be
dures. kept with the vehicle.
10
Introduction
Operators Manual
Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calender days. Written notification
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair, Assistance Center, One Mercedes
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
11
Introduction
Operators Manual
Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership
The Service Booklet describes all the nec- The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to
essary maintenance work which should be Program provides factory trained technical send in the Change of Address Notice
performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number tion Booklet, or simply call the
Always have the Service Booklet with you
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
when you take the vehicle to your autho- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser-
The service advisor will record each ser-
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
vice in the booklet for you. Customer Assistance Representatives your own interest that we can contact you
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
gram Brochure in your glove box. able to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the Notice of Purchase of Used
Car found in the Service and Warranty In-
formation Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
12
Introduction
Operators Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for- your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
eign countries, please be aware that: write to:
service facilities or replacement parts In the USA:
may not be readily available,
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat- European Delivery Department
alytic converters may not be available; One Mercedes Drive
the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
catalysts,
In Canada:
gasoline may have a considerably low-
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
European Delivery Department
cause engine damage.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
13
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operators Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. For you to Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
find information quickly each section has about the equipment installed in your vehicle can be found in this section.
its own reference color: cle. This section expands on the Getting
started section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes
At a glance
with the basic functions of your vehicle, The glossary provides explanations of the
Here you will find an overview of all the this section will be of particular interest to most important technical terms.
controls that can be operated from the you.
drivers seat. The table of contents and the index are de-
signed to help you find information quickly
Operation and easily.
Getting started Here you will find all the information you The following publications are part of your
Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi- vehicle documentation:
need for your first drive. You should read cle. this Operators Manual
this section first if this is your first
the Service Booklet
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-
ing or borrowing this vehicle. Practical hints Separate operating instructions will be
This section provides fast assistance for provided as required depending on the
dealing with problems you may encounter. equipment options installed in your vehi-
Safety and Security cle.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
14
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are found in this This symbol points to instructions for
Operators Manual: Warning! G you to follow.
* Optional equipment is identified A number of these symbols appearing
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
with an asterisk. Since standard ards that may endanger your health or life, in succession indicates a multiple-step
equipment varies between models, or the health or life of others. procedure.
the descriptions and illustrations in
Page This symbol tells you where to
this manual may differ slightly from
! look for further information on a
the actual equipment of your vehi-
topic.
cle. Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle. This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
i
page.
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful. -> In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to in-
dicate cross-references to term
definitions.
DISPLAY Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicles electronic components are in- may cause serious damage and impair the
terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a the Technical data section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual
tems. Electronic malfunctions could seri- bance, or you suspect that damage to your traffic rules and regulations
ously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
down, and drive with caution to an area dards
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic which is a safe distance from the road.
components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
or other qualified maintenance or repair fa- to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the cility for further inspection or repairs. risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore nev- warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
er turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.
16
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.
18
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
19
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 Combination switch 7 Front Parktronic* (Parking 226 g Parking brake pedal 45
assist) warning indicator h Hood lock release 272
Turn signals 47
for right front area
Windshield wipers 48 j Parking brake release 45
8 Overhead control panel 27
High beam 128 k Door control panel 28
9 Glove box lock 231
2 Cruise control lever 210 l Exterior lamp switch 124
a Glove box lid release 231
Cruise control 203 m Headlamp washer button* 177
b Glove box 231
n Front Parktronic* (Parking 226
Distronic* 206 c Center console 25 assist) warning indicator
3 Instrument cluster 22 d Starter switch 31 for left front area
4 Multifunction steering 24 e Horn
wheel
f Steering wheel adjustment 37
5 Gear range indicator, clock 22 stalk
6 Lever for voice control sys- Heated steering wheel* 240
tem*, see separate operat-
ing instructions
21
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
22
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 Coolant temperature gauge 132 A High beam headlamp 48 a Outside temperature indica- 133
2 Fuel gauge with: indicator tor
Fuel reserve warning lamp 308 - Antilock Brake Sys- 304 b Left display with:
tem (ABS) warning 1 Supplemental 310
3 L Left turn signal 47 lamp
indicator lamp restraint system
7 Reset button 131 indicator lamp
K Right turn signal
indicator lamp 8 Display with: ; Brake warning lamp, 305
Program mode 170 USA only
4 Speedometer with:
Gear range indicator 166 3 Brake warning lamp,
v ESP warning lamp 308 Canada only
Digital clock (see
l Distance warning 307 ? Engine malfunction 306
lamp COMAND operating in-
structions) indicator lamp, USA
Vehicles without Distronic*: only
Warning lamp without func- 9 Multifunction display
with: Engine malfunction
tion. It illuminates when the indicator lamp,
ignition is on. It should go Trip odometer 132 Canada only
out when the engine is run- Main odometer 132
ning. H Tire pressure warning 287,
Stored speed for: lamp 309
5 Tachometer 133
Cruise control 203 c Knob for instrument cluster 131
6 Right display with: illumination
Distronic* 206
< Seat belt telltale 308
23
At a glance
Item Page Item Page
1 Multifunction display 134 4 Menu systems: Press 135
Operating control 134 button
system for next system
2 Selecting the submenu or 135 for previous system
setting the volume
5 Moving within a menu: 135
up / to increase Press button
down / to decrease j for next display
3 Telephone*: Press button 144 k for previous display
s to take a call
to dial a call
t to end a call
to reject an in-
coming call
24
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page
1 Switch for rear window 179 9 Rear seat head restraints, 110
sunshade switch for folding down
2 Parking assist (Parktronic* 227 a Tow-away alarm switch 85
system) deactivation b COMAND system (see
switch separate operating instruc-
3 Airmatic or ABC* switch 220 tions)
4 Level control switch 222 c Automatic climate control 194
5 Central locking switch 107 d Ashtray 238
Anti-theft alarm system in- 84 Lighter 239
dicator lamp
6 Hazard warning flasher 128
on/off switch
7 Central unlocking switch 107
8 ESP control switch 80
25
At a glance
Center console
Lower part Item Page

1 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop 33
button
2 Gear selector lever for 43
automatic transmission
3 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 71
indicator lamp
4 Thumbwheel for setting 213
distance in Distronic*
5 Distance warning func- 213
tion* on/off switch
6 Lower storage compart- 232
ments
7 Program mode selector for 170
automatic transmission
26
At a glance
Item Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off 130
2 Rear interior lighting 130
on/off
3 Right reading lamp on/off 130
4 Interior lighting control 129
5 Sliding/pop-up roof 199
6 Hands-free microphone for 242
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone*, and
voice control system* (see
separate operating instruc-
tions)
7 Rear view mirror 38
8 Garage door opener 250
9 Tele Aid (emergency call 245
system) button
27
At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel
Item Page Item Page
1 Door handle 96 7 Rear passenger compart- 74
2 Memory function (for stor- 121 ment override switch
ing seat, exterior mirror, 8 Switches for opening/clos- 195
and steering wheel set- ing rear windows
tings) 9 Remote trunk lid release 97
3 Seat heating* 114 switch
Seat ventilation* 117 Trunk lid opening/closing
99
4 Seat adjustment 35 system* switch
5 Exterior mirror adjustment 38,

174
6 Switches for opening/clos- 195
ing front door windows
28
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
29
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking
The Getting started section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey Press unlock button on the
overview of the vehicles most basic func- SmartKey.
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners All turn signal lamps flash once. The
should pay special attention to the infor- locking knobs in the doors move up.
mation given here.
Get in the vehicle and insert the
If you are already familiar with the basic
SmartKey in the starter switch.
functions described here, the Controls in
detail section will provide you with further For more information, see Locking and
information. The corresponding page refer- unlocking ( page 88).
ences are located at the end of each seg-
ment.
SmartKey with remote control
1 Lock button
2 Unlock button for trunk lid
3 Unlock button
4 Panic button
30
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions !

Warning! G If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the battery may not be
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
sufficiently charged.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and Check the battery and charge it
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- if necessary ( page 366).
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an Get a jump start ( page 369).
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment may cause an accident To prevent accelerated battery dis-
and/or serious personal injury. charge or a completely discharged bat-
tery, always remove the SmartKey from
Starter switch
the starter switch when the engine is
0 For removing SmartKey i not in operation.
1 Power supply to some electrical con- The SmartKey can only be removed
sumers, such as seat adjustment from the starter switch with the gear
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical selector lever in position P.
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
31
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* i

To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
Warning! G
If your vehicle is equipped with the
with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the
KEYLESS-GO function, your vehicle checks When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
vehicle, no further than approximately
whether the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
3 feet (1 meter) away from the door.
valid when you grasp the door handle. If SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
your SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
Grasp the outside door handle. attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
the doors will unlock, and you can open
them. All turn signal lamps flash once. The unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
locking knobs in the doors move up. cle equipment may cause an accident
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
and/or serious personal injury.
KEYLESS-GO function. If the SmartKey is inside the vehicle, press-
ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on
the gear selector lever corresponds to
turning the SmartKey to the various starter
switch positions.
32
Getting started
Unlocking
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be Ignition (or position 2)

located in the vehicle.
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Make sure the gear selector lever is set button 1 twice.
to P.
This supplies power to all electrical
Do not depress the brake pedal. consumers. All the lamps in the instru-
ment cluster come on.
Position 1
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
button 1 once.
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button start/stop button once, the power sup-
This supplies power to some electrical ply is again switched off.
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO consumers, such as seat adjustment.
start/stop button 1, the vehicles
For more information, see SmartKey with
on-board electronics have status 0 (as with i KEYLESS-GO* ( page 91).
SmartKey removed). If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button For information on starting the engine us-
ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
once again, the ignition (position 2) see Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
is switched on ( page 44).
twice, the power supply is again
switched off
33
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can

correctly fasten your seat belt ( page 40).
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and Never place hands under the seat or near Children 12 years old and under must never
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- any moving parts while a seat is being ad- ride in the front seat, except in a
tening of seat belts, must be done before justed. Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
the vehicle is put into motion. compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
Seats Warning! G hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
Warning! G SmartKey from the starter switch, take the flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and fatal injury will result.
Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving. lock your vehicle.
According to accident statistics, children
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause Even with the SmartKey removed from the are safer when properly restrained in the
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. starter switch or the SmartKey with rear seating positions than in the front seat-
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, ing positions. Infants and small children
back in an excessively reclined position as the power seats can be operated when the must ride in back seats and be seated in an
this can be dangerous. You could slide un- respective door is open. Therefore, do not appropriate infant or child restraint system,
der the seat belt in a collision. If you slide leave children unattended in the vehicle, or which is properly secured with the vehicle's
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu- seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
domen or neck. That could cause serious or pervised use of vehicle equipment may lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat cause an accident and/or serious personal accordance with the child seat manufactur-
belts provide the best restraint when the injury. ers instructions.
wearer is in a nearly upright position and
belts are properly positioned on the body.
34
Getting started
Adjusting
Switch on ignition. Seat cushion tilt

A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints or Press the switch up or down in the di-
are not properly secured in the vehicle and rection of arrow 3 until your upper
Open the respective door.
the child is not properly secured in the child legs are lightly supported.
restraint.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Seat cushion depth
Press the switch forward or backward
Seat adjustment Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 5.
The seat adjustment switches are located in the direction of arrow 4 until your
on the front doors. Adjust seat to a comfortable seating legs are supported comfortably.
position that still allows you to reach
the accelerator/brake pedal safely. Seat backrest tilt
The position should be as far to the rear
as possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls. in the direction of arrow 6 until your
arms are slightly angled when holding
i the steering wheel.
When moving the seat, make sure
there are no items in the footwell or be- Seat height
hind the seats. Otherwise you could Press the switch up or down in the di-
damage the seats. rection of arrow 2.
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat height The memory function ( page 121) lets
3 Seat cushion tilt you store the setting for the seat posi-
4 Seat cushion depth tion together with the settings for the
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment steering wheel and the exterior rear
6 Seat backrest tilt view mirrors.
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint height Head restraint tilt The front passenger seat head restraint
Press the switch up or down in the di- automatically lowers after a few sec-
rection of arrow 1. onds when the front passenger seat is
not occupied. This improves the
driver's outward view as well as the for-
Warning! G ward view from the rear passenger
compartment.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints. When the front passenger seat is occu-
pied again, the front passenger seat
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
head restraint returns to the last set
the head restraint supports the back of the
position within a few seconds.
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten- Manually adjust the angle of the head re-
tial for injury to the head and neck in the straint. If the front passenger seat was moved
event of an accident or similar situation. fore or aft while not being occupied,
Push or pull on the lower edge of the
the front passenger seat head restraint
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraint cushion.
returns to a position that corresponds
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
i best with the seats axial position when
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
The feature below is deactivated at the the seat is occupied again.
dent.
factory. If you wish to have it activated,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz For more information, see Seats
Center: ( page 108).
36
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel Steering wheel adjustment Adjusting steering column in or out

The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is Move stalk forward or back in the direc-
located on the steering column (lower left). tion of arrow 1 until a comfortable
Warning! G steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
Adjusting steering column up or down
ing could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle. Move the stalk up or down in the direc-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the tion of arrow 2.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the Make sure your legs can move freely
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and and all the displays (incl. malfunction
lock your vehicle. and indicator lamps) on the instrument
Even with the SmartKey removed from the 1 Adjusting steering column, in or out cluster are clearly visible.
starter switch or the SmartKey with 2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
i
Switch on ignition. The memory function ( page 121) lets
the steering wheel adjustment feature can
be operated when the drivers door is open. or you store settings for the steering
Therefore, do not leave children unattended wheel together with the settings for the
Open the drivers door.
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked exterior rear view mirrors and the seat
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip- position.
ment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury. For more information, see Heated steer-
ing wheel* ( page 240).
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Mirrors Interior rear view mirror Exterior rear view mirror

Manually adjust the interior rear view
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
mirror. Warning! G
good view of the road and traffic condi- ! Exercise care when using the passenger
tions. Electrolyte drops coming into contact side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
with the vehicle paint finish can only be surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
Warning! G completely removed while in their liq- for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
uid state and by applying plenty of wa- are closer than they appear. Check your in-
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte ter. terior rear view mirror or glance over your
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror shoulder before changing lanes.
glass breaks. For more information, see Rear view mir-
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al- ror ( page 174).
low the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
38
Getting started
Adjusting
The buttons are located on the drivers Switch on ignition. i

door. The memory function ( page 121) lets
Press button 1 for the left mirror or
button 2 for the right mirror. you store the setting for the exterior
rear view mirrors together with the set-
Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
ting for the steering wheel and the seat
left, or right according to the desired
position.
setting.
At low ambient temperatures, the mir-
! rors will be heated automatically.
For information on how to reposition
the exterior mirror housing when it was For more information, see Folding the ex-
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the terior mirrors in and out automatically
1 Drivers side exterior rear view mirror rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit ( page 176).
button from the front), see Folding the exteri-
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir- or mirrors in and out manually
ror button ( page 176).
3 Adjustment button
39
Getting started
Driving
Driving
Fastening the seat belts
Warning! G In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
Do not lay any objects in the drivers foot- Warning! G seat belt. The airbags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the drivers footwell have sufficient clear- the occupants are using their seat belts
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
ance for the pedals. ( page 58).
off. Always make sure your passengers are
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
the objects could get caught between the Warning! G
pedals. You could then no longer brake or Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
accelerate. sition your seat belt greatly increases your Children 12 years old and under must never
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an ride in the front seat, except in a
accident. You and your passengers should Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
always wear seat belts. compatible child seat, which operates with
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
can be considerably more severe without hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
your seat belt properly buckled. Without bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
your seat belt buckled, you are much more they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured fatal injury will result.
or killed. 1
BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens Automo-
tive Corp.
40
Getting started
Driving

are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat- Never let more people ride in the vehicle Read and observe the additional warning no-
ing positions. Infants and small children than there are seat belts available. Be sure tices printed in the Safety and Security
must ride in back seats and be seated in an everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re- section ( page 62).
appropriate infant or child restraint system, strained with a separate seat belt. Never use
which is properly secured with the vehicle's a seat belt for more than one person at a
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via time.
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufactur-
ers instructions.
Warning! G
A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
are not properly secured in the vehicle and backrest in an excessively reclined position
the child is not properly secured in the child as this can be dangerous. You could slide
restraint. under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- 1 Release button
domen or neck. That could cause serious or 2 Buckle
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and 3 Latch plate
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the Pull the seat belt smoothly from the
belt is properly positioned on the body. seat belt outlet.
41
Getting started
Driving
Place the shoulder portion of the belt Place the seat backrest in a nearly up-
across the top of your shoulder and the right position. Warning! G
lap portion across your hips.
Never use a seat belt for more than one Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
Push latch plate 3 into buckle 2 until person at a time. could tear.
it clicks.
Do not fasten a seat belt around a per- Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to son and another object at the same door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion time. This could damage the belt.
up.
Check your seat belt during travel to Never attempt to make modifications to
make sure that it is properly posi- seat belts. This could impair the effective-
Proper use of seat belts
tioned. ness of the belts.
Do not twist the belt when fastening. Make sure that the seat belt is always Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder fitted snugly. Take special care of this severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
portion is located as close as possible when wearing loose clothing. not be able to provide adequate protection.
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
not touch the neck). Never pass the
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
shoulder portion of the belt under your
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
arm.
ter.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
42
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine Automatic transmission Starting with the SmartKey

Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
Warning! G
Do not depress accelerator.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
to position 3 and hold until the engine
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
starts ( page 31).
sciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas i
(such as a garage) which are not properly You can also use the touch-start
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas Gearshift pattern for automatic function. Turn the SmartKey to
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, transmission position 3 and release it again immedi-
have the cause determined and corrected P Park position with gear selector lever ately. The engine then starts automati-
immediately. If you must drive under these lock cally.
conditions, drive with at least one window R Reverse gear
fully open. N Neutral Depress the brake pedal.
D Drive position
The gear selector lever lock is released.
For more information, see the Controls in
detail section ( page 164). For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see Turning off with
the SmartKey ( page 53).
43
Getting started
Driving
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* Make sure the gear selector lever is set Starting difficulties
You can start your vehicle without the to P. If the engine does not start as described,
SmartKey in the starter switch using the Depress the brake pedal during the carry out the following steps:
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the starting procedure. Do not depress ac-
If you are starting the engine with the
gear selector lever. celerator.
SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be The gear selector lever lock is released. switch to position 0 and repeat starting
located in the vehicle. procedure.
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button 1 once. If you are starting the engine with
The engine starts automatically if the KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the may be open to allow for better detec-
vehicle . tion of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
For information on turning off the engine or:
with KEYLESS-GO, see Turning off the en- Start the engine with the SmartKey as
gine with KEYLESS-GO* ( page 54). radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
44
Getting started
Driving
Repeat the starting procedure Parking brake

( page 43). Remember that extended Warning! G
starting attempts can drain the battery.
Get a jump start ( page 369). SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
If the engine does not start after several SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
starting attempts, there could be a mal- lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
function in the engine electronics or in the attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
fuel supply system. unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake, which could result in an acci-
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
dent and/or serious injury.
Center.
Release the parking brake by pulling

handle 2.
The indicator lamp ; (USA only) or
1 Parking brake pedal 3 (Canada only) in the instrument
2 Parking brake release handle cluster goes out.
45
Getting started
Driving
Driving Once the vehicle is in motion, the automat-

Depress the brake pedal.
Warning! G ic central locking system engages and the
locking knobs drop down.
Move gear selector lever to position D On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
or R. in order to obtain braking action. This could !
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi- If you hear a warning signal and a mes-
Warning! G cle control. Your vehicles ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
sage appears in the multifunction dis-
play when driving off, you have
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le- forgotten to release the parking brake.
ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high- ! Release the parking brake.
er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly In order to avoid damaging the trans-
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel- mission, After a cold start, the automatic transmis-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You sion shifts at a higher engine revolution.
wait for the gear selection process
could lose control of the vehicle and hit This allows the catalytic converter to reach
someone or something. Only shift into gear
to complete before setting the vehi-
cle in motion. its operating temperature earlier.
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. place the gear selector lever in !
position R only when the vehicle is Do not run cold engine at high engine
stopped. speeds. Running a cold engine at high
engine speeds may shorten the service
Release the brake pedal. life of the engine.
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
46
Getting started
Driving
! Switching on headlamps Turn signals and high beam

Simultaneously depressing the acceler-
ator pedal and applying the brake re- The combination switch is located on the
duces engine performance and causes left of the steering column.
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open doors only when condi-
tions are safe to do so.
You can deactivate the automatic lock- Exterior lamp switch
ing using the control system
( page 159). 1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on Combination switch
For more information, see Driving instruc- Turn the switch to B. 1 Turn signals, right
tions ( page 259). 2 Turn signals, left
For more information, see Exterior lamp
switch ( page 124). Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal flashes three times.
47
Getting started
Driving
High beam Windshield wipers Switching on windshield wipers

Push the combination switch forward. Turn the combination switch to the de-
The combination switch is located on the
sired position depending on the inten-
The high beam headlamps are switched left of the steering column.
sity of the rain.
on.
The high beam headlamp 0 Windshield wipers off
indicator A in the tachometer
I Intermittent wiping (interval depen-
comes on.
dent on wetness of windshield)
For more information, see High beam II Normal wiper speed
flasher ( page 128).
III Fast wiper speed
i
The intermittent wiping interval is de-
Combination switch pendent on wetness of windshield.
1 Single wipe Wiping will not occur with a door open.
2 Switching on windshield wipers
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
48
Getting started
Driving
! Wiping with windshield washer fluid turn off the engine by pressing the
Do not leave windshield wipers in inter- Press switch in the direction of KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
mittent setting when vehicle is taken to arrow 1 past the resistance point. and open the drivers door (with the
an automatic car wash or during wind- drivers door open, starter switch is
The windshield wiper operates with in position 0, same as with
shield cleaning. Wipers will operate in
washer fluid. SmartKey removed from starter
the presence of water sprayed on the
windshield, and wipers may be dam- For information on filling up the washer switch)
aged as a result. reservoir, see Windshield washer system before attempting to remove any block-
and headlamp cleaning system* age.
The switch should not be left in inter-
( page 281).
mittent setting as the wipers will wipe Remove blockage.
the windshield once every time the en- !
gine is started. Dust that accumulates Turn the windshield wipers on
If anything blocks the windshield wip- again.
on the windshield might scratch the
ers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
glass and/or damage the wiper blades If windshield wipers fail to function at
immediately.
when wiping occurs on a dry wind- all in switch position I,
shield. For safety reasons,
set the combination switch to the
turn off the engine by turning next highest wiper speed
Single wipe the SmartKey to position 0 and
withdraw SmartKey from starter have the windshield wipers
Press switch briefly in the direction of
switch checked at the nearest authorized
arrow 1. Mercedes-Benz Center
The windshield wipers wipe one time or
without washer fluid.
49
Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving The coolant temperature is above In case of accident

248F (120C)
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
The engine runs erratically and misfires The coolant is too hot and is no longer
Do not start the engine under any cir-
cooling the engine.
An ignition cable may be damaged. cumstances.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
The engine electronics may not be op- Notify local fire and/or police authori-
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
erating properly. ties.
and coolant to cool.
Unburned gasoline may have entered If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
Check the coolant level and add cool-
the catalytic converter and damaged it. termined:
ant if necessary ( page 278).
Give very little gas. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
i Center.
Have the problem repaired by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as Excessive coolant temperatures trigger If no damage can be determined on the
soon as possible. a warning message in the multifunction
display ( page 323). major assemblies
fuel system
engine mount:
Start the engine in the usual manner.
50
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked Warning! G Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
your vehicle. End your drive as follows. start/stop button (vehicles with
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
KEYLESS-GO*).
bustible materials such as grass, hay, or
Warning! G leaves can come into contact with the hot Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
exhaust system, as these materials could be
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re- leaving.
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
moving the SmartKey from the starter
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
the SmartKey is removed. sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
Warning! G Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to
With the engine not running, there is no
position P.
power assistance for the brake and the
Slowly release brake pedal.
steering systems. In this case, it is impor-
tant to keep in mind that a considerably When parked on an incline, turn front
higher degree of effort is necessary to brake wheel towards the road curb.
and steer the vehicle.
51
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking brake
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se-
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the lector lever not fully engaged in position P is
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an cle from moving, possibly hitting people or
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the objects.
parking brake and/or move the gear selec- Always set the parking brake in addition to
tor lever from position P, either of which shifting to position P ( page 166).
could result in an accident and/or serious
injury. When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
1 Parking brake
2 Release handle
Step firmly on parking brake 1.
When the engine is running, the
indicator lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
52
Getting started
Parking and locking
Switching off headlamps i

The SmartKey can only be removed
Warning! G
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M.
from the starter switch with the gear
To prevent possible personal injury, always
For more information, see Lighting selector lever in position P.
keep hands and fingers away from the door
( page 124).
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
Press the seat belt release button cially careful when small children are
Turning off the engine ( page 41). around.
Place the gear selector lever in Allow the retractor to completely re- Before closing doors, make sure there is no
position P. wind the seat belt by guiding the latch possibility of someone getting caught in a
plate. door during closing.
i
Always set the parking brake in addi-
i
After exiting the vehicle press the lock
tion to shifting to position P. With the SmartKey removed and the
button on the SmartKey
drivers door open, a warning sounds if
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels ( page 30).
the vehicles exterior lamps are not
towards the curb. switched off. All turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs on the doors move
Turning off with the SmartKey down.
( page 31) to position 0 and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
53
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off the engine with !

Warning! G KEYLESS-GO* If you hear a warning signal, you have
Place the gear selector lever in either
SmartKey from the starter switch and lock position P. forgotten to turn off the lights be-
your vehicle. Do not leave children unat- Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop fore opening the drivers door
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an button to shut off the engine. or
With the driver's door closed, the start- tried to turn off the engine while the
cle equipment may cause an accident
er switch is now in position 1. With the gear selector lever is not in P.
and/or serious injury.
drivers door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey Turn off the lights or place the gear se-
For more information, see Locking and removed from starter switch lector lever in P.
unlocking ( page 88). ( page 31).
Press the seat belt release button Warning! G
( page 41).
Allow the retractor to completely re- To prevent possible personal injury, always
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch keep hands and fingers away from the door
plate. openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
cially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
54
Getting started
Parking and locking
After exiting the vehicle, press lock

button 1 on the door handle or on the Warning! G
trunk lid.
All turn signal lamps flash three times. SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
The locking knobs on the doors move SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
down. lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
1 Lock button on the door handle and/or serious personal injury.
For more information, see Locking and

unlocking ( page 88).
55
56
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument The restraint systems are fully operational
portant facts about the restraint systems cluster comes on if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when
of the vehicle. the engine is running.
for about four seconds when you turn
The restraint systems are: the SmartKey in the starter switch to A malfunction in the system has been de-
position 1 or press the KEYLESS-GO* tected if the 1 indicator lamp:
Seat belts
start/stop button once. It then goes
fails to extinguish after approximately
Emergency tensioning device out briefly, comes on again and re-
four seconds.
Airbags mains lit until you start the engine.
does not come on at all.
Child seats for about four seconds when you start
the engine by turning the SmartKey or comes on after the engine was started
Child seat recognition or while driving.
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
Lower anchors and tethers for children button. For safety reasons, we strongly recom-
(LATCH) mend that you visit an authorized
i Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
As independent systems, their protective
The 1 indicator lamp remains lit if have the system checked.
effects work in conjunction with each oth-
the SmartKey is turned to position 2
er. For more information, see Practical hints
and left there or the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button is pressed twice. The ( page 303).
i
indicator lamp will go out when you
For information on infants and children
start the engine.
traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
straint systems for infants and chil-
dren, see Children in the vehicle
( page 69).
58
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Airbags
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front
comes on during driving or does not come airbags inflate, it is very important for the
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a Airbags are designed to reduce the potential driver and passenger front to always be in a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly of injury and fatality in certain frontal improperly seated position and to wear your
recommend that you visit an authorized pacts (front airbags), side impacts (side im- seat belts.
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have pact airbags and head protection window For maximum protection in the event of a
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may curtain airbags) or rollovers (head protec- collision always be in normal seated position
not be activated when needed in an acci- tion window curtain airbags). However, no with your back against the seat backrest.
dent, which could result in serious or fatal system available today can totally eliminate Fasten your seat belt and ensure that it is
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and injuries and fatalities. properly positioned on your body.
unnecessarily which could also result in
The activation of the airbags temporarily re- Since the airbag inflates with considerable
injury.
leases a small amount of dust from the air- speed and force, a proper seating and hands
In addition, improper repair work on the SRS bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious on steering wheel position will help to keep
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera- to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in you at a safe distance from the airbag. Oc-
tive or causing unintended airbag deploy- the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem- cupants who are unbelted, out of position or
ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only porary breathing difficulty for people with too close to the airbag can be seriously in-
be performed by qualified technicians. Con- asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid jured by an airbag as it inflates with great
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle force in the blink of an eye:
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
position with your back against the seat
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
backrest.
fresh air by opening a window or door.
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Adjust the driver seat as far as possible

rearward, still permitting proper opera-
This could result in serious injuries or
death should the airbag be triggered. Al-
Warning! G
tion of vehicle controls. The distance ways sit nearly upright, properly use the Accident research shows that the safest
from the center of the drivers breast- seat belts and appropriate size infant or
bone to the center of the airbag cover on place for children in an automobile is in the
child restraint system. rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
the steering wheel must be at least 10 in
(25 cm) or more. You should be able to Children 12 years old and under must 12 years old or under in the front passenger
accomplish this by a combination of ad- never ride in the front seat, except in a seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
justments to the seat and steering Mercedes-Benz authorized a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
wheel. If you have any problems, please BabySmartTM compatible child seat, turn off the passenger front airbag.
see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- which operates with the BabySmartTM BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any
ter. system installed in the vehicle to deacti-
side impact airbag.
vate the passenger front airbag when it
Do not lean with your head or chest
is properly installed. Otherwise they will It should be noted that with respect to both
close to the steering wheel or dash-
be struck by the airbag when it inflates front and rear side impact airbags there is a
board.
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fa- possibility for a side airbag related injury if
Keep hands on the outside of steering tal injury will result. occupants, especially children, are not prop-
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in- erly seated or restrained when next to a side
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
side the rim can increase the risk and
sult in severe injuries to you or other occu- airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a
potential severity of hand/arm injury
pants. side impact in order to do its job.
when driver front airbag inflates.
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as If you sell your vehicle, it is extremely impor- To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
possible rearward from the dashboard tant that you make the buyer aware of this follow these guidelines:
when the seat is occupied. safety information. Be sure to give the buyer (1) Occupants, especially children, should
Occupants, especially children, should this Operator's Manual. never place their bodies or lean their
never lean their heads in the area of the heads in the area of the door where the
door where the side airbag inflates. side airbag inflates. This could result in
60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
serious injuries or death should the side i We caution you not to rely on the pres-
airbag be activated. Airbags are designed to activate only in ence of the airbags in order to avoid
certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, wearing your seat belt.
(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
side impacts (side impact and head Your vehicle was originally equipped
the seat belts and use an appropriately
protection window curtain airbags) with airbags that are designed to acti-
sized infant or child restraint system for
which exceed preset thresholds, and in vate in certain impacts exceeding a
all children 12 years old or under.
certain rollovers (head protection win- preset threshold to reduce the poten-
(3) Always wear seat belts properly. dow curtain airbags). Only during these tial and severity of injury. It is important
If you believe that, even with the use of events will they provide their supple- for your safety and that of your passen-
these guidelines, it would be safer for your mental protection. gers that you replace deployed airbags
rear seat occupants to have the rear mount- The driver and passengers should al- and repair any malfunctioning airbags
ed side airbags deactivated, then deactiva- ways wear their seat belts. Otherwise it to ensure that the vehicle will continue
tion can be accomplished upon your written is not possible for airbags to provide to provide supplemental crash protec-
request to do so at your authorized their supplemental protection. tion for occupants.
Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost.
In case of other types of impacts and
Please contact your local authorized
impacts below airbag deployment
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
thresholds, airbags will not be activat-
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
ed. The driver and passengers will then
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
be protected to the extent possible by
a properly fastened seat belt. A proper-
ly fastened seat belt is also needed to
provide the best possible protection in
a rollover.
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,

cover, door trim panels, or door frame An airbag system component within the
emergency tensioning device and steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
trims, and installation of additional elec-
airbag has inflated. Do not touch.
trical/electronic equipment on or near
SRS components and wiring. Keep area In addition, improper repair work on the
Warning! G between airbags and occupants free SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
from objects (e.g. packages, purses, inoperative or causing unintended air-
Damaged seat belts or belts that were umbrellas, etc.). bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
highly stressed in an accident must be therefore only be performed by qualified
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
replaced and their anchoring points technicians. Contact an authorized
They could tear. Mercedes-Benz Center.
must also be checked. Use only belts in-
stalled or supplied by an authorized Do not make any modification that could For your protection and the protection
Mercedes-Benz Center. change the effectiveness of the belts. of others, when scrapping the airbag
Airbags and pyrotechnic emergency ten- Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this unit or emergency tensioning device,
sioning devices (ETDs) are designed to may severely weaken them. In a crash our safety instructions must be fol-
function on a one-time only basis. An they may not be able to provide ade- lowed. These instructions are available
airbag or ETD that was activated must quate protection. from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
be replaced. PRE-SAFE has electrically Do not hang items such as coat hangers Center.
operated reversible pre-tensioners in from the coat hooks or handles over the Given the considerable deployment
addition to the pyrotechnic ETDs. door. These items may turn into projec- speed and the textile structure of the
No modifications of any kind may be tiles and cause head and other injuries airbags, there is the possibility of abra-
made to any components or wiring of when curtain airbag is deployed. sions or other injuries resulting from air-
the SRS. This includes changing or re- Never place your feet on the instrument bag deployment.
moving any component or part of the panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
SRS, the installation of additional trim keep both feet on the floor in front of the
material, badges, etc. over the steering seat.
wheel hub, passenger front airbag
62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When you sell your vehicle we strongly Driver and passenger front airbags are de- !
urge you to give notice to the subsequent ployed: Do not place objects heavier than
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by 20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
in the event of a frontal impact
alerting them to the applicable section in seat. This could cause the front or side
the Operators Manual. if impact exceeds a preset deployment
impact airbag on the front passenger
threshold
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
Front airbags independently of the side impact air- the system's deployment threshold.
bags
The airbags will not deploy in impacts Side impact airbags, window curtain
which do not exceed the systems deploy- airbags
ment thresholds. You will then be protect-
ed by the fastened seat belts.
The passenger front airbag will only be de-
ployed if:
the front passenger seat is occupied
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp in the center console is not lit
( page 71)
the impact exceeds a preset deploy- 1 Window curtain airbag
ment threshold 2 Side impact airbags
1 Driver airbag
2 Passenger front airbag
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The side impact airbags and window cur- Seat belts i

tain airbags are deployed: For information on infants and children
When the engine is started, the seat belt
on the impacted side of the vehicle traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
telltale < illuminates to remind you and
straint systems for infants and chil-
in impacts exceeding a preset deploy- your passengers to fasten your seat belts.
dren, see Children in the vehicle
ment threshold If the drivers seat belt is not fastened be-
( page 69).
independently of the front airbags fore the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < illuminates and a warning
In addition, the window curtain airbags are
deployed:
chime sounds for approximately
six seconds when the engine is started.
Warning! G
in certain vehicle rollovers The use of seat belts and infant and child Always fasten your seat belt before driving
The side impact airbags and window cur- restraint systems is required by law in all off. Always make sure your passengers are
tain airbags are not deployed in impacts 50 states, the District of Columbia, the properly restrained, even those sitting in the
which do not exceed the systems deploy- U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. rear and pregnant women.
ment threshold. Even where this is not the case, all vehicle Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
occupants should have their seat belts fas- sition your seat belt greatly increases your
The front passenger side impact airbag will tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
only deploy if the system senses that the risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
front passenger seat is occupied. For more information, see Fastening the accident. You and your passengers should
seat belts ( page 40). always wear seat belts.
64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries

can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
your seat belt buckled, you are much more backrest in an excessively reclined position stressed in an accident must be replaced
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be cas this an be dangerous. You could slide and their anchoring points must also be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide checked.
or killed. under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- Only use seat belts which have been ap-
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or domen or neck. That could cause serious or proved by Mercedes-Benz.
death is lessened if you are properly wearing even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as seat belt provide the best restraint when the Do not make any modifications to the seat
they are designed if the occupants are prop- wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belts. This can lead to unintended activation
erly wearing their seat belts. belt is properly positioned on the body. or to failure.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
Warning! G not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
Never let more people ride in the vehicle technicians. Contact an authorized
than there are seat belts available. Be sure Mercedes-Benz Center.
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
strained with a separate seat belt. Never use
a seat belt for more than one person at a
time.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G rollovers (window curtain airbags and

ETD).
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldnt have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY Never wear the shoulder belt under your
twisted belt against your body could
arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
Seat belts can only work when used cause injuries.
der. In a crash, your body would move
properly. Never wear seat belts in any Pregnant women should also use a
too far forward. That would increase the
other way than as described in this sec- lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
chance of head and neck injuries. The
tion, as that could result in serious inju- should be positioned as low as possible
belt would also apply too much force to
ries in case of an accident. on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
the ribs or abdomen, which could se-
Each occupant should wear their seat verely injure internal organs such as sure on the abdomen.
belt at all times, because seat belts help your liver or spleen. Never place your feet on the instrument
reduce the likelihood of and potential panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
severity of injuries in accidents, includ- keep both feet on the floor in front of the
objects in or on your clothing, such as
ing rollovers. The integrated restraint seat.
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
system includes SRS (driver airbag, pas-
might cause injuries.
senger front airbag, side impact airbags,
head protection window curtain airbags Position the lap belt as low as possible
for side windows), ETD (seat belt emer- on your hips and not across the abdo-
gency tensioning device), and front seat men. If the belt is positioned across your
knee bolsters. The system is designed abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
to enhance the protection offered to in a crash.
properly belted occupants in certain Never use a seat belt for more than one
frontal (front airbags and ETD) and side person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
(side impact, window curtain airbags belt around a person and another per-
and ETD) impacts which exceed preset son or other objects.
deployment thresholds and in certain
66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD), In an impact, emergency tensioning devic- !

seat belt force limiter es remove slack from the belts in such a Do not place objects heavier than 20
way that the seat belts fit more snugly lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat.
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce This could cause the front or side im-
seats are equipped with emergency ten-
the force exerted by the seat belts on oc- pact airbag on the front passenger side
sioning devices and belt force limiters.
cupants during a crash. to deploy in a crash which exceeds the
The ETD is designed to activate in the fol-
system's deployment threshold.
lowing cases:
Warning! G
in frontal or rear-end impact exceeding Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
a preset severity level A pyrotechnic emergency tensioning device
An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
in certain vehicle rollovers (ETD) that was activated must be replaced.
seats and for the rear outer seats (only for
When disposing of the pyrotechnic emer- vehicles with electrically adjustable rear
if the restraint systems are operational
gency tensioning device, our safety instruc- bench seat* or with individual seats* in the
and functioning correctly, see
tions must be followed. These are available rear) reduces the retracting force of the
1 indicator lamp ( page 58)
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. seat belts when they are in normal use.
i PRE-SAFE has electrically operated revers-
The ETDs for the front seats will only ible pre-tensioners that do not require
activate if the respective front seat belt replacement after activation.
is fastened (latch plate properly insert-
ed into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will
activate with or without the respective
seat belt fastened.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Preventive occupant safety (PRE-SAFE) In such cases, the following systems are i
automatically activated: The PRE-SAFE systems are activated in
A front seat belt with the seat belt the previously described circumstanc-
Warning G buckled is pre-tensioned electrically. es only at speeds exceeding 22 mph
(35 km/h).
The PRE-SAFE system is intended to reduce If the occupied front passenger seat or
the effects of an accident on properly seat rear seats are in an unfavorable posi- When the driving dynamic situation has
belted vehicle occupants. Despite having tion, they are adjusted to a better posi- passed without an accident occurring,
the PRE-SAFE systems in your car, the pos- tion. Rear seat adjustment occurs only the pre-tensioning on the seat belts is
sibility of injuries occurring as a result of an in vehicles with individual seats* in the deactivated.
accident cannot be totally eliminated. rear. You can then adjust the seats and the
Therefore you should always drive carefully sliding sunroof to their previous posi-
The sliding/pop-up roof closes if the
and adjust your driving to the prevailing tion.
vehicle is in a severe skid or is spin-
road, weather, and traffic conditions.
ning.
If the seat belts do not release:
Your vehicle automatically takes preven-
Adjust the backrest or seat slightly to
tive measures to better protect the occu-
pants in the following hazardous the rear until the seat belt tension is di-
situations: minished.
You execute an emergency braking ma- The locking mechanism releases.

neuver and the Brake Assist System
( page 78) is activated.
The PRE-SAFE system detects a critical
driving dynamics situation.
68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle All lap-shoulder belts except the drivers

seat belt have special seat belt retractors Warning! G
If an infant or child is traveling with you in for secure fastening of child restraints.
the vehicle: Never release the seat belt buckle while the
To fasten a child restraint, follow child re- vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
Secure the child using an infant or child straint instructions for mounting. Then pull belt retractor will be deactivated.
restraint appropriate for the age and the shoulder belt out completely and let it
size of the child. retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratch-
eting sound can be heard to indicate that !
Make sure the infant or child is proper-
ly secured by a belt at all times while the special seat belt retractor is activated. The use of infant or child restraints is
the vehicle is in motion. The belt is now locked. Push down on child required by law in all 50 states, the Dis-
restraint to take up any slack. trict of Columbia, the U.S. territories,
Infant and child restraint seats and infor- and all Canadian provinces.
mation on choosing an appropriate re- To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
straint system can be obtained from any let seat belt retract completely. The seat Infants and small children should be
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. belt can again be used in the usual man- seated in an appropriate infant or child
ner. restraint system properly secured by a
Infant and child restraint systems lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
i child restraint lower anchorage system
Use only a BabySmartTM1 compatible child For more information on child seats that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
restraint for the front passenger seat in with mounting fittings for tether an- Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
this vehicle. chorages, see Installation of infant and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
We recommend all infants and children be and child restraint systems Standards 213 and 210.2.
properly restrained at all times while the ( page 72).
vehicle is in motion. For information on LATCH-type child
1 TM seat mounts ( page 73).
BabySmart is a trademark of Siemens Automo-
tive Corp.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
A statement by the child restraint man- fatal injury will result. A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is
ufacturer of compliance with this stan- significantly increased if the child restraints
dard can be found on the instruction are not properly secured in the vehicle and
are safer when properly restrained in the
label on the restraint and in the instruc- the child is not properly secured in the child
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
tion manual provided with the restraint. restraint.
ing positions. Infants and small children
When using any infant or child restraint must ride in back seats and be seated in an When the child restraint is not in use, re-
system, be sure to carefully read and appropriate infant or child restraint system, move it from the vehicle or secure it with the
follow all manufacturers instructions which is properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
for installation and use. seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via becoming a projectile in the event of an ac-
Please read and observe warning labels lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in cident.
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant accordance with the child seat manufactur- Do not leave children, unattended in the ve-
or child restraints. ers instructions. hicle, even if the children are secured in a
Infants and small children should never child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
share a seat belt with another occupant. dren in a child restraint system may use ve-
Warning! G During an accident, they could be crushed hicle equipment and cause an accident
between the occupant and seat belt. and/or serious personal injury.
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a Children too big for child restraint systems
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM must ride in back seats using regular seat
compatible child seat, which operates with belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve- and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
hicle to deactivate the passenger front air- seat may be necessary to achieve proper
bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they will be struck by the airbag when it in- they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or belt fits properly without a booster.
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
BabySmartTM1 airbag deactivation The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator For more information, see Practical hints
system lamp 1 located in the center console will ( page 303).
be illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed or in starter switch position 0.
Warning! G
i
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation sys-
The system does not deactivate the
tem will ONLY work with a special child seat
side impact airbag or the emergency
designed to operate with it. It will not work
tensioning device.
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
Never place anything between seat cushion
child seat installed
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
1 Indicator lamp After turning the SmartKey in the starter the effectiveness of the deactivation sys-
Special BabySmartTM compatible child switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the tem. The bottom of the child seat must
seats, designed for use with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or make full contact with the passenger seat
Mercedes-Benz system and available at twice, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indi- cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are cator lamp 1 located in the center con- could cause injuries to the child in case of an
required for use with the BabySmartTM air- sole comes on for approximately accident, instead of protecting the child.
bag deactivation system. With the special six seconds and then goes out.
Follow the manufacturers instructions for
child seat properly installed, the passenger If the indicator lamp should not come on or installation of special child seats.
front airbag will not deploy. is continuously lit, the system is not func-
tioning. You must see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any
child on the front passenger seat.
1
BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens Automo-
tive Corp.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint Head restraints must be positioned such
Warning! G systems that the top tether strap can pass freely
between the head restraint and top of seat
When using a BabySmartTM compatible This vehicle is equipped with tether an-
back.
child seat on the front passenger seat, the chorages for a top tether strap at each of
passenger front airbag will not deploy only if the rear seating positions. Make sure the tether strap is not twisted.
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
remains illuminated.
Make sure to check the indicator every time
you use the special system child seat.
Should the light go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If the
light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
1 Cover of top anchorage ring 2 Hook
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell 3 Anchorage ring
Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring.
phones and like electronic devices on the
Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
front passenger seat. Signals from such de- Store cover 1 in a convenient place
of the tether strap, to anchorage
vices may interfere with the BabySmartTM (e.g. glove box).
ring 3.
system. Such signal interference may cause Guide tether strap between head re-
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp straint and top of seat back. i
not to come on during self-test or be contin-
For safety reasons, make sure the hook
uously lit, indicating that the system is not
has attached to the ring beyond the
functioning.
safety catch, as illustrated.
72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Once the top tether anchorage hook is at- Child seat anchors LATCH type Move rear power seats*/bench* to the
tached, the child restraint itself can be se- This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH rearmost position ( page 118).
cured. Tighten the top tether strap (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) Fold upholstery blend 3 upward.
according to the child restraint manufac-
type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
turers instructions. Turn installation device 4 to a vertical
the installation of a LATCH child seat with
position so that upholstery blend 3
Reinstall cover after removing the the matching anchor fittings.
does not fold down.
tether strap.
If you have not installed a child seat, the
Install child seat according to the man-
LATCH anchor fittings are covered with an
ufacturers instructions.
Warning! G upholstery blend.
A solid connection is established be-
Vehicles with adjustable rear seats/bench*: tween the child seat and the body of
Never adjust the rear seat position after in- the vehicle.
stalling the child restraint. Adjusting the rear Do not adjust rear power seat*/bench*
seat position after installing the child reposition after installing child restraint.
straint could damage the child restraint
and/or introduce undesirable slack into the
webbing and loosen or misposition the child
restraint, lessening the effectiveness of the
child restraint and thus increasing the
chance or severity of injury in an accident. 1 Indicates the position of the anchors
2 Anchors
3 Upholstery blend
4 Installation device
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Override switch for rear passenger

Warning! G Warning! G compartment
Vehicles with adjustable rear seats/bench*: Children too big for child restraint systems You can disable select functions in the rear
Never adjust the rear seat position after in- must ride in back seats using regular seat passenger compartment for added safety
stalling the child restraint. Adjusting the rear belts. Position shoulder belt across chest (for instance when you have children riding
seat position after installing the child re- and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster in the rear passenger compartment).
straint could damage the child restraint seat may be necessary to achieve proper
You can disable the following functions in
and/or introduce undesirable slack into the belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
the rear passenger compartment:
webbing and loosen or misposition the child they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
restraint, lessening the effectiveness of the belt fits properly without a booster. rear door window operation
child restraint and thus increasing the Install child seat according to manufactur-
( page 195)
chance or severity of injury in an accident. ers instructions. adjustment of front passenger seat
The child seat must be firmly attached in from the rear* ( page 119)
i right and left side anchor fittings 2. cigarette lighter in rear ( page 240)
The child seat must be firmly attached An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
in the right and left side anchor fittings. loose during an accident which could result
Make sure the seat belt for the center in serious injury or death to your child.
seat can operate freely with a child Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
seat installed. child seat mounting fittings must be re-
Non-LATCH type child seats may also placed.
be used and can be installed using the Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
vehicles seat belt system. Install child hicle, even if the children are secured in a
seat according to the manufacturers child restraint system.
instructions.
74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The override switch is located on the driv- i

ers door. Warning! G Operation of the rear door windows
with the switches located in the drivers
Activate the override switch when children
door is still possible.
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure them-
selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win- Deactivating override switch
dow opening. Slide override switch 1 to the left.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the The functions in the rear are enabled
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the again.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
1 Override switch attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
Activating override switch cle equipment may cause an accident
Slide override switch 1 to the right.
A dot becomes visible. The functions in
the rear are disabled.
75
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior Activating i
lamps will operate for approximately For operation in the USA only: This de-
21/2 minutes. Press and hold button 1 for at least
vice complies with Part 15 of the
one second.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Deactivating
This device may not cause harmful
Press button 1 again. interference, and
or this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
1 button
device could void the users authority
to operate the equipment.
76
Safety and Security
In this section you will find information on ABS
the following driving safety systems: Warning! G
ABS (Antilock Brake System) The following factors increase the risk of ac- Warning! G
BAS (Brake Assist System) cidents:
Excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic Trac- Wet and slippery road surfaces
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
tion System) Following another vehicle too closely the ABS and significantly reduces braking
The ABS, BAS, ESP, and 4MATIC cannot re- effectiveness.
i duce this risk.
In winter operation, the maximum ef-
Always adjust your driving style to the pre- The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
fectiveness of the ABS, ESP, BAS and
vailing road and weather conditions. the brake pressure so that the wheels do
4MATIC is only achieved with winter
not lock during braking. This allows you to
tires (M+S tires) or snow chains as re-
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
quired.
The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
spond even with light brake pressure.
77
Safety and Security
The - indicator lamp in the instrument Emergency brake maneuver BAS

cluster comes on when you turn the
Keep continuous full pressure on the
SmartKey in the starter switch to The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
brake pedal.
position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO* emergency situations. If you apply the
start/stop button twice. It goes out when brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
the engine is running. Warning! G provides full brake boost, thereby poten-
tially reducing the braking distance. Apply
Braking The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of continuous full braking pressure until the
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can emergency braking situation is over. The
At the instant one of the wheels is about to it increase braking or steering efficiency be- ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the yond that afforded by the condition of the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in When you release the brake pedal, the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af-
the regulating mode. brakes function again as normal. The BAS
forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
is then deactivated.
Keep firm and steady pressure on the including those resulting from excessive
brake pedal while experiencing the pul- speed in turns, following another vehicle too
sation. closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
namely braking power and the ability to
less or dangerous manner which could jeop-
steer the vehicle.
ardize the users safety or the safety of
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- others.
tion of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
For more information, see Practical hints
while driving.
( page 303).
78
Safety and Security
ESP
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of monitors the vehicle's traction (force of Never switch off the ESP when you see the
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can adhesive friction between the tires and the ESP warning lamp v flashing in the in-
it increase braking efficiency beyond that af- road surface) and handling. strument cluster. In this case proceed as fol-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes lows:
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin-
and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot While driving off, apply as little throttle
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
prevent accidents, including those resulting as possible.
plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
from excessive speed in turns, following an-
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to While driving, ease up on the accelera-
other vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially tor.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
useful while driving off and on wet or slip- Adapt your speed and driving style to
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS
pery road surfaces. the prevailing road conditions.
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which The ESP warning lamp v in the instru- Failure to observe these guidelines could
could jeopardize the users safety or the ment cluster flashes when the ESP is en- cause the vehicle to skid.
safety of others. gaged. The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
The ESP warning lamp v in the instru- from excessive speed.
ment cluster comes on when you turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button twice. It goes out when
the engine is running.
79
Safety and Security
! Switching off the ESP

Warning! G Vehicles without 4MATIC:
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
Because of the ESPs automatic opera- Warning! G
tion, the engine and ignition must be
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
shut off (SmartKey in starter switch The ESP should not be switched off during
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO normal driving other than in the circum-
cannot prevent accidents, including those
start/stop button* in position 0 or 1) stances described below. Disabling of the
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
when: system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
the parking brake is being tested on dard driving maneuvers.
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must a brake test dynamometer
never be exploited in a reckless or danger- To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off
the vehicle is being towed with the
ous manner which could jeopardize the us- the ESP in driving situations where it would
front/rear axle raised
ers safety or the safety of others. be advantageous to have the drive wheels
Active braking action through the ESP spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
may otherwise seriously damage the grip such as:
! brake system.
The ESP will only function properly if starting out on slippery surfaces and in
For information on vehicles with deep snow in conjunction with snow
you use wheels of the recommended
4MATIC, see Four wheel electronic chains
tire size ( page 384).
traction system (4MATIC) with the
in sand or gravel
ESP ( page 82).
i
i
Distronic* is switched off when ESP is For more information, see Practical hints Distronic* cannot be activated when
activated. ( page 303). the ESP has been deactivated.
80
Safety and Security
The switch is located on the center con- If one or more wheels are spinning, the
sole. ESP warning lamp v in the speedome- Warning! G
ter flashes, regardless of the speed.
When the ESP warning lamp v is
Traction control brakes a spinning wheel illuminated continuously, the ESP is
even when the ESP is deactivated. switched off.
The ESP always operates when you are Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
braking, even when it has been deactivating road conditions and to the non-operating
ed. status of the ESP.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an Switching on the ESP
1 ESP off/on extended period with the ESP switched Press the ESP switch 1.
off. This may cause serious damage to
Press ESP switch 1 until the ESP The ESP warning lamp v in the in-
the drivetrain which is not covered by
warning lamp v in the speedometer strument cluster goes out. You are now
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
comes on. again in normal driving mode.
The ESP is deactivated.
81
Safety and Security
Four wheel electronic traction system !

(4MATIC) with the ESP Warning! G Performance testing must only be con-
ducted on a two-axle dynamometer.
Models with all-wheel drive only: If you see the ESP warning lamp v flash-
ing in the speedometer dial, proceed as fol- Otherwise the transfer case can be
The 4MATIC improves the vehicles ability damaged, which is not covered by the
lows:
to use available traction, e.g. during winter Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
operation in mountains under snowy con- While driving off, apply as little throttle
ditions, by applying power to all four as possible.
wheels. While driving, ease up on the accelera- !
tor. Because of the ESPs automatic opera-
Adapt your speed and driving style to tion, the engine and ignition must be
the prevailing road conditions. shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO
Failure to observe these guidelines could
start/stop button* in position 0 or 1)
cause the vehicle to skid.
when the parking brake is being tested
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting on a brake test dynamometer.
from excessive speed.
Active braking action through the ESP
may otherwise seriously damage the
! front or rear axle brake system.
Do not tow with one axle raised.
Operational tests with the engine run-
Otherwise the transfer case can be ning can only be conducted on a
damaged, which is not covered by the two-axle dynamometer.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
82
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Deactivating Anti-theft alarm system
With the SmartKey: Inserting the
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized Once the alarm system has been armed, a
SmartKey in the starter switch deacti-
persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when
vates the immobilizer.
someone:
Activating With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the en-
opens a door
gine by means of the start/stop button
With the SmartKey: Removing the
on the gear selector lever deactivates opens the trunk
SmartKey from the starter switch acti-
the immobilizer. opens the hood
vates the immobilizer.
With KEYLESS-GO*: Turning off the en- i The alarm will stay on even if the activating
gine by means of the start/stop button In case the engine cannot be started element (a door, for example) is immedi-
on the gear selector lever activates the (yet the vehicles battery is charged), ately closed.
immobilizer. the system is not operational. Contact The alarm system will also be triggered
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center when
or call
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). the vehicle is opened with the
mechanical key
83
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
i i Canceling the alarm

If the alarm stays on for more than If the turn signal lamps does not flash To cancel the alarm:
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi- three times one of the following ele-
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys- ments may not be properly closed: With the SmartKey
tem ( page 242) provided Tele Aid
a door Insert the SmartKey in the starter
service was subscribed to and properly
the trunk lid switch.
activated, and that necessary cellular
service and GPS coverage are avail- the hood or
able. Press the or button on the
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again. SmartKey.
Arming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed after locking With KEYLESS-GO*
Disarming the alarm system
the vehicle with the SmartKey or Grasp the outside door handle.
KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash- The alarm system is disarmed when you
es three times to indicate that the alarm unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey or or
system is activated. The indicator lamp in KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
the central locking switch ( page 107) once to indicate that the alarm system is button.
will flash after approximately ten seconds deactivated
when the alarm system is completely
armed.
84
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Tow-away alarm Arming tow-away alarm The switch is located on the center con-
sole.
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
alarm is automatically armed after about
and audible alarm will be triggered when
30 seconds.
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
When you unlock your vehicle, the
i tow-away protection disarms automatical-
The tow-away protection alarm is trig- ly.
gered, for example, if the vehicle is lift-
ed on one side. Disarming tow-away alarm
If the alarm stays on for more than To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm,
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi- switch off the tow-away alarm feature be-
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys- fore towing the vehicle, or when parking on 1 Indicator lamp
tem ( page 242) provided Tele Aid a surface subject to movement, such as a 2 Tow-away alarm off switch
service was subscribed to and properly ferry or auto train. Switch off the ignition and remove the
activated and that necessary cellular SmartKey.
service and GPS coverage are avail-
able. i
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
if the ignition is switched on.
85
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Press switch 2. Canceling tow-away alarm With KEYLESS-GO*

The indicator lamp 1 in the button To cancel the alarm: Grasp the outside door handle.
comes on briefly.
or
With the SmartKey
Exit vehicle and lock your vehicle with
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
the SmartKey or (vehicles with Insert the SmartKey in the starter button.
KEYLESS-GO*) the lock button at each switch.
door handle.
or
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed un-
Press the or button on the
til you lock your vehicle again.
SmartKey.
86
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
87
Controls in detail
In the Controls in detail section you will SmartKey
find detailed information on how to oper-
ate the equipment installed in your vehicle. Your vehicle comes supplied with two
If you are already familiar with the basic SmartKeys, each with remote control and
functions of your vehicle, this section will a removable mechanical key. The locking
be of particular interest to you. tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
two SmartKeys are a different color to help
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
distinguish each SmartKey unit.
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
Getting started section of this manual. The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
The corresponding page numbers are giv- ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
SmartKey with remote control
en at the beginning of each segment. advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it. 1 Lock button
2 Unlock button for trunk lid
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
3 Locking tab for mechanical key
the doors 4 Unlock button
the trunk 5 Battery check lamp
6 Panic button ( page 76)
the fuel filler flap
88
Controls in detail
Factory setting Selective setting

Warning! G If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
Global unlocking to reprogram the SmartKey so that
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the Press button . pressing only unlocks the drivers
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and door and the fuel filler flap.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unlocking knobs in the doors move up. Press and hold buttons and
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an simultaneously for about six seconds
The vehicle will lock again automatically
unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children until battery check lamp 5 flashes
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
to open a locked door from the inside, which twice.
locking if:
could result in an accident and/or serious
The SmartKey will then function as fol-
personal injury. neither door nor trunk is opened
lows:
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
Unlocking drivers door and fuel filler
! starter switch
flap
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid the central locking switch is not acti-
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of vated Press button once.
electromagnetic radiation. Global unlocking
Global locking
Press button twice.
i Press button .
Global locking
You can also open and close the power
All turn signal lamps flash three times.
windows ( page 197) and slid- Press button .
The locking knobs in the doors move
ing/pop-up roof ( page 201) using
down.
the SmartKey.
89
Controls in detail
Restoring to factory setting Use the mechanical key to lock the i

Press and hold buttons and doors ( page 348) and the trunk If the trunk lid does not open, it is still
simultaneously for about six seconds lid ( page 349) as required. locked separately (if applicable)
until battery check lamp 5 flashes If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, con- ( page 105).
twice. tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- If the vehicle was previously centrally
ter. locked, the trunk lid will lock automati-
!
cally when closed. The turn signals will
If you can no longer lock or unlock the Unlocking and opening the trunk lid flash three times to confirm locking.
vehicle with the SmartKey, then the
batteries in the SmartKey are dis- You can unlock and open the trunk lid sep-
charged, the SmartKey is malfunction- arately. The trunk can also be opened from its in-
ing or the vehicle battery is drained. side in an emergency, see Trunk lid emer-
A minimum height clearance of 6 ft.
gency release ( page 104).
Check the batteries in the (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
SmartKey and replace them if nec- Press and hold button until trunk
essary ( page 349). unlocks and begins to open.
Use the mechanical key to unlock !
the doors ( page 348) and the
trunk lid ( page 349) as required. The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
tomatically. Always make sure that
Have the vehicle battery and the there is sufficient overhead clearance.
battery connections checked.
Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
system: To stop the opening proce-
dure, press button . The trunk lid
stops moving.
90
Controls in detail
Checking the batteries Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Press button or . If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
you should do the following:
Battery check lamp 5 comes on brief- with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
ly to indicate that the SmartKey batter- Have the SmartKey deactivated by an each with remote control and a removable
ies are in order. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. mechanical key. The locking tabs for the
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key portion of the two Smart-
! Keys are a different color to help distin-
mechanical key immediately to your
If battery check lamp 5 does not guish each SmartKey unit.
car insurance company.
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged. If necessary, have the mechanical lock The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
replaced. into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
Replace the batteries ( page 349). validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is checked every time you grasp a door
You can obtain the required batteries
will be glad to supply you with a replace- handle.
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ment.
ter. If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
your vehicle unlocks:
i the doors
If the batteries are ckecked within sig-
the trunk lid
nal range of the vehicle, pressing the
button or will lock or unlock the fuel filler flap
the vehicle accordingly.
91
Controls in detail
i
Warning! G If the vehicle has been parked for a
longer period of time, you must pull the
door handle in order to activate the
KEYLESS-GO function.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- You can also close the power windows
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an ( page 198) and sliding/pop-up roof
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- ( page 202) using the SmartKey with
cle equipment may cause an accident KEYLESS-GO.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO and/or serious personal injury.
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
1 Lock button
2 Unlock button for trunk lid ! You can also use the SmartKey with
3 Locking tab for mechanical key To prevent possible malfunction, avoid KEYLESS-GO like a normal
4 Unlock button exposing the SmartKey with SmartKey ( page 88).
5 Battery check lamp KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electro- You can combine KEYLESS-GO func-
6 Panic button ( page 76) magnetic radiation. tions with normal SmartKey functions
For more information on using the (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
SmartKey buttons, see SmartKey locking with the remote control).
( page 88). Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
92
Controls in detail
Never store the SmartKey with If you have started the engine with the If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re-
KEYLESS-GO together with: KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you moved from the vehicle while the en-
can only turn it off again with this but- gine is switched on (e.g. if passenger
Electronic items such as a cellular
ton, even if you have put the SmartKey exits the vehicle with the SmartKey
phone or another SmartKey with
in the starter switch in the meantime. with KEYLESS-GO), the message KEY
KEYLESS-GO
NOT RECOGNIZED! will appear in the
This does not apply if, after starting, the
Metallic objects such as coins or multifunction display.
gear selector lever is still in position P
metal foil
and the SmartKey is then inserted in Find the SmartKey or change its
Doing so could impair the function of the starter switch. The SmartKey will present location immediately
the KEYLESS-GO system. then have priority over the SmartKey (e.g. place it on the front passenger
To lock or unlock the vehicle, the with KEYLESS-GO and the vehicles seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be electrical system will operate accord-
Remember that the engine can be
located outside the vehicle within ap- ing to the position of the SmartKey in
started by anyone with a SmartKey
proximately 3 ft. (1 m) of a door or the the starter switch, even stopping the
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
trunk. engine.
vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with-
In order to start the engine with the If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO: positioned farther away from the vehi- locking the vehicle, the message KEY
cle, the system may no longer recog- DETECTED IN VEHICLE! will appear in
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. the multifunction display.
must be located in the vehicle. The vehicle then cannot be locked or
All doors must be closed. the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
system.
The brake pedal must be firmly dep-
resed. Do not depress the accelera-
tor.
93
Controls in detail
Factory setting Selective setting Restoring to factory setting

If you frequently travel alone, you may wish Press and hold buttons and
Global unlocking to reprogram the SmartKey with simultaneously for about six seconds
Grasp the door handle. KEYLESS-GO so when you, grasp the driv- until battery check lamp 5 flashes
ers door handle only the drivers door and twice.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
the fuel filler flap unlocks.
within approximately 40 seconds of un- !
locking if neither door nor trunk is opened. Press and hold buttons and
If you can not lock or unlock the vehicle
simultaneously for about six seconds
i with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO,
until battery check lamp 5 flashes
then the battery in the SmartKey is dis-
The vehicle could inadvertently be un- twice.
charged, the SmartKey with
locked if the SmartKey with
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the
KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft. (1 m) of the
then function as follows: vehicle battery is drained.
vehicle and:
Unlocking the drivers door Check the battery in the SmartKey
the door handle is splashed with
Grasp the drivers door handle. with KEYLESS-GO and replace them
water, or
if necessary ( page 349).
you attempt to clean the door Global unlocking
Use the mechanical key to unlock
handle Grasp the door handle on the pas- the doors ( page 348) and the
senger side. trunk lid (if applicable)
Global locking ( page 349) as required.
Global locking
Press lock button at door handle
Press lock button at door handle or Have the vehicle battery and the
( page 55) or trunk ( page 95). battery connections checked.
trunk lid.
94
Controls in detail
Use the mechanical key to lock the Press vehicle lock button 1. Checking the battery
doors ( page 348) and the trunk or Press button or .
lid ( page 349) as required.
Press the lock button at the outside Battery check lamp 5 comes on brief-
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is door handle ( page 55). ly to indicate that the SmartKey battery
malfunctioning, contact an authorized is in order.
Mercedes-Benz Center. or
Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing !
Locking the vehicle system*, press the KEYLESS-GO lock- If battery check lamp 5 does not
ing/closing switch at the trunk come on briefly during check, the
( page 103). SmartKey battery is discharged.
The vehicle locks. The turn signals Replace the battery ( page 349).
flashes three times to confirm locking.
You can obtain the required battery at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
If the battery is ckecked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing the
1 Vehicle lock button button or will lock or unlock
the vehicle accordingly.
95
Controls in detail
Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Opening the doors from the inside i
If you lose your SmartKey with If the vehicle has previously been
You can open a locked door from the in-
KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you locked from the outside with the
side. Open door only when conditions are
should do the following: SmartKey, opening a door from the in-
safe to do so.
side will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys-
Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
tem.
deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. To cancel the alarm, do one of the fol-
lowing:
Report the loss of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key im- With the SmartKey
mediately to your car insurance com- Insert the SmartKey in the starter
pany. switch.
Have the mechanical lock replaced if Press button or on the
necessary. SmartKey.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center 1 Locking knob With KEYLESS-GO*
will be glad to supply you with a replace- 2 Inside door handle
ment. Grasp the outside door handle.
Pull on door handle 2.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will button.
move up.
96
Controls in detail
Opening the trunk lid from the outside Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing Opening the trunk lid from the inside
system*: To stop the opening proce-
A minimum height clearance of 6 ft. dure, press button . The trunk lid You can open the trunk from the inside if
(1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid. stops moving. the vehicle is stationary.
The trunk lid lock button is located in the A minimum height clearance of 6 ft.
rear license plate recess. i (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
If the trunk lid does not open, it is still The switch is located on the drivers door.
locked separately (if applicable)
( page 349).
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The
vehicle must be unlocked ( page 88).
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: If the ve-
hicle was previously centrally locked,
the trunk lid will lock automatically af-
ter closing it ( page 98). The turn sig-
1 Trunk lid lock button nals will flash three times to confirm
locking.
Press the outer left-hand side of trunk 1 Indicator lamp
lid button 1. 2 Remote trunk lid release switch
The trunk can also be opened using the
The trunk lid opens. SmartKey ( page 90) or from its inside in Pull remote trunk lid switch 2 until
an emergency, see Trunk lid emergency trunk begins to open.
!
release ( page 104). The trunk lid opens. The indicator
The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
lamp 1 comes on and remains lit until
the trunk is closed.
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
97
Controls in detail
! Closing the trunk lid Push the trunk lid down gently at the
The trunk lid swings open upwards au- extending handle 2 until it engages
tomatically. Always make sure that into the lock.
there is sufficient overhead clearance. The extending handle 2 is retracted
after a few seconds.
i The power closing assist automatically en-
If the trunk lid does not open, it is still sures that the lid is pulled closed com-
locked separately (if applicable) pletely ( page 106).
( page 349).
If the vehicle was previously centrally Warning! G
locked, the trunk lid will lock automati- 1 Handle
cally when closed ( page 98). The To prevent possible personal injury, always
turn signals will flash three times to Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
confirm locking. handle 1. lid opening when closing the trunk. Be espe-
cially careful when small children are
The trunk can also be opened using the around.
SmartKey ( page 90) or from its inside in
an emergency, see Trunk lid emergency
release ( page 104).
2 Extending handle
98
Controls in detail
Trunk lid opening/closing system* Pull remote trunk lid switch 2 until
Warning! G trunk begins to open.
You can open or close the trunk lid from
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among The trunk lid opens. The indicator
the inside if the vehicle is stationary.
other dangers such as visibility blockage, lamp 1 comes and remains lit until
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi- the trunk is closed.
Opening from the inside
or. !
A minimum height clearance of 6 ft.
(1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid. The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
i The switch for opening and closing the
Do not place the SmartKey in the open there is sufficient overhead clearance.
trunk is located on the drivers door.
trunk. You may lock yourself out. To stop the opening procedure, press
or pull the remote trunk lid switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To pre-
vent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
trunk lid will open automatically if a i
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recog- If the trunk lid does not open, it is still
nized inside the vehicle or in the trunk. locked separately (if applicable)
( page 349).
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk lid will lock automati-
cally when closed ( page 98). The
1 Indicator lamp turn signals will flash three times to
2 Remote trunk lid switch confirm locking.
99
Controls in detail
The trunk can also be opened using the Closing from the inside
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
SmartKey ( page 90) or from its inside in
Press remote trunk lid switch 2 starter switch or the SmartKey with
an emergency, see Trunk lid emergency ( page 99) until the indicator lamp 1 KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
release ( page 104).
goes out and trunk lid is closed. the remote trunk lid switch can be operated.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
Limiting opening height of trunk lid To interrupt the closing procedure:
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
The trunk lid opening height can be limited Release remote trunk lid switch 2. vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
when transporting goods on a roof rack ment may cause an accident and/or serious
(e.g. presence of an MB sport luggage con- Warning! G personal injury.
tainer*). When activated, the trunk lid
opens to approximately the height of the Maintain sight of trunk area while operating If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
roof edge. door mounted switch. Monitor the closing object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
You can activate the limiting opening procedure carefully to ensure that no one is been piled too high) in the upper motion
height of trunk lid using the control system in danger of being injured. sequence, the closing procedure is
( page 159). To interrupt the closing procedure, release stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
the door mounted remote trunk lid switch.
100
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk lid from the outside

(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*) Warning! G Warning! G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
ensure that no one is in danger of being in- other dangers such as visibility blockage,
jured. To prevent possible personal injury, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi-
always keep hands and fingers away from or.
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
i
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
press the remote trunk lid switch (on the Do not place the SmartKey in the open
drivers door), the trunk lid closing trunk. You may lock yourself out.
1 Trunk lid closing switch switch 1, or the button on the

SmartKey.
Press trunk lid closing switch 1 brief-
ly.
The trunk lid closes. SmartKey with you and lock your vehicle. Do
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
been piled too high), the closing procedure pervised use of vehicle equipment may
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly. cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
101
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk lid from the outside

(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) Warning! G Warning! G
ensure that no one is in danger of being in- other dangers such as visibility blockage,
jured. To prevent possible personal injury, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi-
always keep hands and fingers away from or.
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
i
press the trunk lid closing switch (on the To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
drivers door), the trunk lid closing out, the trunk lid will open automatical-
switch 1 or the button on the ly if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
1 Trunk lid closing switch recognized inside the vehicle or in the
SmartKey.
Make sure you have the SmartKey with trunk.
KEYLESS-GO with you.
Press trunk lid closing switch 1 brief- SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
ly. lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
The trunk lid closes. attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an cle equipment may cause an accident
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has and/or serious personal injury.
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.
102
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk lid and locking the ve-

hicle from the outside (vehicles with Warning! G Warning! G
KEYLESS-GO*)
On vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing ensure that no one is in danger of being in- other dangers such as visibility blockage,
system and KEYLESS-GO, you can close jured. To prevent possible personal injury, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interi-
the trunk lid and lock the vehicle simulta- always keep hands and fingers away from or.
neously. the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
i
press the remote trunk lid switch (on the To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
drivers door), the trunk lid closing out, the trunk lid will open automatical-
switch 1, or the button on the ly if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
SmartKey. recognized inside the vehicle or in the
trunk.
1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
Make sure you have the SmartKey with unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
KEYLESS-GO with you. cle equipment may cause an accident
Press switch 1 briefly. and/or serious personal injury.
The vehicle is locked and the trunk lid

closes automatically. The turn signals
flash three times to confirm locking.
103
Controls in detail
Trunk lid emergency release i i

The emergency release button unlocks If the emergency release button is
The emergency release button is located
and opens the trunk while the vehicle is pressed and the vehicle was centrally
on the inside of the trunk lid.
standing or driving. locked, the exterior lamps will flash and
the alarm will sound as the trunk lid
The emergency release button does
opens:
not open the trunk lid if the vehicle bat-
tery is discharged or disconnected. To cancel the alarm, do one of the fol-
lowing:
Illumination of the emergency release but- With the SmartKey
ton:
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
The button will flash for 30 minutes af- switch.
ter opening the trunk.
Press button or on the
1 Emergency release button The button will flash for 60 minutes af- SmartKey.
ter closing the trunk.
Briefly press emergency release With KEYLESS-GO*
button 1.
Grasp the outside door handle.
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
opens. button.
104
Controls in detail
Separately locking the trunk lid The lock is located next to the recessed i
handle. You can only cancel the separate trunk
i locking mode by means of the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a mechanical key.
function permitting the separate lock-
ing of the trunk using the mechanical Separately unlocking the trunk lid
key. If present, this feature can permit
you to deny any unauthorized person Pull the mechanical key out of the
access to the trunk by locking the trunk SmartKey ( page 348).
separately and leaving the SmartKey
Insert the mechanical key into the
less the mechanical key with the
trunk lid lock.
vehicle.
1 Locked Turn the mechanical key counterclock-
To verify the presence of this feature, 2 Neutral position wise to neutral position 2, see above.
use the mechanical key to lock the
trunk and then attempt to open the Close the trunk lid ( page 98). You can now open the trunk ( page 97).
trunk by pressing the trunk lid button Pull the mechanical key out of the A minimum height clearance of 6 ft.
after the vehicle has been centrally SmartKey ( page 348). (1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
unlocked with the SmartKey.
Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock. Warning! G
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 1. Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
The trunk remains locked even when the exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
vehicle is centrally unlocked. interior.
105
Controls in detail
Power closing assist for doors and i

trunk lid Warning! G The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact ex-
To prevent possible personal injury, always
Power closing assist for doors ceeds a preset threshold.
keep hands and fingers away from the door
Press the doors gently past the initial or trunk opening when closing a door or the The vehicle locks automatically when
engage position into the lock. trunk lid. Be especially careful when small the ignition is switched on and the
children are around. wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
The doors close automatically.
In case of danger, pull the inside or outside approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
door handle, or press the trunk lid lock. more. You could therefore lock yourself
Power closing assist for trunk lid
out when the vehicle
Press the trunk lid gently into its lock. To prevent personal injury, never actuate
the closing assist mechanism by tampering is pushed or towed
The trunk closes automatically. with the door or trunk lid latch. is on a test stand
i
It is not necessary to slam the door or Automatic central locking For more information on towing the vehi-
trunk lid closed. A pneumatic pow- cle, see Towing the vehicle ( page 371).
er-assisted mechanism draws doors The doors and the trunk automatically lock
You can deactivate the automatic locking
and trunk lid closed quietly and auto- when the ignition is switched on and the
using the control system ( page 159).
matically once door and trunk lid has wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of ap-
been latched. When the pneumatic proximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
power-assisted mechanism has You can open a locked door from the in-
stopped, doors and/or trunk can be side. Open door only when conditions are
re-opened. safe to do so.
106
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking from the inside The switches are located in the center con- i
sole. You can open a locked door from the
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
inside. Open door only when conditions
trunk from inside using the central locking
are safe to do so.
or unlocking switch. This can be useful, for
example, if you want to lock the vehicle be- If the vehicle was previously centrally
fore starting to drive. locked with the SmartKey or the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* it will not
The fuel filler flap will not be locked or un-
unlock using the central locking switch.
locked with the central locking or unlock-
ing switch, respectively. If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch:
Warning! G Central locking/unlocking switches
While in the global remote control
mode, the vehicle is unlocked com-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the 1 Locking pletely when a door is opened from
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the 2 Unlocking the inside.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and While in the selective remote con-
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- Locking
trol mode, only the door opened
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an Press central locking switch 1. from inside is unlocked.
If all doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Unlocking
Press central unlocking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
107
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
For more information on seat adjustment, You can activate the following functions:
see Seat adjustment ( page 35). Warning! G Steering column
Easy-entry/exit feature You must ensure that no one can become Only the steering column is adjusted.
trapped or injured by the moving steering
Steering column and seat
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, wheel and drivers seat when the
the steering wheel tilts upwards and the easy-entry/exit feature is activated, the The steering column and the seat are
drivers seat moves to the rear. drivers door is being opened, and the en- adjusted.
gine is turned off or the SmartKey is re- The easy-entry/exit feature can be
This allows easier entry into and exit from
moved from the starter switch. switched on or off in the convenience sub-
the vehicle when the drivers door is
opened. However, the engine must be Do not leave children unattended in the ve- menu of the control system ( page 160).
turned off. hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the drivers door and i
When the SmartKey is inserted in the start- unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit To cancel seat/steering wheel move-
er switch or you have pressed the feature*, which could result in an accident ment, do one of the following:
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once and and/or serious personal injury.
the drivers door is closed, the steering Press the seat adjustment switch
wheel and the drivers seat return to their ( page 35)
last set positions. Move the steering column stalk
( page 37)
Press the memory button
( page 121)
108
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing and installing front seat i Removing front head restraints

head restraints Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
easier removal and installation of the the head restraint is fully extended.
For information on head restraint adjust-
head restraints.
ment, see the Getting started section Pull out head restraint.
( page 36)
Front seat head restraints Installing front head restraints:
Warning! G Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
about five seconds.
For your protection, drive only with properly
Push the head restraint down until it
positioned head restraints.
engages.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
Adjust head restraint to desired posi-
the head restraint supports the back of the
tion ( page 35).
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
tial for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat 1 Head restraint height switch
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
109
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seat head restraints Make sure the ignition is switched on. Placing head restraints upright
! come on.
The rear head restraints cannot be re-
Press switch 1 in the front center con-
moved.
sole briefly.
Folding head restraints back The rear head restraints will fold back-
ward.
The rear seat head restraints and the rear
seat power head restraints* can be folded
backward for increased visibility. Warning! G
Pull the rear head restraint upright until
For safety reasons, always drive with the
it locks into position.
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied. !
Keep the area around head restraints clear Make sure the head restraints engage
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the when placing them upright manually.
folding operation of the head restraints. Otherwise their protective function
cannot be ensured.
1 Switch in the front center console
110
Controls in detail
Seats
Placing power head restraints* upright Folding back and placing upright power Press switch up in direction of
head restraints* with the switches in arrow 1.
the rear doors
The rear power head restraint will fold
You can fold the rear power head restraints upright.
come on.
backward or upright using the head re-
Press switch down in direction of
Press switch 1 in the front center con- straint folding switches in the respective
arrow 1.
sole and hold. rear doors.
The rear power head restraint will fold
The rear head restraints will fold up-
backward.
right.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
1 Head restraint switch, rear
folding operation of the head restraints.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster Head restraint tilt
come on. You can adjust the angle manually by pull-
ing or pushing the head restraints by hand.
111
Controls in detail
Seats
Lumbar support Multicontour backrest*
You can adjust the contour of the seats The multicontour backrest has inflatable
lumbar support to best support your spine. air cushions built into the seat backrest to
provide additional lumbar and side sup-
The thumbwheel for the drivers and front
passengers seat are located on the inner port.
side of the seat. The seat backrest cushion height and cur-
vature can be continuously varied with
switches on the right side of the seat after
turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* 1 Shoulder region support
start/stop button twice. 2 Side bolster adjustment
3 Massage function (PULSE)
4 Lumbar region support
All lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
1 Thumbwheel
Make sure the ignition is switched on. Shoulder region support
All the lamps in the instrument cluster Press or on switch 1.
come on. The air cushion inflates or deflates.
Set the lumbar support between 0
and 5.
112
Controls in detail
Seats
Lumbar region support Massage function (PULSE) Drive-dynamic seat*

Press k or j on rocker You can reduce muscle tension during long
The drive-dynamic seat automatically ad-
switch 4. trips by periodically using the massage
justs the lateral support provided by the
function.
This selects the air cushion you wish to seat backrest to your driving style.
adjust. Press button 3.
Press or on rocker The indicator lamp on button 3 comes
switch 4. on. The air cushions in the lumbar re-
gion inflate and deflate rhythmically.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
i
Side bolsters adjustment
The massage function switches off au-
Adjust the side bolsters so that they tomatically after approximately eight
provide good lateral support using minutes. The indicator lamp extinguish-
switch 2. es.
1 Activate drive-dynamic function
i
The drive-dynamic seat electronically con-
When the engine is turned off, the last
trols the air pressure in the air chambers of
cushion setting is retained in memory,
the seat backrest side bolsters. This func-
and the cushion is automatically ad-
tion improves driving comfort and plea-
justed to this setting when the engine
sure.
is restarted.
113
Controls in detail
Seats
Activating Deactivating Seat heating*

Press button 1. Press button 1 again.
The indicator lamp in the switch comes The indicator lamp in the button goes Vehicles without seat ventilation*
on and the following message appears out. The switch is located on the door.
in the multifunction display for five sec- The message:
onds:
DRIV. DYN. SEAT ADJ.
DRIVER
OFF
appears in the multifunction display.
i
When the engine is turned off, the last
cushion setting retained in memory.
i
The cushion is automatically adjusted
You can adjust the characteristics of to this setting when the engine is re- 1 Normal heating
the drive-dynamic seat using the con- started. 2 Rapid heating
trol system ( page 163).
Switch on ignition.
Switching on seat heating

Press switch 1.
A red indicator lamp above the switch
comes on.
114
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching off seat heating Switching off rapid seat heating mode Vehicles with seat ventilation*
Press switch 1 again. Press switch 2 again. The switch is located on the door. The red
indicator lamps on the switch show the
i ! heating level selected:
The seat heating will be automatically If one or both of the lamps on the seat
switched off after approximately heating switch are flashing, there is in- Level
30 minutes. sufficient voltage available since too off No indicator lamp on
many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heating switches off auto- 1 One indicator lamp on
Switching on rapid seat heating
matically. 2 Two indicator lamps on
Press switch 2.
The seat heating will switch back on
Both red indicator lamps above the again automatically as soon as suffi-
switch come on. cient voltage is available.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately
five minutes. Only the right-hand indi-
cator lamp remains lit.
1 Seat heating switch

Switch on ignition.
115
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching on seat heating Switching on rapid seat heating Switching off rapid seat heating mode
Press switch 1 twice. Press switch 1 once. Press switch 1 twice.
A red indicator lamp above the switch Both indicator lamps above the switch !
comes on. come on.
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
i heating switch are flashing, there is in-
Switching off seat heating
sufficient voltage available since too
The system switches over to normal
Press switch 1 again. many electrical consumers are turned
heating mode after approximately
on. The seat heating switches off auto-
i five minutes. Only the right-hand indi-
matically.
cator lamp remains lit.
The seat heating will be automatically
The seat heating will switch back on
switched off after approximately
again automatically as soon as suffi-
30 minutes.
cient voltage is available.
116
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat ventilation* Switching off seat ventilation

Press switch 1 repeatedly until all in-
The switch is located on the door. Seat
dicator lamps go out.
ventilation can be activated manually with
the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 i
or 2 ( page 31). The drivers seat ventila-
The seat ventilation for the drivers seat
tion can be activated automatically by the
is automatically set to the highest level
summer opening feature ( page 197).
if activated via summer opening fea-
The blue indicator lamps on the switch ture ( page 197).
show the ventilation level selected:
1 Seat ventilation switch
!
Level Switch on ignition. If one or all of the lamps on the seat
3 Three indicator lamps on ventilation switch are flashing, there is
2 Two indicator lamps on Switching on seat ventilation insufficient voltage since too many
Press switch 1. electrical consumers are switched on.
1 One indicator lamp on
The seat ventilation switches off auto-
off No indicator lamp on Three blue indicator lamps above the
matically.
switch come on.
The seat ventilation will switch back on
Continue pressing switch 1 until the
again automatically as soon as suffi-
desired seat ventilation level is
cient voltage is available.
reached.
117
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seats Seat bench fore and aft adjustment Individual power seats*
Press switch forward or backward in di- The switches for adjusting the seats are lo-
Power seat bench* rection of arrow 1. cated at the respective rear doors.
The switches for adjusting the seat bench
Head restraint folding
are located at the respective rear doors.
Press switch up or down in direction of
arrow 2.
The head restraint is folded or placed
upright.
For information on switching on seat heat-
ing* and seat ventilation*, see
( page 117) and ( page 114).
1 Seat fore and aft adjustment
2 Seat height
3 Head restraint fold/place upright
1 Seat bench fore and aft adjustment
2 Head restraint fold/place upright
118
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat fore and aft adjustment Power seat, setting front passenger The switch is located on the right rear pas-
Press switch forward or backward in di- seat position from rear* senger door.
rection of arrow 1. This function lets you adjust the position of
the front passenger seat from the rear.
Seat height
Press switch up or down in the direc- Warning! G
tion of arrow 2.
When adjusting the front passenger seat,
Head restraint folding make sure the seat, if occupied, is as far
from the passenger front airbag as possible.
Press switch up or down in direction of
arrow 3. Otherwise, the passenger could be seriously
or even fatally injured in the event of an ac- 1 Front passenger seat adjustment
The head restraint is folded or placed
cident or braking maneuver. 2 Rear seat adjustment
upright.
Make sure that no one is caught or injured 3 Seat height
For information on switching on seat heat- while the seat is being adjusted. 4 Head restraint height
ing* and seat ventilation*, see 5 Backrest tilt
( page 117) and ( page 114). The power seats can also be operated with 6 Seat fore and aft adjustment
the driver's or passenger door open. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury
119
Controls in detail
Seats
Switch on ignition. Passenger seat fore and aft adjustment

or Press the switch forward or backward
in direction of arrow 6.
Open the right rear passenger door.
Press button 1 to adjust the front Passenger seat backrest tilt
passenger seat.
i in direction of arrow 5.
Adjusting the passenger seat position
from the rear is not possible if you de- Passenger seat height
activate the operation of the rear door Press the switch up or down in the
windows ( page 74). direction of arrow 3.
! Passenger seat head restraint height

Do not move the front passenger seat Press the switch up or down in
completely forward if objects are direction of arrow 4.
stored in the parcel net in the front pas-
Press button 2 to adjust the rear seat
senger-side footwell. Items in the net
( page 119).
may be damaged
120
Controls in detail
Memory function
Memory function
! You can store up to three different settings The memory button and stored position
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driv- per SmartKey or SmartKey with switch are located on the door.
er should check and adjust the seat KEYLESS-GO*.
height, seat position fore and aft, and The following settings are saved for each
seat backrest angle if necessary, to en- stored position:
sure adequate control, reach, and com-
Seat and backrest position
fort. The head restraint should also be
adjusted for proper height. See also the Settings for the multicontour seat*
section on airbags ( page 59) for Steering wheel position
proper seat positioning.
Exterior rear view mirror position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, opera- Automatic climate control
1 Stored position buttons
tion and comfort. Both the inside and These key-dependent memory settings 2 Memory button
outside rear view mirrors should be ad- can be deactivated if desired
justed for adequate rear vision. Make sure the ignition is switched on
( page 160).
or the relevant door is open and the
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small SmartKey is inserted in the starter
children should be seated in a properly Warning! G switch.
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Do not activate the memory function while
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian driving. Activating the memory function
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 while driving could cause the driver to lose
and 210.2. control of the vehicle.
121
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory Storing exterior rear view mirror park-
ing position
Adjust the seats, steering wheel and Press and hold one of the position
exterior rear view mirrors to the de- buttons 1 until the seat, steering For easier parking, you can adjust the pas-
sired position ( page 34). wheel and exterior rear view mirrors senger-side exterior rear view mirror so
have fully moved to the stored posi- that you can see the right rear wheel as
Press memory button 2.
tions. soon as you engage reverse gear R.
Release memory button 2 and push
i For information on activating the parking
one of the position buttons 1 within
position, see Setting parking position for
three seconds. Releasing the button immediately
exterior rear view mirror ( page 162).
All the settings are stored with the se- stops movement to the stored posi-
lected position. tions. i
You can store a parking position for the
passenger-side exterior rear view mir-
Warning! G ror for each SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO*.
Do not operate the power seats using the
memory button if the seat backrest is in an
excessively reclined position. Doing so
could cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move seat backrest to an upright posi-
tion.
122
Controls in detail
Memory function
Stop the vehicle. Within three seconds, press bottom of

adjustment button 2 on .
Switch on ignition.
The parking position is stored if the
Press button 1.
mirror does not move.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected. i
Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear If the mirror does move, repeat the
view mirror with button 2 so that you above steps. After the setting is stored,
see the rear wheel and the road curb. you can move the mirror again.
1 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir- Press memory button M.
ror button
2 Adjustment button
M Memory button
123
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch M Off
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
U Automatic headlamp mode
Switching on headlamps ( page 47).
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. C Parking lamps (also side marker
i lamps, tail lamps, license plate
If you drive in countries where vehicles lamps, instrument panel lamps)
drive on the other side of the road than Canada only: When engine is run-
the country in which the vehicle is reg- ning, the low beam is also switched
istered, you must have the headlamps on.
modified for symmetrical low beams. B Parking lamps plus low beam or
Relevant information can be obtained high beam headlamps (combination
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- switch pushed forward).
ter.
Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
124
Controls in detail
Lighting
i Manual headlamp mode

To minimize risk to you and to others, acti-
If you remove the SmartKey and open The low beam headlamps and parking vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
the drivers door while the parking lamps can be switched on and off with the switch to B when driving or when traffic
lamps or low beam headlamps are exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp and/or ambient lighting conditions require
switched on, then: switch, see ( page 124). you to do so.
a warning sounds In low ambient lighting conditions, only
Automatic headlamp mode switch from position U to B with the
$ appears in the multifunction
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
display.
and license plate lamps switch on and off to B will briefly switch off the head-
the message SWITCH OFF LIGHTS! automatically depending on the brightness lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
appears in the multifunction display of the ambient light. lighting conditions may result in an acci-
dent.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to U.
i The automatic headlamp feature is only an
With the daytime running lamp mode aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
activated and the engine running, the Warning! G the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
low beam headlamps cannot be times.
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
switched off manually.
the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
edly when the system senses bright am-
To activate the daytime running lamp
bient light, for example light from
mode, see Setting daytime running lamp
oncoming traffic.
mode (USA only) ( page 156).
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
125
Controls in detail
Lighting
i Daytime running lamp mode USA only

With the daytime running lamp mode Turn exterior lamp switch to The high beam headlamps can also be ac-
activated, the low beam headlamps will position M or U. tivated when driving with the daytime run-
not switch off automatically. ning lamp mode activated and exterior
When the engine is running, the low beam
lamp switch in position M.
headlamps are automatically switched on.
i In low ambient light conditions, the parking To activate the daytime running lamp
The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp lamps will also switch on. mode, see Setting daytime running lamp
cannot be switched on manually with mode (USA only) ( page 156).
exterior lamp switch in position U. Canada only
To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior i
When you shift from a driving position to
lamp switch to position B and pull position N or P, the low beam switches off
See notes on the exterior lamp switch
the exterior lamp switch to first or ( page 124).
(with a three-minute delay).
second stop ( page 127).
For nighttime driving you should turn the Locator lighting and night security illu-
exterior lamp switch to position B to mination
permit activation of the high beam head-
lamps. Locator lighting and night security illumi-
nation are described in the control system
section under Setting locator lighting
( page 156) and Setting night security il-
lumination ( page 157).
126
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on fog lamps i Switching on rear fog lamp

The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp Make sure the low beam headlamps
Warning! G cannot be switched on manually with are switched on.
exterior lamp switch in position U.
Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
stop.
only switch from position U to B with lamp switch to position B and pull
the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from the exterior lamp switch to first or sec- The yellow indicator lamp in the
U to B will briefly switch off the head- ond stop ( page 124). lamp switch comes on.
lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an acci- Switching on front fog lamps
dent.
Make sure the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
i Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
Fog lamps will operate with the parking stop.
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
on. Fog lamps should only be used in The green indicator lamp in the
conjunction with low beam headlamps. lamp switch comes on.
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding permis-
sible lamp operation.
127
Controls in detail
Lighting
Combination switch Switching on high beams Hazard warning flasher

Turn exterior lamp switch to
The combination switch is located on the The hazard warning flasher can be activat-
position B or to U
left side of the steering column. ed with the starter switched on or off. It is
( page 124).
activated automatically when an airbag is
Push the combination switch in deployed.
direction 1.
The switch is located on the center con-
The high beam indicator A on the sole.
instrument cluster comes on
( page 22).
High beam flasher

Pull the combination switch briefly in
1 High beam direction 2.
2 High beam flasher
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
128
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on the hazard warning Interior lighting Activating automatic control

flasher
Press rocker switch 4 to the center
The controls are located in the overhead
Press hazard warning flasher switch. position.
control panel.
All turn signals will flash. Interior lamps are switched on in dark-
ness, even when you:
i
unlock the vehicle
With the hazard warning flasher acti-
vated and the combination switch set open a door
for either left or right turn, only the re- remove the SmartKey from the
spective left or right turn signals will starter switch
operate when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is in position 1 or 2. The interior lamps are switched off after a
present time ( page 158).
Switching off the hazard warning 1 Left front reading lamp i
flasher 2 Rear interior lamps If the door remains open, the interior
Press hazard warning flasher switch 3 Right front reading lamp lamps switch off automatically after ap-
again. 4 Rocker switch for automatic control proximately five minutes, when the
system SmartKey is removed or in the switch
i position 0.
If the hazard warning flasher was acti-
vated automatically, press switch 1
twice.
129
Controls in detail
Lighting
Deactivating automatic control Switching rear interior lamps on and off Courtesy lighting
Press the symbol on rocker Press switch 2 on the symbol.
For better orientation in the dark, courtesy
switch 4.
The rear compartment lighting is lamps will illuminate the interior of your ve-
The interior lighting remains switched switched on. hicle as follows:
off in darkness, even when you:
Press switch 2 on the symbol With parking lamps switched on:
unlock the vehicle again.
the door entry lamps
open a door The rear compartment lighting is
the driver and passenger footwells
switched off.
remove the SmartKey from the
With SmartKey in starter switch position 1:
starter switch
Switching front reading lamps on and the door entry lamps
off
Manual control the center console
Press switch 1 or 3.
Switching front interior lamps on and off
The corresponding reading lamp is i
Press the symbol on rocker switched on. If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch 4. switch to position 0 and switch off the
Press switch 1 or 3 again. exterior headlamps, the door entry
The front interior lighting switches on. lamps will remain lit for approximately
The corresponding reading lamp is
Press the symbol on rocker switched off. five minutes.
switch 4 again.
The interior lighting switches off. The
automatic control function is activated.
130
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument Instrument cluster illumination Press knob 1.
cluster can be found in the At a glance The knob will pop out.
section of this manual ( page 22).
The instrument cluster is activated when To brighten illumination
you:
Turn knob 1 in the instrument cluster
open a door clockwise.
turn on the ignition The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
press the reset button ( page 22)
switch on the exterior lamps To dim illumination
You can change the instrument cluster set- 1 Knob for adjusting instrument cluster Turn knob 1 in the instrument cluster
tings in the instrument cluster submenu of illumination counterclockwise.
the control system ( page 154).
Use knob 1 to adjust the illumination The instrument cluster illumination will
brightness for the instrument cluster. dim.
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicles exterior
lamps.
131
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature gauge i Trip odometer

Excessive coolant temperature triggers
Make sure you are viewing the trip
a warning in the multifunction display
Warning! G ( page 323).
odometer display.
If it is not displayed, press the or
Driving when your engine is badly over-
During severe operating conditions, button on the multifunction
heated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine com- e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem- steering wheel repeatedly until the trip
partment to catch fire. You could be se- perature may rise close to 248F (120C), odometer appears ( page 134).
riously burned. i.e. close to the red zone of the tempera- Press and hold reset button on the in-
Steam from an overheated engine can ture gauge. strument cluster ( page 22) until the
cause serious burns and can occur just The engine should not be operated with trip odometer is reset.
by opening the hood. Stay away from the coolant temperature above 248F
the engine if you see or hear steam com-
(120C), i.e. in the red zone of the coolant
ing from it.
temperature gauge. Doing so may cause
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle serious engine damage which is not cov-
and do not stand near the vehicle until the ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War-
engine has cooled down. ranty.
132
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Tachometer Outside temperature indicator The temperature sensor is located in the

front bumper area. Due to its location, the
The red marking on the tachometer de- sensor can be affected by road or engine
notes excessive engine speed. Warning! G heat during idling or slow driving. There-
fore, the accuracy of the displayed temper-
! The outside temperature indicator is not de- ature can only be verified by comparison to
Avoid driving at excessive engine signed to serve as an ice-warning device and a thermometer placed next to the sensor,
speeds, as it may result in serious en- is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. not by comparison to external displays
gine damage that is not covered by the Indicated temperatures just above the freez- (e.g. bank signs, etc.).
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply especially in wooded areas or on bridges. garage), you will notice a delay before the
is interrupted if the engine is operated
lower temperature is displayed.
within the red marking.
The outside temperature is diplayed in the A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
instrument cluster ( page 22). For infor- atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
S 55 AMG
mation on how to select the unit of the dis- perature indications caused by heat
The tachometer of the S 55 AMG does not played temperature, i.e. degrees radiated from the engine during idling or
have a red marking denoting excessive en- Celsius (C) or degrees Fahrenheit (F), slow driving.
gine speed. see Selecting temperature display mode
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply ( page 154).
is interrupted if the engine is operated at
an excessive engine speed.
133
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* is in A drivers attention to the road and traffic
position 1. The control system enables you conditions must always be his/her primary
to: focus when driving.
call up information about your vehicle For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction
change vehicle settings steering wheel should only be done by the 1 Trip odometer
For example, you can use the control sys- driver when traffic and road conditions per- 2 Main odometer
tem to find out when your vehicle is next mit it to be done safely.
due for service, to set the language for Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
messages in the instrument cluster dis- (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
play, and much more. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 14 m) every second.
i
The displays for the audio systems (ra-
The control system relays information to
dio, CD player) will appear in English,
the multifunction display.
regardless of the language selected.
134
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel 1 Multifunction display in the speed-

ometer
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are Operating the control system
controlled using the buttons on the multi- 2 Selecting the submenu or setting
function steering wheel. the volume
up / to increase
down / to decrease
3 Telephone*
s to take a call
t to end a call
4 Menu systems
for next menu
for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu
j for next display
k for previous display
135
Controls in detail
Control system
Pressing any of the buttons on the multi- It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions
function steering wheel will alter what is functions within each menu, as being ar- you will find a number of submenus for
shown in the multifunction display. ranged in a circular pattern. calling up and changing settings. For in-
structions on using these submenus, see
The information available in the multifunc- If you press button or
tion display is arranged in menus, each Settings menu ( page 151).
repeatedly, you will pass through each
containing a number of functions or submenu one after the other. The number of menus available in the sys-
menus. tem depends on which optional equipment
If you press button k or j
is installed in your vehicle.
The individual functions are then found repeatedly, you will pass through each
within the relevant menu (radio or CD op- function display, one after the other, in The menus are described on the following
erations under AUDIO, for example). These the current menu. pages.
functions serve to call up relevant informa-
tion or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
136
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus. overview of the individual menus.
137
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8

Standard dis- AUDIO Telephone* NAVI Distronic* Trip computer Malfunction Settings
play memory
Call up FSS Select radio Load phone Activate Call up set- Fuel consump- Call up malfunc- Reset to factory
station book route guid- tings tion statistics af- tion messages settings
ance ter start
Check tire Select satellite Search for Fuel consump- Instrument clus-
Commands/submenus
pressure* radio station* name in tion statistics ter submenu

(USA only) phone book since the last re-
set
Check engine Operate CD Select Call up range Lighting sub-
oil level player number last menu
dialed
Digital speed- Operate Vehicle sub-
ometer cassette player menu
Convenience
submenu
138
Controls in detail
Control system
i Standard display menu AUDIO menu

The headings used in the menus table
You can select the functions in the stan- The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
are designed to facilitate navigation
dard display menu with button k the audio equipment which you currently
within the system and are not neces-
or j. have turned on.
sarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays. The following functions are available: If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the
The first function displayed in each Funktion Page display.
menu will automatically show you
Call up FSS 295
which part of the system you are in. The following functions are available:
Check tire pressure* 287
Funktion Page
Check engine oil level 274
Select radio station 140
Call up digital speedometer 139
Select satellite radio* station 140
(USA only)
Display digital speedometer
Operate CD player 141
Press the j or k button repeat-
edly until you see the digital speedom- Operate cassette player 141
eter appear in the display.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.
139
Controls in detail
Control system
Select radio station Select satellite radio* station i

(USA only) Feature description is based on prelim-
Turn on the radio. Refer to separate
COMAND operating instructions. The satellite radio is treated as a radio ap- inary information available at time of
plication. printing.
Press button or repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned sta- Select satellite radio with the corre- Additional optional satellite radio
tion in the display. sponding key on the COMAND control equipment and a subscription to satel-
panel (SAT). lite radio service provider are required
for satellite radio operation. At time of
printing, no date for the availability of
until you see the currently tuned sta-
optional equipment required for satel-
tion in the display.
lite radio operation had been set.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for details and availability for
1 Waveband your vehicle.
2 Station frequency
For more information, refer to separate
Press button k or j repeatedly COMAND operating instructions.
until the desired station is found.
1 SAT mode and preset number
i 2 Channel name or number
You can only store new stations using
Press button k or j repeatedly
the corresponding feature on the radio.
until the desired channel is found.
Refer to separate COMAND operating
instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.
140
Controls in detail
Control system
Operate the CD player Press button k or j repeatedly Operate the cassette player
until the desired track is selected.
Turn on the radio and select the CD Turn on COMAND and select cassette
player. Refer to separate COMAND op- i player. Please refer to the separate
erating instructions. operating instructions.
CD changer*: To select a CD from the
Press button or repeatedly magazine, press a number on the Press button or repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently COMAND system key pad located in until you see the settings for the
being played appear in the display. the center dashboard. cassette being played in the display.
1 Current CD 1 Current side

(for CD changer* ( page 142))
Press button j to fast foward
2 Current track
or k to rewind.
141
Controls in detail
Control system
CD changer* operating mode Clean CDs from time to time with a com- !
mercially available cleaning cloth. No sol- Your CD drive has been designed to
vents, anti-static sprays, etc. should be play CDs which correspond to the IEC
General notes
used for cleaning. Replace the CD in its 60908 standard.
Should excessively high temperatures oc- case after use. Protect CDs from heat and
cur while in CD mode, CD TEMP HIGH will direct sunlight. If you insert thicker data carriers,
appear on the display and muting will take e.g. ones that have data on both sides
place. The unit will then switch back to the (one side with DVD data, the other side
last operating mode used until the temper- with audio data), they cannot be eject-
ature has decreased to a safe operating ed and will damage the drive.
level.
Only use CDs, which bear the label shown For information on operating the CD
Should excessively low temperatures oc-
and that conform to the compact disc dig- changer, refer to the separate COMAND
cur while in CD mode, CD TEMP LOW will ap-
ital audio standard (IEC 60908). operating instructions.
pear on the display, but the CD will
continue to play. Use of CDs which do not meet this stan-
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interfer- dard may cause damage to the CD chang-
ence during playback. Avoid fingerprints er. Do not play single-CDs (80 mm) with an
and dust on CDs. Do not write on CDs or adapter.
apply any label or other material to them.
Only use original CDs. Using copied CDs
may create problems during playback.
142
Controls in detail
Control system
Loading/unloading the CD magazine Remove the magazine and completely

Warning! G The CD changer is located behind the cov- pull out the CD tray.
er on the left hand side in the trunk. Place the CD in the recess of the tray,
The CD changer is a Class 1 laser product.
label side up.
There is a danger of invisible laser radiation Remove the CD changer cover.
if the cover is opened or damaged. Push the tray into the magazine in the
Slide the CD changer door to the right
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer direction shown by the arrow.
and press the eject button 3.
does not contain any parts which can be ser-
viced by the user. For safety reasons, have The magazine is ejected. i
any service work which may be necessary CDs which have been inserted improp-
performed only by qualified personnel. erly or are unreadable will not be
played.
Operational readiness of CD changer
Push the magazine into the CD changer
If a CD changer has been installed in the in the direction shown by the arrow and
system, it can be operated from the close the CD changer door.
COMAND system key pad located in the
center dashboard. A loaded magazine
must be installed for CD playing.
1 CD
2 CD changer
3 CD tray
4 CD magazine
143
Controls in detail
Control system
TEL menu* Which messages will appear in the display

Never operate radio transmitters equipped
field depends on whether your telephone is
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
switched on or off:
Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is If the telephone is off, the message in
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- the multifunction display is: TEL OFF.
A drivers attention to the road must always
tion of the vehicles electronic system, pos-
be his/her primary focus when driving. For If the telephone is on:
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
personal injury. The telephone will then search for a
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
network. During this time the display
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
You can use the functions in the TEL menu reads NO SERVICE.
phone call. If you choose to use the tele-
phone while driving, please use the to operate your telephone, provided it is As soon as the telephone has found a
hands-free device and only use the tele- connected to a hands-free system and network, READY is indicated in the dis-
phone when weather, road and traffic condi- switched on. play.
tions permit. Switch on the telephone and COMAND.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from Press button or on the
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve- steering wheel repeatedly until you see
hicle. the TEL menu in the display.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- The standby message indicates that your
ly 14 m) every second. telephone is ready for use and you can op-
erate it using the control system.
144
Controls in detail
Control system
The following functions are available: Answering a call Ending a call

Function Page When your telephone is ready to receive Press button t.
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
Anwering a call 145 You have ended the call. In the display
the display you will then see the message:
you will again see the standby mes-
Ending a call 145
sage.
Dialing a number from the 145
phone book Dialing a number from the phone book
Redialing 146 If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
Press button s.
You have answered the call. In the dis- until you see the TEL menu in the dis-
play you see the duration of the call po- play.
sitioned above the number.
Press button j or k.
i The control system reads the phone
If you do not wish to accept a call, book which is stored in the telephone.
press button t. The call transmission depends on the
number of entries in the phone book
and can take up to 60 seconds. In the
display you will see the message
PLEASE WAIT!.
145
Controls in detail
Control system
When the message PLEASE WAIT! dis- Press button s. Redialing

appears, the phone book has been The system dials the selected phone The control system stores the most recent-
loaded. number. ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
Press button j or k repeatedly the need to search through your entire
If the connection is successful, the
until the desired name appears in the phone book.
name of the party you called and
display.
the duration of the call will appear Press button or repeatedly
The stored names are displayed in as- in the display. until you see the TEL menu in the dis-
cending or descending alphabetical or- play.
der.
Press button s.
i In the display you see the first number
If you press and hold j or k for in the redial memory.
longer than one second, the system Press button j or k repeatedly
scrolls rapidly through the list of names until the desired name appears in the
If no connection is made, the con-
until you release the button again. display.
trol system stores the dialed num-
Cancel the quick search mode by ber in the redial memory.
pressing t. i
If you do not want to use the telephone,
press button t.
Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
146
Controls in detail
Control system
NAVI menu Distronic* menu Distronic deactivated

When Distronic is deactivated you will see
In the NAVI menu, you will see which status Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the
the standard display in the display.
the navigation system has. current settings for your Distronic system.
What information is shown in the display
depends on whether the Distronic system
until you see the message NAVI in the
is active or inactive.
display.
Please refer to the Driving systems sec-
If the navigation system is switched off,
tion of this manual ( page 206) for in-
the message NAVI OFF is shown in the
display. structions on how to activate Distronic.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
Press button or repeatedly 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
If the navigation system is on and no
until you see one of the following two 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
destination has been entered, you will
pictures in the display. ahead
see the current direction in which the
vehicle is moving and the names of 4 Symbol for activated distance warning
streets in the display. function
5 Your vehicle
Please refer to the COMAND manual for in-
structions on how to activate the route
guidance system.
147
Controls in detail
Control system
Distronic activated Trip computer menu Fuel consumption statistics after start
When you activate Distronic, you will see Press button or repeatedly
Use the trip computer menu to call up sta-
the set speed for about five seconds in the until you see the first function of the
tistical data on your vehicle. The following
Distronic display. The following display Trip computer menu.
information is available:
then appears:
Press button j or k repeatedly
Function Page until you see this message in the left
Fuel consumption statistics after 148 display: AFTER START.
start
Fuel consumption statistics 149
since last reset
Resetting fuel consumption sta- 149
1 Distronic activated
tistics
Call up range (distance to empty) 150
1 Distance driven since start
2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average fuel consumption since start
4 Average speed since start
148
Controls in detail
Control system
i Fuel consumption since last reset Resetting fuel consumption statistics

The AFTER START display will flash until Press button or repeatedly Press button or repeatedly
a distance of approximately 1 mile until you see the first function of the until you see the first function of the
(1.6 km) has been covered or two min- trip computer menu. Trip computer menu.
utes have elapsed since the engine was
Press button j or k repeatedly Press button j or k repeatedly
restarted. During this period, you can
until you see this message in the dis- until you see the reading that you want
incorporate the values for the previous
play: AFTER RESET. to reset in the display.
journey by pressing the reset button on
the instrument cluster. Press and hold the reset button on the
instrument cluster ( page 22) until
If the reset button is not pressed, the
the value is reset to 0.
AFTER START values are set to 0.
1 Distance driven since last reset

2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average fuel consumption since last re-
set
4 Average speed since last reset
149
Controls in detail
Control system
Call up range (distance to empty) Malfunction memory menu Press button or repeatedly
until you see the malfunction message
Use the malfunction memory menu to scan memory in the display.
until you see the first function of the
malfunction and warning messages that
Trip computer menu.
may be stored in the system. What infor- No malfunction messages
Press button j or k repeatedly mation is shown in the display depends on
If no malfunctions have occurred, the mes-
until you see this message in the dis- whether malfunctions have actually oc-
sage in the display is:
play: RANGE. curred.
NO MALFUNCTION
In the display you will see the calculat-
ed range based on the current fuel tank Warning! G Malfunctions have occurred
level.
If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
Malfunction and warning messages are only
the number of malfunctions in the display:
indicated for certain systems and are inten-
tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a remind-
er with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owners
and/or drivers responsibility to maintain
the vehicles operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks 1 Number of malfunctions
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages ( page 312).
150
Controls in detail
Control system
Press button k or j. Settings menu Resetting all settings

The stored messages will now be dis- You can reset all the functions of all sub-
In the SETTINGS menu there are two func-
played in the order in which the mal- menus to the factory settings.
tions:
functions have occurred. See the
Press the reset button on the instru-
Practical hints section for malfunc- The function RESET WITH R BUTTON FOR
ment cluster ( page 22) for approxi-
tion and warning messages 3 SEC., with which you can reset all
mately three seconds.
( page 312). settings to the original factory settings.
In the display you will see the request
Should any malfunctions occur while driv- A collection of submenus with which
to press the reset button again to con-
ing, the number of malfunctions will reap- you can make individual settings for
firm.
pear in the display when the SmartKey in your vehicle.
the starter switch is turned to position 0 or Press the reset button again.
removed from the starter switch. until the SETTINGS menu appears in the The functions of all the submenus will
display. reset to factory settings.
i
The message memory will be cleared i
when you turn the SmartKey in the The settings you have changed will not
starter switch to position 1 or 2. You be reset unless you confirm the action
will then only see high priority malfunc- by pressing the reset button a second
tions ( page 312). time.
Due to safety reasons, resetting all of
the settings while driving will not reset
all of the values in the LIGHTING or the
VEHICLE menu.
151
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Resetting the functions of a submenu
Scroll down with the button, scroll up
Press button k or j. For each submenu you can reset all the
with the button. functions to the factory settings.
In the display you see the collection of
Move within the submenus with the k
the submenus. Move to a function in the submenu.
or j button to the individual functions.
Press the reset button on the instru-
The settings themselves are made with
ment cluster ( page 22) for approxi-
button or .
mately three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to con-
firm.
Press button or .
Press the reset button again.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu. All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
152
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can

be changed within the various menus. De-
tailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pag-
es.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LIGHTING VEHICLE CONVENIENCE

Select temperature display Set daytime running lamp mode Set automatic locking Set key-dependency
mode (USA only)
Select multifunction display Set locator lighting Limiting opening height of trunk Activate easy-entry/exit feature
mode lid*
Select language Exterior lamps delayed shut-off Set parking position for exterior
rear view mirror
Interior lighting delayed shut-off Set fold-in function for exterior
rear view mirrors
Adjusting the drive-dynamic
seat (drivers side)
153
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu Selecting temperature display mode Selecting multifunction display mode
Access the INST. CLUS. submenu via the Move the selection marker with Move the selection marker with
SETTINGS menu. Use the INST. CLUS. sub- the or button to the INST. the or button to the INST.
menu to change the instrument cluster dis- CLUS. submenu. CLUS. submenu.
play settings. The following functions are
Press button j or k repeatedly Press button j or k repeatedly
available:
until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis-
Function Page play: TEMP. INDICATOR. play: DISPLAY VALUES IN.
Select temperature display 155 The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the current
mode setting. setting.
Select multifunction display 154
mode
Select language 155
Press or to set the temper- Press or to set speedome-

ature unit to degrees Celsius (C) or deter unit to MILES or KM.
grees Fahrenheit (F).
154
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting language Press or to select the lan- Lighting submenu

guage to be used for the multifunction
Move the selection marker with Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SET-
display messages.
the or button to the INST. TINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu
CLUS. submenu. Available languages: to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle. The following functions are
Press button j or k repeatedly German
available:
until you see this message in the dis-
English
play: TEXT. Function Page
French
The selection marker is on the current Set daytime running lamp mode 156
setting. Italian (USA only)
Spanish Set locator lighting 156
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off 157
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 158
155
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting daytime running lamp mode With daytime running lamp mode se- Setting locator lighting
(USA only) lected and the exterior lamp switch at
During darkness, the following lamps will
position 0, the following lamps will
Move the selection marker with come on when the exterior lamp switch is
come on automatically when the en-
the or button to the LIGHT- in position U, the locator lighting fea-
gine is turned on:
ING submenu. ture is activated, and the vehicle is un-
Parking lamps and low beam head- locked by remote control:
lamps
until you see this message in the dis- Parking lamps
play: LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE . License plate lamps (in low ambient
Tail lamps
light conditions)
The selection marker is on the current
License plate lamps
setting. i Front fog lamps
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
another position, the corresponding To activate locator lighting:
lamp(s) will switch on. Make sure the function LOCATOR
For safety reasons, resetting the LIGHTING is set.
LIGHTING submenu to factory settings Turn the exterior lamp switch to
( page 152) while driving will not reposition U.
Press or to select manual
set the daytime running lamp mode.
or daytime running lamp (constant) The locator lighting switches off when the
mode. This function is not available in In the display you will then see the mes- drivers door is opened. It switches off au-
countries where daytime running sage: LIGHTING CANNOT BE RESET tomatically after a period of approximately
lamps are mandatory. COMPLETELY TO FACTORY SETTINGS 40 seconds.
WHILE DRIVING.
156
Controls in detail
Control system
Move the selection marker with Setting night security illumination i

the or button to the LIGHT- You can reactivate this function within
(Exterior lamps delayed switch-off)
ING submenu. ten minutes by opening a door.
Use the HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF
Press button j or k repeatedly If you do not open a door after remov-
function to set whether and for how long
until you see this message in the dis- ing the SmartKey, the lamps will auto-
you would like the exterior lamps to illumi-
play: LOCATOR LIGHTING. matically switch off after 60 seconds.
nate during darkness after all doors are
The selection marker is on the current closed. When the delayed switch-off fea-
setting. ture is activated and the exterior lamp To activate night security illumination:
switch is in position U before the en-
Select delayed switch-off period (see
gine is turned off, the following lamps will
below).
remain lit after you remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch: Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U before turning off the en-
Parking lamps
gine.
Tail lamps
Press or to select the de- To select delayed switch-off period:
sired setting. License plate lamps
Move the selection marker with
The locator lighting will be switched ON Front fog lamps the or button to the LIGHT-
or OFF. ING submenu.
play: HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF.
setting.
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch Press button j or k repeatedly

to position 2 and back to 0. until you see this message in the dis-
The delayed switch-off feature is deac- play: INT. ILLUMINATION DELAYED
SWITCH-OFF.
tivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the SmartKey in the starter The selection marker is on the current
switch. setting.
Press or to select the de- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
sired lamp-on period.
You can select: button on the gear selector lever
0 S, the delayed switch-off feature ( page 33).
is deactivated
Interior illumination delayed switch-off
15 S, 30 S, 45 S, or 60 S, the de- Press or to select the de-
layed switch-off feature is activated Use this function to set whether and for sired lamp-on time period. You can se-
how long you would like the interior light- lect:
You can temporarily deactivate the de-
ing to remain lit during darkness after the
layed switch-off feature: 0 S, the delayed switch-off feature
SmartKey is removed from the starter
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the switch. is deactivated.
SmartKey in the starter switch to 5 S, 10 S, 15 S, or 20 S, the delayed
position 0. switch-off feature is activated.
the or button to the LIGHT-
ING submenu.
158
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle submenu Setting automatic locking Limiting opening height of trunk lid*
Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SET- Use this function to activate or deactivate This function is available on vehicles with
INGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu to the automatic central locking. With the au- the trunk lid opening/closing system*.
make general vehicle settings. The follow- tomatic central locking system activated, Use this function to activate or deactivate
ing functions are available: the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle the limiting opening height of trunk lid.
speeds of approximately 9 mph
Function Page Move the selection marker with
(15 km/h).
the or button to VEHICLE
Setting automatic locking 159
Press button or to move submenu.
Limiting opening height of trunk 159 the selection marker to the VEHICLE
lid* Press button j or k repeatedly
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly play:
OPENING LIMITER
play: AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK. TRUNK LID
setting.
setting.
Press or to switch
Press button or to switch
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF.
the opening limiter for trunk lid ON or
OFF.
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Convenience submenu Setting key-dependency Activating easy-entry/exit feature

Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the Use this function to set whether the mem- Use this function to activate and deacti-
SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE sub- ory settings for the seats, the steering vate the easy-entry/exit feature. When the
menu to change the settings for a number wheel, the mirrors, and the automatic cli- feature is activated, the steering wheel and
of convenience features. The following mate control should be stored separately drivers seat will move back to facilitate ex-
functions are available: for each SmartKey ( page 121). iting when you:
Function Page Move the selection marker with remove the SmartKey from the starter
the or button to switch or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Setting key-dependency 160
the CONVENIENCE submenu. button*
Activating easy-entry/exit fea- 160
ture Press button j or k repeatedly open the drivers door
Setting parking position for exte- 162 However, the engine must be turned off.
play: SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT.
rior rear view mirror
Setting fold-in function for exteri- 162
setting.
Warning! G
or rear view mirrors
You must make sure that no one can be-
Adjusting the drive-dynamic seat 163 come trapped or injured by the moving
(drivers side) steering wheel and the drivers seat when
the easy-entry/exit feature is in operation
and the drivers door is being opened or the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
Press or to set key-depen- switch.
dency to ON or OFF.
160
Controls in detail
Control system
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- i

hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. To cancel seat/steering wheel move-
Children could open the drivers door and ment, do one of the following:
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit Press seat adjustment switch
feature, which could result in an accident ( page 35)
Move the steering column stalk Press or to change the
( page 37) easy-entry/exit setting.
After entering the vehicle, the steering
wheel and seat will move into the position Press the memory button
stored in memory when: ( page 121) The following settings are available for the
easy-entry/exit feature:
the drivers door is closed
you put the SmartKey in the starter STEER. COL. Only the steering
the or button to column is moved.
switch the CONVENIENCE submenu.
press and hold the appropriate stored ST. COL + SEAT Both the steering
Press button j or k repeatedly column and the
position button on the memory switch until you see this message in the dis-
( page 121) seat are moved.
play: EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE.
OFF The easy-entry/ex-
The selection marker is on the current it feature is deacti-
setting. vated.
161
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting parking position for exterior rear The selection marker is on the current Press button j or k repeatedly
view mirror setting. until the message FOLD IN MIRRORS
WHEN LOCKING? appears in the display.
Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING
function to select whether the passen- The selection marker is on the current
ger-side exterior rear view mirror should be setting.
turned downward during parking maneu-
vers when reverse gear R is engaged. For
additional information, see Activating ex-
terior rear view mirror parking position Press or to switch function
( page 175). ON or OFF.
Move the selection marker to the
CONVENIENCE submenu using the Setting fold-in function for exterior rear
Press button or to switch
or button. view mirrors
the automatic fold-in setting for the
Press button j or k repeatedly Using this function, you can set the exteri- mirrors ON or OFF when the vehicle is
until you see this message in the dis- or rear view mirrors to be automatically locked.
play: MIRROR SETTIMG WHEN PARKING. folded in when you lock your vehicle
( page 176).
Move the selection marker to the
CONVENIENCE submenu with the
or button.
162
Controls in detail
Control system
Adjusting drive-dynamic seats The selection marker is on the current The following settings are available:
Use this function to adjust the settings for setting.
Setting 1 (Sporty) Strong lateral
the drive-dynamic seat. support and fast air
Move the selection marker with pressure build-up in
the or button to the air chambers of
the CONVENIENCE submenu. the backrest side bol-
sters
To adjust the drivers drive-dynamic
seat press button j or k re- Setting 2 (Comfort) Less lateral
Press button or to select
peatedly until you see this message in support and slow air
the desired setting.
the display: DRIV. DYN. SEAT ADJ. pressure build-up in
DRIVER the air chambers of
the backrest side bol-
sters
163
Controls in detail
For more information on driving with an au- The automatic transmission selects indi-
tomatic transmission, see the Getting vidual gears automatically, depending on: Warning! G
started section ( page 43).
the gear selector lever position D with It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
Your vehicles transmission adapts its gear gear ranges ( page 166) lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
shifting process to your individual driving
the selected shift program (C/S) higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
style by continually adjusting the shift
( page 170) firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
points up or down. These shift point adjust- accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
ments are performed based on current op- or
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
erating and driving conditions. (C/S/M) (S 55 AMG only) someone or something. Only shift into gear
If the operating conditions change, the au- ( page 171) when the engine is idling normally and when
tomatic transmission reacts by adjusting the position of the accelerator pedal your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
its gear shift program. ( page 170)
When the gear selector lever is in
i the vehicle speed
position D, you can influence transmission
During the brief warm-up, transmission The current gear selector lever position shifting by:
upshifting is delayed. This allows the and shift program (C/S) or (C/S/M) appear
catalytic converter to heat up more limiting the gear range
in the tachometer display ( page 22).
quickly to operating temperature. changing gears manually
164
Controls in detail
One-touch gearshifting i Canceling gear range limit

To avoid overrevving the engine when Press and hold the gear selector lever
Even with an automatic transmission you
the gear selector lever is moved to the in the D+ direction until D reappears in
can change the gears manually when the
D- direction, the transmission will not the tachometer display field.
gear selector lever is in position D.
shift to a lower gear if the engine's
The transmission will shift from the current
max. speed would be exceeded.
Downshifting gear range directly to gear range D.
Briefly press the gear selector lever to Upshifting Shifting into optimal gear range
the left in the D- direction.
Briefly press the gear selector lever to Press and hold the gear selector lever
The transmission will shift from the current the right in the D+ direction. in the D- direction.
gear to the next lower gear. This action
simultaneously limits the gear range of the The transmission will shift from the current The transmission will automatically select
transmission ( page 166). gear to the next higher gear as permitted the gear range suited for optimal accelera-
by the shift program. This action simulta- tion and deceleration. This will involve
neously extends the gear range of the shifting down one or more gears.
Warning! G transmission.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift

in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
165
Controls in detail
Gear ranges Effect Effect

With the gear selector lever in position D, The transmission shifts through The transmission shifts through
you can limit the transmissions gear range sixth gear only (applies only to second gear only.
by pressing the gear selector lever to the vehicles with 7-speed automatic
Allows the use of engines brak-
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit transmission).
ing power when driving
by pressing the gear selector lever to the The transmission shifts through
on steep downgrades
right (D+). fifth gear only (applies only to ve-
hicles with 7-speed automatic in mountainous regions
The selected gear range will appear in the
tachometer display. If you press on the ac- transmission). under extreme operating con-
celerator when the engine has reached its The transmission shifts through ditions
rpm limit, the transmission will upshift be- fourth gear only. The transmission operates in
yond any gear range limit selected. The transmission shifts through first gear only.
third gear only.
For maximum use of engines
With this selection you can use braking effect on very steep or
the braking effect of the engine. lengthy downgrades.
166
Controls in detail
Gear selector lever position Effect Effect

The SmartKey can only be re- Neutral
Effect moved from the starter switch
No power is transmitted from the
Park position with the gear selector lever in
engine to the drive axle. When
position P. With the SmartKey
Gear selector lever position when the brakes are released, the vehi-
removed the gear selector lever is
the vehicle is parked. Place gear cle can be moved freely
locked in position P.
selector lever in position P only (pushed or towed).
when vehicle is stopped. The Reverse gear
To avoid damage to the transmis-
park position is not intended to Place gear selector lever in sion, never engage N while driv-
serve as a brake when the vehicle position R only when vehicle is ing.
is parked. Rather, the driver stopped.
should always set the parking If the ESP is deactivated or mal-
brake in addition to placing the functioning:
gear selector lever in position P Move gear selector lever to N
to secure the vehicle. only if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
are available.
167
Controls in detail
! Steering wheel gearshift control

Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any (Speedshift) S 55 AMG
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
other reason with gear selector lever leaves can come into contact with the hot
in N can result in transmission damage You can change the gears manually on the
exhaust system, as these materials could be
that is not covered by the steering wheel or by using the gear
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. selector lever ( page 165).
Allow engine to warm up under low load
Warning! G use. Do not place full load on the engine
Warning! G until the operating temperature has been
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the reached. Shift into reverse gear only when
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se- SmartKey from the starter switch, take the the vehicle is stopped.
lector lever not fully engaged in position P is SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
dangerous. Also, position P alone is not in- lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- !
tended to or capable of preventing your ve- attended in the vehicle, or with access to an Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
hicle from moving, possibly hitting people or unlocked vehicle. Children could move the extended period when driving off on
objects. gear selector lever from position P, which slippery road surfaces. This may cause
Always set the parking brake in addition to could result in an accident and/or serious serious damage to the drivetrain which
shifting to position P ( page 45). personal injury. is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
168
Controls in detail
The steering wheel gearshift buttons are Downshifting Upshifting

located to the left and right of the steering
Press button 1 on the left side of the Press button 2 on the right side of the
wheel.
steering wheel. steering wheel.
The gear range is limited when you are not The gear range is extended when you are
driving in the manual program mode not driving in the manual program mode
( page 166). ( page 166).
When driving in the manual program mode When driving in the manual program mode
( page 171), the transmission will shift ( page 171), the transmission will shift
from the current gear to the next lower from the current gear to the next higher
gear ( page 172). gear ( page 172).
i
1 Left button: downshift Warning! G You cannot shift with the steering
2 Right button: upshift wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
i
You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
169
Controls in detail
Program mode selector switch Press program mode selector switch Accelerator position
1 repeatedly until the letter of the de-
The program mode selector switch is sired shift program appears in the ta- Your driving style influences the transmis-
located on the lower part of the center chometer display ( page 22). sions shifting behavior:
console.
Select C for comfort driving: Less throttle Earlier upshifting
The vehicle starts out in second More throttle Later upshifting
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if Kickdown
full throttle is applied or gear Use kickdown when you want maximum
range 1 is selected. acceleration.
Traction and driving stability are im- Press the accelerator past the point of
proved on icy roads. resistance.
Upshifts occur earlier even when The transmission shifts into a lower
1 Program mode selector switch you give more gas. The engine then gear.
operates at lower rpms and the
S Sport For standard driving wheels are less likely to spin. Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
C Comfort For comfort driving The power transmission ratio for
gear selector lever position R The transmission shifts up again.
!
changes depending on the program
Never change the program mode when mode selected (S or C).
the gear selector lever is out of
position P. This could result in a
change of driving characteristics for
which you may not be prepared.
170
Controls in detail
Manual shift program S 55 AMG Program mode selector switch Activating manual shift program
The program mode selector switch is Press program mode selector
In the manual shift program mode you can
located on the lower part of the center switch 1 repeatedly until the M for
change the gears manually on the steering
console. manual shift program appears in the
wheel ( page 168) or by using the gear
tachometer display.
selector lever ( page 165).
The program mode switches to manual
Allow engine to warm up under low load
program mode M. Automatic shifting is
use. Do not place full load on the engine
switched off. The gear range is not
until the operating temperature has been
limited.
reached. Shift into reverse gear only when
the vehicle is stopped. You can change the gears manually when
the gear selector lever is in position D. You
! can upshift or downshift through the gears
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an in succession.
extended period when driving off on 1 Program mode selector switch The current gear selector lever position
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
S Sport For standard driving and the selected shift program (C/S/M) is
serious damage to the drive train which
indicated in the tachometer display
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz C Comfort For comfort driving ( page 22).
Limited Warranty.
M Manual For manual gear shifting
The selected shift program (C/S/M) is
indicated in the tachometer display
( page 22).
171
Controls in detail
Downshifting Upshifting Kickdown

Briefly press the gear selector lever to Briefly press the gear selector lever to The kickdown can also be used for
the left in the D- direction the right in the D+ direction maximum acceleration when driving in the
( page 165). ( page 165). manual program mode.
or or Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
Press button 1 on the left side of the Press button 2 on the right side of the
steering wheel ( page 168). steering wheel ( page 168). The transmission shifts to a lower gear.
The transmission shifts to the next The transmission shifts to the next Shift up once the desired speed has
lower gear. higher gear. been reached.
i
Warning! G When driving at full throttle, the trans-
mission shifts to the next higher gear
when maximum engine speed has been
reached.
vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not When you brake or stop, the transmis-
prevent this type of loss of control. sion shifts down to a gear from which
you can easily accelerate or take off.
172
Controls in detail
Deactivating manual shift program Emergency operation (Limp home Turn off the engine.
Press the program mode selector mode) Wait at least ten seconds before re-
switch repeatedly until S or C for starting.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
automatic shift program appears in the
transmission no longer shifts, the trans- Restart the engine.
tachometer display.
mission is most likely operating in limp Move gear selector lever to position D
or home (emergency operation) mode. In this (for second gear) or R.
Restart the engine. mode, only second gear and reverse gear
can be activated. Have the transmission checked at an
The transmission will go into the auto- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
Stop the vehicle.
matic shift program mode last selected soon as possible.
(S or C). Move gear selector lever to P.
Program mode M is not stored.
i
The last selected automatic program
mode (S or C) is switched on when the
engine is restarted in the automatic
program mode.
173
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers,
see Windshield wipers ( page 48) and Warning! G Warning! G
for setting the exterior rear view mirrors,
see Exterior rear view mirror The automatic antiglare function does not Exercise care when using the passen-
( page 38). react if incoming light is not aimed directly ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
at sensors in the interior rear view mirror. surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
Rear view mirror The interior rear view mirror and the exterior for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
rear view mirror on the drivers side do not are closer than they appear. Check your in-
react, for example, if the rear window sun side rear view mirror or glance over your
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror shoulder before changing lanes.
shade* is in raised position.
The reflection brightness of the exterior
Glare can endanger you and others.
rear view mirror on the drivers side and !
the interior rear view mirror will respond
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
automatically to glare when
Warning! G with the vehicle paint finish can be
the ignition is switched on completely removed only while in the
and In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte liquid state by applying plenty of water.
may escape from the mirror housing if the
incoming light from headlamps falls on mirror glass breaks.
the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
low the liquid to come into contact with
The interior rear view mirror will not react if eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
reverse gear is engaged In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
the interior lighting is turned on
necessary.
174
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror Press button 2 for the passenger-side The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
parking position exterior rear view mirror. previously stored driving position:
Follow these steps to activate the mirror Place the gear selector lever in reverse ten seconds after you put the gear se-
parking position so that the passen- gear R. lector lever out of position R
ger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
The passenger-side exterior rear view immediately once your vehicle exceeds
turned downward to the stored position.
mirror will be turned downward to the a speed of approximately 6 mph
Make sure you have stored a parking stored position. (10 km/h)
position for the passenger-side exterior
immediately when you press button 1
rear view mirror ( page 122).
for drivers side mirror.
Make sure the MIRROR SETTING WHEN
PARKING function in the CONVENIENCE
submenu of the control system is
switched to ON ( page 162).
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
1 Drivers side exterior rear view mirror

button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir-
ror button
175
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Electrically folding exterior rear view i Switch on ignition.

mirrors If you are driving at more than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h), you will not Folding in
! be able to fold the exterior mirrors in. Press button 2 briefly.
Before driving the vehicle through an
Both mirrors fold in.
automatic car wash, fold the exterior Folding the exterior mirrors in and out
mirrors in. Otherwise they may get manually Folding out
damaged.
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if Press button 1 briefly.
they are not folded out completely.
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out Both mirrors fold out.
automatically The buttons are located on the drivers
door. !
When the corresponding function in the
control system is activated ( page 162): If an exterior rear view mirror housing
is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
The exterior rear view mirrors automat- rear), reposition it manually by applying
ically fold in as soon as the vehicle is firm pressure until it snaps back into
locked from the outside. place.
The exterior rear view mirrors automat- If an exterior rear view mirror housing
ically fold out as soon as the vehicle is is forcibly pushed rearward (hit from
unlocked and the drivers or front pas- the front), press button 2 to fold mir-
senger door are subsequently opened. rors in, then press button 1 to fold
mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by
1 Folds the exterior mirrors out
hand as this may damage the adjust-
2 Folds the exterior mirrors in
ment mechanism.
176
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Windshield wipers ! Headlamp cleaning system*

Do not leave windshield wipers in inter- (Standard on S 500, S 600, S 55 AMG)
For more information on the windshield mittent setting when vehicle is taken to
wipers, see Windshield wipers an automatic car wash or during wind- The switch is located on the left side of the
( page 48). shield cleaning. Wipers will operate in dashboard.
i the presence of water sprayed on the

windshield, and wipers may be dam-
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
aged as a result.
the vehicle is at a standstill and a front
door is opened. The switch should not be left in inter-
mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
A rain sensor automatically controls the the windshield once every time the en-
windshield wipers depending on how wet gine is started. Dust that accumulates
the windshield is. on the windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
Switch on ignition. when wiping occurs on a dry wind- 1 Headlamp washer switch
Set wiper switch to position I shield.
Switch on ignition.
( page 48).
Press switch 1.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the The headlamps are cleaned with a
rain sensor. high-pressure water jet.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*
( page 281).
177
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors If sunlight enters through a side window:

Disengage sun visor from mounting 1.
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving. Pivot sun visor to the side.
Adjusting the vanity mirror:
Warning! G Slide mirror to the right or left.
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Images in the mirror appear in normal
size or larger, depending on the posi-
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
tion of the mirror.
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare 1 Mounting
can endanger you and others. 2 Mirror cover i
3 Mirror lamp If you disengage the sun visor from
Swing sun visors down when you expe- 4 Document holder mounting 1, mirror lamp 3 will
rience glare. switch off.
To use mirror, lift up cover 2.
Mirror lamp 3 comes on. Document holder
You can use the plastic tab of the docu-
ment holder 4 to hold admission tickets,
parking passes, or similar items in place.
178
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window sunshade* Rear door window sunshade*

Warning! G
The switch is located in the center console.
When operating the rear window sunshade,
be sure that there is no danger of anyone be-
ing harmed by the raising or lowering proce-
dure.
The raising or lowering procedure can be im-
mediately reversed by pressing switch 1.
Warning! G To raise sunshade pull on the tab and

engage in holder.
1 Rear window sunshade switch When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, take the To lower sunshade disengage tab and
Switch on ignition.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and guide retraction.
Press switch 1 briefly to raise the sun- lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
shade. !
Always guide the sunshade. Do not let
Press switch 1 briefly to lower the unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment can cause an accident
it snap back abruptly, as the retractor
sunshade.
could be damaged.
Always raise the sunshade fully for its sup-
port against the window frame.
179
Controls in detail
180
Controls in detail
Item i
Warning! G For draft-free ventilation, move the slid-
1 Left center air vent, adjustable
ers for the center air vents 1, 7, 9
2 Left air vent, fixed When operating the automatic climate con-
to the middle position.
trol, the air that enters the passenger com-
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
partment through the air vents in the
for left center air vent
footwell can be very hot or very cold (de-
4 Thumbwheel for air temperature pending on the set temperature). This may
control for center air vents cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin
5 Thumbwheel for air volume control in the immediate area of the air vents. Al-
for right center air vent ways keep sufficient distance between un-
protected parts of the body and the footwell
6 Right air vent, fixed
air vents. If necessary change the air flow
7 Right center air vent, adjustable using the air distribution controls to direct
8 Side defroster vent, fixed the air away from the footwell air vents
( page 184).
9 Side air vent, adjustable
a Thumbwheel for air volume control
for side air vents
b Door air vent
c Automatic climate control panel
181
Controls in detail
Item The automatic climate control is operation-

al whenever the engine is running. You can
1 Windshield defroster operate the climate control system in ei-
2 Rear window defroster ther the automatic or manual mode. The
3 Display system cools or heats the interior depend-
ing on the selected interior temperature
4 Residual engine heat utilization and the current outside temperature.
(REST)
5 Automatic climate control on/off
Warning! G
6 Air distribution, right
Automatic climate control panel
7 AC cooling on/off () When operating the automatic climate con-
trol, the air that enters the passenger com-
8 Right side temperature control partment through the air vents in the
9 Air volume (automatic, manual) footwell can be very hot or very cold (de-
a Left side temperature control pending on the set temperature). This may
cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin
b Air recirculation in the immediate area of the air vents. Al-
c Air distribution, left ways keep sufficient distance between un-
d Activated charcoal filter protected parts of the body and the footwell
air vents. If necessary change the air flow
using the air distribution controls to direct
the air away from the footwell air vents
( page 184).
182
Controls in detail
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i Setting the temperature

odors are filtered out before outside air en- The current climate control settings
ters the passenger compartment through Use temperature controls a and 8
(ON/OFF, temperature, air volume, ac-
the air distribution system. ( page 182) to separately adjust the air
tivated charcoal filter, etc.) are stored
temperature on each side of the passenger
The air conditioning will not engage (no for each SmartKey before it is removed
compartment. You should raise or lower
cooling) if the mode is selected from the starter switch or when the ve-
the temperature setting in small incre-
( page 190). hicle is locked using the SmartKey with
ments, preferably starting at 72F (22C).
KEYLESS-GO* ( page 102).
Warning! G If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate Increasing/decreasing
the interior before driving off.
Press button a or 8 repeatedly until
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
Keep the air intake grille in front of the the display shows the desired tempera-
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, ture.
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
and any other debris.
impairing visibility and endangering you and The automatic climate control system
others. Do not obstruct air volume by placing will correspondingly adjust the interior
objects on the air volume-through ex- air temperature.
haust slots below the rear window.
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the tempera-
ture, air volume and air distribution.
183
Controls in detail
Adjusting the temperature for center Turning on warm air Adjusting air distribution
air vents
Turn thumbwheel 4 in the direction of
Use air distribution controls c and 6
When outside temperatures are low, you the white marking.
( page 182) to separately adjust the air
can manually raise the air temperature for
Warm air will enter from the center air distribution on each side of the passenger
the center and side air vents. The
vent. compartment. The following symbols are
thumbwheel 4 is located between the
found on the controls:
center air vents ( page 180).
Turning on cooler air
Symbol Function
Automatic temperature control Turn thumbwheel 4 in the direction of
the blue marking. h Directs air through the cen-
Turn thumbwheel 4 to A. ter air vents
Cooler air will enter from the center air
The indicator lamp above the thumb- vent. d Directs air to the windows
wheel comes on. The temperature is
Directs air into the entire
automatically adjusted to the set value.
vehicle interior
c Directs air to the footwells
184
Controls in detail
Adjusting manually Windows fogged on the inside Adjust left and right air vents 1
and 6 upwards ( page 180).
Press left or right button U. Press button to switch on the air
conditioning ( page 182). Increase temperature setting.
The button emerges and the h,
, d and c symbols become The indicator lamp in the button goes Open side air vents 9 and direct them
visible. out. onto the side windows ( page 180).
Turn the marking on the regulator to Press button , to switch off the air
Windshield fogged on the outside
the desired symbol. recirculation ( page 182).
Switch the windshield wipers on
The air will be directed to the vents cor- The indicator lamp on the button goes
responding to this symbol. out. ( page 48).
Press on both U buttons until they
Make sure left and right button U
Adjusting automatically click in.
emerges.
Press left or right button U until it The h, , d and
The h, , d and c sym-
clicks in. c symbols become visible.
bols are no longer visible.
The h, , d and
Press left and right d button.
c symbols are no longer visible.
Set blower to the maximum speed.
The air distribution is adjusted auto-
matically.
185
Controls in detail
Adjusting air volume Adjusting manually Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
Use air volume control 9 ( page 182) for Reducing air volume If the left and right air distribution controls
both automatic and manual air volume ad- as well as the air volume control are set
Press switch 9 down until the desired
justment. to U and there is a high need for cool-
air volume is reached.
ing, the display AUTO MAXCOOL appears.
Adjusting automatically The display shows the current level.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
Press A on air volume switch 9 of the vehicle interior (when windows and
Increasing air volume
( page 182). sliding/pop-up roof are closed).
Press switch 9 up until the desired air
The display shows AUTO. The air vol-
volume is reached.
ume is adjusted automatically.
The display shows the current level.
186
Controls in detail
Defrosting Air recirculation mode

Warning! G
i Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle Never operate the side windows and the
These settings should only be selected sliding pop/pop-up roof if there is the possi-
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
for a short time. bility of anyone being harmed by the closing
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment. procedure.
Activating
In the event that the procedure causes po-
Press button P ( page 182). Warning! G tential danger, the closing of the side win-
The indicator lamp on the button dows can be immediately halted by pressing
comes on. When the outside temperature is below the respective window switch. The closing of
41F (5C), only switch to air recirculation the sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately
Switch off air recirculation, if selected. halted by moving the sliding/pop-up roof
mode for short periods to prevent window
Press button , ( page 182). fogging. switch in the overhead control panel in any
direction.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Activating The closing of the side windows and the slid-
ing/pop-up roof can be reversed by again
Close center air vents. Press button , ( page 182).
pressing and holding the , button.
Adjust side air vents upwards. The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
i
Press button P ( page 182). If you keep button , pressed, the
The indicator lamp on the button goes side windows and the sliding/pop-up
out. Defrosting is turned off. roof will close.
187
Controls in detail
i i Charcoal filter
The air recirculation mode is activated If you keep button , pressed, the
An activated charcoal filter markedly re-
automatically: side windows and the sliding/pop-up
duces bad odors and removes pollutants
roof will return to their previous posi-
at high outside temperatures from air entering the passenger compart-
tion.
if the concentration of carbon mon- ment.
oxide and nitrogen oxide in the out- The air recirculation mode is deactivated
side air increases beyond a Activating
automatically:
predetermined level, for example in Press button e ( page 182).
a tunnel. after five minutes if the outside temper-
ature is below approximately 41F The indicator lamp on the button
Please note that the charcoal filter (5C) comes on.
must be activated ( page 188) for the
air recirculation mode to be activated after five minutes if the air conditioning i
automatically. is turned off If you keep button e pressed, the
If you have turned off the air condition- after 30 minutes if the outside temper- side windows and the sliding/pop-up
ing ( page 190) or the outside tem- ature is above approximately 41F roof will close.
perature is below 41F (5C), the air (5C)
recirculation mode will not switch on At outside temperatures above 79F
automatically. (26C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
Deactivating outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
Press button , ( page 182).
out.
188
Controls in detail
i Rear window defroster

Warning! G If you keep button e pressed, the
The rear window defroster uses a large
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
Never operate the side windows and the amount of power. To keep battery drain to
roof will return to their previous posi-
sliding /pop-up roof if there is the possibility a minimum, switch off the defroster as
tion.
of anyone being harmed by the closing pro- soon as the rear window is clear. The de-
cedure. froster is automatically deactivated after
The system automatically switches to the approximately 6 to 17 minutes of opera-
air recirculation mode if the carbon tion depending on the outside tempera-
tential danger, the closing of the side win-
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX) ture.
dows can be immediately halted by pressing
concentration of the outside air increases
the respective window switch. The closing of
beyond a predetermined level, for example Activating
the sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately
in a tunnel.
halted by moving the sliding/pop-up roof Press button F ( page 182).
switch in the overhead control panel in any The automatic air recirculation mode does
direction. not function if is selected or if the The indicator lamp on the button
outside temperature has fallen below comes on.
The closing of the side windows and slid-
41F (5C).
ing/pop-up roof can be reversed by again Deactivating
pressing and holding the e button. The activated charcoal filter should be
switched off when windows fog up on the Press button F ( page 182) again.
inside, or if the passenger compartment The indicator lamp on the button goes
Deactivating
needs to be quickly heated or cooled out.
Press button e ( page 182). down.
out.
189
Controls in detail
Deactivating the climate control sys- Air conditioning

Warning! G tem
The air conditioning is operational while
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be the engine is running and cools the interior
removed from the rear window before driv- Deactivating
air to the temperature set by the operator.
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, It is possible to completely deactivate the
endangering you and others. automatic climate control system. i
Condensation may drip out from under-
Press button M ( page 182).
! neath the vehicle. This is normal and
The display shows 0. not an indication of a malfunction.
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp Reactivating
starts flashing, this means that too Deactivating
many electrical consumers are operat- There are several ways to reactivate the It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
ing simultaneously and there is insuffi- automatic climate control system: tioning (cooling) function of the automatic
cient voltage in the battery. The system Press one of the following buttons, climate control system. The air in the vehi-
responds automatically by deactivating M, P, U, a temperature con- cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu-
the rear window defroster. trol switch ( page 182) or air volume midified.
As soon as the battery has sufficient switch 9 on the automatic climate Press button ( page 182).
voltage, the rear window defroster au- control panel.
The indicator lamp on the button
tomatically turns itself back on.
comes on.
190
Controls in detail
Activating Residual heat and ventilation Deactivating

Moist air can fog up the windows. You can Press button T ( page 182).
With the engine switched off, it is possible
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior The indicator lamp on button T
ing.
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes goes out.
Press again ( page 182). use of the residual heat produced by the The residual heat is automatically turned
The indicator lamp on the button engine. off:
goes out.
Activating when the ignition is switched on
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch after about 30 minutes
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer. to position 1 or 0, or remove it from the if the battery voltage drops
starter switch.
! Press button T ( page 182).
i
If the button on the automatic cli- How long the system will provide heat-
mate control panel starts to flash, this The indicator lamp on button T ing depends on the coolant tempera-
indicates that the air conditioning is comes on. ture and the temperature set by the
losing refrigerant. The compressor has operator. The blower will run at speed
turned itself off. The air conditioning setting 1 regardless of the air distribu-
cannot be turned on again. tion control setting.
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
191
Controls in detail
Ventilated storage compartment Switching ventilation on Rear passenger compartment adjust-

(except S 55 AMG) Open the storage compartment in front able air vents
of the armrest, see Storage compart-
The storage compartment under the front
ment in front of armrest ( page 232). Rear center console air vents
armrest ( page 233) can be ventilated
when the automatic air conditioning is Push upper portion of switch.
switched on. The switch is located inside
the storage compartment in the front. The Switching ventilation off
air temperature is about the same as that Open the storage compartment in front
of the center air vents. of the armrest, see Storage compart-
The air volume dependent on the setting ment in front of armrest ( page 232).
of: Push lower portion of switch.
Air distribution control
!
Air volume control Do not obstruct the air vent in the stor- 1 Left center air vent, adjustable
Air vents in the dashboard age compartment. 2 Right center air vent, adjustable
The air temperature is about the same as 3 Thumbwheel for center air vents with
that of the dashboard air vents. It cannot i adjustable booster blower
be regulated separately. The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat sensitive objects in the compart-
ment, close the air vent while heating
the passenger compartment.
192
Controls in detail
To open center air vents and to adjust the Rear side air vents Rear passenger compartment climate
booster blower: control*
Turn thumbwheel 3.
The automatic climate control is operation-
i al whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in ei-
The booster blower allows air volume
ther the automatic or manual mode. The
speed to the rear passenger compart-
system cools or heats the interior depend-
ment to be increased at four different
ing on the selected interior temperature
levels.
and the current outside temperature.
The temperature at the air vents for
The automatic climate control system is
rear passenger compartment 1 4 Rear side air vent, right and left adjustable individually for the rear passen-
and 2 is the same as at the dashboard 5 Air volume control for rear side air vent ger compartment.
center air vents.
To open rear side air vents: The control panel is located in the rear cen-
Turn thumbwheel 5 towards the winter console.
dow. Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air en-
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
193
Controls in detail
i Item
When the rear seats are not occupied
Warning! G
1 Left center air vent, adjustable
(rear seat belts unbuckled) the rear cli-
2 Display Follow the recommended settings for heat-
mate control system adopts the set-
ing and cooling as given in the instructions
tings of the front climate control 3 Right center air vent, adjustable
for the front automatic climate control
system. 4 Thumbwheel for air distribution ( page 180). Otherwise the windows could
5 Temperature control, right fog up, impairing visibility for the driver and
endangering you and others.
6 Air volume (automatic, manual)
7 Temperature control, left
8 Rear climate control system
ON/OFF
Residual engine heat utilization
Rear automatic climate control panel
194
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning! G the automatic reversal function will not op-
erate.
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all the When closing the windows, make sure that When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
side windows are on the drivers door. The there is no danger of anyone being harmed SmartKey from starter switch, take the
switches for the respective windows are by the closing procedure. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
on the front passenger door and the rear The closing of the door windows can be im- lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
doors. mediately halted by releasing the switch or, attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
if the switch was pressed past the resis- unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
tance point and released, by pressing the re- cle equipment may cause an accident
spective switch. and/or serious personal injury.
If the window encounters an obstruction

that blocks its path in a circumstance where i
you pressed the switch past the resistance You can also open or close the win-
point and released it to close the window, dows using the:
the automatic reversal function will stop the SmartKey (summer opening/con-
window and open it slightly. venience feature) ( page 197)
1 Left front window If the window encounters an obstruction button , in the control panel of
2 Right front window that blocks its path in a circumstance where the automatic climate control
3 Right rear window you are closing the window by pressing and ( page 182)
4 Left rear window holding the switch, by pressing and holding
button on the SmartKey, or by press- button e in the control panel of
5 Rear window override switch
ing and holding the lock button (vehicles the automatic climate control
( page 74)
with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle, ( page 182)
195
Controls in detail
Power windows
Switch on ignition. Closing the windows Fully closing the windows

(Express-close)
Press switch 1 to 4 at the
i
symbol j to the resistance point. Press switch 1 to 4 at the
You can still operate the windows when
symbol j past the resistance point
the SmartKey is in starter switch The corresponding window will move
and release.
position 0 or has been removed: upwards until you release the switch.
The corresponding window closes com-
until the drivers or front passen-
gers door is opened Warning G pletely.
for no more than five minutes !

If you press and hold the switch up when
If the upward movement of the window
closing the window, and upward movement
Opening the windows is blocked during the closing proce-
of the window is blocked by some obstruc-
dure, the window will stop and open
Press switch 1 to 4 at the tion including but not limited to arms, hands,
slightly.
symbol k to the resistance point. fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not
operate. Remove the obstruction, press the
The corresponding window will move switch j again past the resistance
downwards until you release the point and release.
switch. Fully opening the windows
(Express-open) If the window still does not close when
Press switch 1 to 4 at the there is no obstruction, then hold the
symbol k past the resistance point switch j down. The side window
and release. will then close without the obstruction
sensor function.
The corresponding window opens com-
pletely.
196
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows with Opening (Summer opening feature)
Warning! G the SmartKey If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
Driver's door only: The sliding/pop-up roof ( page 199) will the vehicle before driving off by simulta-
If within five seconds you again press the also be opened or closed when you oper- neously:
ate the power windows with the SmartKey.
switch past the resistance point and re- opening the sliding/pop-up roof
lease, the automatic reversal will not func-
opening the side windows
tion. Warning! G
turning on the seat ventilation* for the
Never operate the windows or drivers seat
Stopping windows
sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility To do so, follow the instructions below:
Press respective switch again. of anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure. Press and hold button after un-
locking the vehicle.
tential danger, the procedure can be imme- The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
diately halted by releasing the remote begin to open after approximately one
control button. To reverse direction of second.
movement press for opening or Release the button to stop proce-
for closing. dure.
Aim transmitter eye at the drivers door

handle.
197
Controls in detail
Power windows
Closing (Convenience feature) Synchronizing the power windows

Press and hold button after lock-
Warning! G
The power window must be resynchro-
ing the vehicle. When closing the windows and the slid- nized each time
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof ing/pop-up roof, make sure that there is no
after the battery has been disconnect-
begin to close after approximately one danger of anyone being harmed by the clos-
ed.
second. ing procedure.
if the power windows cannot be fully
Release the button to stop proce- The windows will not automatically reopen if
blocked during convenience closing.
opened (Express-open) or closed
dure.
(Express-close).
Make sure all side windows and the slid- If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
ing/pop-up roof are properly closed before lows: Synchronizing
leaving the vehicle. Release the lock button. Switch on ignition.
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
Closing the windows with the Press the power window switches at
The side windows and the slid-
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Conve- ing/pop-up roof will open for as long as the symbol j until the side win-
nience feature) the door handle is held but the door is dows are closed.
not opened. Hold the switches for approximately
The sliding/pop-up roof ( page 199) will
also be closed when the power windows one second.
are operated with KEYLESS-GO. The power windows are synchronized.
Press and hold lock button at door
( page 55) until the side windows and
the sliding/pop-up roof are closed.
198
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening and closing the With the roof closed or tilted open, a
sliding/pop-up roof screen can be slid into the roof opening to Warning! G
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened roof open, the screen will also retract. When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, make
and closed electrically. The switch for the sure that there is no danger of anyone being
sliding/pop-up roof is on the overhead harmed by the closing procedure.
control panel. The closing procedure of the sliding/pop-up
roof can be immediately halted by releasing
the switch or, if the switch was moved past
the resistance point and released, by mov-
ing the switch in any direction.
SmartKey from starter switch, take the
1 Push up to raise roof at rear
cle equipment can cause an accident
2 Pull down to lower roof at rear
3 Push forward to slide roof closed
4 Push back to slide roof open
199
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
! Switch on ignition. i
To avoid damaging the seals, do not Selecting a sliding/pop-up roof open-
transport any objects with sharp edges Opening and closing the ing position
which can stick out of the sliding/pop-up roof
To select a sliding/pop-up roof opening
sliding/pop-up roof. To open, close, raise or lower the slid- position, press the switch to the resis-
Do not open the sliding/pop-up roof if ing/pop-up roof, move the switch to re- tance point and release it when the
there is snow or ice on the roof, as this sistance point in the required sliding/pop-up roof has reached the
could result in malfunctions. direction 1 to 4. desired position.
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened Release the switch when the roof has The sliding/pop-up roof now opens to
or closed manually should an electrical reached the desired position. the position set when the switch is
malfunction occur ( page 352). pressed past the resistance point in the
Express-opening and Express-closing open direction.
the sliding/pop-up roof
i Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof
To open, close, raise or lower the
You can also open or close the
sliding/pop-up roof using the: sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch Move the switch in any direction.
past the resistance point in the re-
SmartKey (summer opening/con- quired direction 1 to 4 and release. i
venience future) ( page 201) If the movement of the
The sliding/pop up roof opens or clos-
button , in the control panel of es completely, or opens to the last set sliding/pop-up roof is blocked during
the automatic climate control opening position. the closing procedure, the roof will
( page 182) stop and reopen slightly.
button e in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
( page 188)
200
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening and closing the Opening (Summer opening feature) Closing (Convenience feature)
sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey If the weather is warm, you can ventilate Press and hold button after lock-
The power windows ( page 195) will also the vehicle before driving off by simulta- ing the vehicle.
be opened or closed when you operate the neously:
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey.
opening the sliding/pop-up roof begin to close after approximately one
second.
opening the side windows
Warning! G Release the button to stop proce-
turning on the seat ventilation* for the
drivers seat dure.
Never operate the windows or
sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility Make sure all the side windows and the
To do so, follow the instructions below:
of anyone being harmed by the opening or sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed
closing procedure. Press and hold button after un- before leaving the vehicle.
locking the vehicle.
tential danger, the procedure can be imme- The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
diately halted by releasing the remote begin to open after approximately one
control button. To reverse direction of second.
movement, press for opening or Release the button to stop proce-
for closing. dure.
Aim transmitter eye at the drivers door

handle.
201
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Closing the sliding/pop-up roof with Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof

If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
KEYLESS-GO* (Convenience feature)
lows:
The power sliding/pop-up roof must be re-
The power window ( page 195) will also Release the lock button. synchronized each time after:
be closed when the sliding/pop-up roof is
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly. the battery has been disconnected
operated with KEYLESS-GO.
The side windows and the
Press and hold lock button at door sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long the sliding/pop-up roof has been
( page 55) until the sliding/pop-up as the door handle is held but the door closed manually
roof and the side windows are closed. is not opened.
the sliding/pop-up roof does not open
smoothly
Warning! G a malfunction
When closing the windows and the Synchronizing
sliding/pop-up roof, make sure that there is
no danger of anyone being harmed by the Switch on ignition.
closing procedure. Press and hold the switch in
The sliding/pop-up roof will not automati- direction 1 until the sliding/pop-up
cally reopen if blocked during convenience roof is fully raised at the rear.
closing. Hold the switch for approximately one
second.
The sliding/pop-up roof is synchro-
nized.
202
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are de- Cruise control
scribed on the following pages: Warning! G
Cruise control automatically maintains the
Cruise control and Distronic*, with
speed you set for your vehicle. Cruise control is a convenience system de-
which the vehicle can maintain a preset signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-
speed Use of cruise control is recommended for
eration. The driver is and must remain at all
driving at a constant speed for extended
AIRMATIC adjusts the vehicle suspen- times responsible for the vehicle speed and
periods of time. You can set or resume
sion characteristics automatically and for safe brake operation.
cruise control at any speed above 20 mph
controls the vehicle level. Only use cruise control if the traffic, road
(30 km/h).
ABC* with vehicle level control sys- and weather conditions make it advisable to
The cruise control function is operated by travel at a steady speed.
tems, with which you can change vehi-
means of the cruise control lever.
cle suspension characteristics The use of cruise control can be danger-
The cruise control lever is the uppermost ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
Parktronic*, which serves as a parking
lever found on the left-hand side of the because conditions do not allow safe
assistant
steering column ( page 20). driving at a steady speed.
For information on the BAS, ABS, and ESP The use of cruise control can be danger-
driving systems, see Driving safety sys- ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tems ( page 77). tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The Resume function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
203
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting current speed Canceling cruise control

Accelerate or decelerate to the desired There are several ways to cancel cruise
speed. control:
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise Step on the brake pedal.
control lever. or
The current speed is set.
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
Remove your foot from the accelerator position 3.
pedal.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
1 Set current or higher speed Cruise control is activated. last speed set will be stored for later
2 Set current or lower speed use.
3 Cancel cruise control i
4 Resume at last set speed On uphill or downhill grades, cruise !
control may not be able to maintain the Moving gear selector lever to
set speed. Once the grade eases, the position N while driving also cancels
set speed will be resumed. cruise control. However, the gear se-
lector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skid-
ding (e.g. on icy roads).
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
204
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed i Setting to last stored speed (Resume

Lift the cruise control lever to When you use the cruise control lever function)
position 1 and hold it up until the de- to decelerate, the transmission will au-
sired speed is reached. tomatically downshift if the engines Warning! G
braking power does not slow the vehi-
Release the cruise control lever.
cle sufficiently. The speed stored in memory should only be
The new speed is set. set again if prevailing road conditions per-
Fine adjustment in 1 mph mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
i (Canada: 1 km/h) increments differences arising from returning to preset
Depressing the accelerator pedal does speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
not deactivate cruise control. After Faster ous injury to you and others.
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1. Briefly push the cruise control lever to
speed set.
position 4.
Slower The cruise control will resume the last
Setting a lower speed
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the set speed.
Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the direction of arrow 2. Remove your foot from the accelerator
desired speed is reached. pedal.
Release the cruise control lever.

The new speed is set.
205
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic*
It is the drivers responsibility at all times to
be attentive to traffic and road conditions
Warning! G
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
and to provide the steering, braking and oth- Distronic requires familiarity with its opera-
cruise control system increases driving
er driving inputs necessary to retain control tional characteristics. We strongly recom-
convenience afforded by the cruise control
of the vehicle. mend that you review the following
during travel on expressways and other
major roads. information carefully before operating the
system.
If the Distronic distance sensor detects Warning! G
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed i
that you follow that vehicle at a preset adjustment reduction capability is intended For operation in the USA only: This de-
distance. to make cruise control more effective and vice complies with Part 15 of the
If there is no vehicle directly ahead of usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
you, Distronic will function in the same is not intended to, nor does it, replace the following two conditions:
way as cruise control ( page 203). need for extreme care. The responsibility for
the vehicle speed and the distance to the ve-
interference, and
hicle ahead, including most importantly
Warning! G brake operation to assure safe stopping dis- this device must accept any inter-
tance, always rests with the driver. ference received, including interfer-
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no sub- ence that may cause undesired
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
stitute for active driving involvement. It does operation.
ditions into account.
not react to stationary objects, nor recog-
Any unauthorized modification to this
nize or predict the curvature and lane layout
device could void the users authority
or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distron-
to operate the equipment.
ic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the
vehicles braking power.
206
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning! G Warning! G Distronic is designed and intended only to

maintain a set speed and keep a set dis-
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con- Close attention to road and traffic condi- tance from moving objects in front of it.
ditions into account. Only use Distronic if tions is imperative at all times, regardless of
the weather, road, and traffic conditions whether or not Distronic is activated.
make it advisable to travel at a steady Warning! G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on wind-
speed. ing roads or in heavy traffic because condi- The Resume function should only be oper-
tions do not allow safe driving at a steady ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
speed. ously set speed and wishes to resume this
Warning! G Distronic will not react to stationary objects particular preset speed.
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip-
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Switch off Distronic:
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic when changing from the left to the right
during conditions of fog and heavy rain, lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
snow or sleet. in the left lane
when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
207
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid

dial a collision.
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the follow-
ing warning note.
The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the red Distronic warning
lamp l goes out when the neces-
Segments sary distance to the vehicle ahead is
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly again established.
Set speed ahead, the segments from the speed of the
If Distronic is activated, one or two seg- vehicle ahead to the set speed come on.
ments come on around the set speed. If Distronic calculates that there is a dan-
ger of collision ( page 214):
i
The vehicle speed displayed on the The red Distronic warning lamp l in
speedometer can briefly vary from the the instrument cluster comes on.
speed setting on the Distronic system. An intermittent warning sounds.
208
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic menu in the control system

Warning! G Warning! G In the Distronic menu you see the current
An intermittent warning sounds and the Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi- settings for Distronic. What appears in the
Distronic warning lamp l in the instru- mum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corre- display depends on whether Distronic and
ment cluster is illuminated if the Distronic sponds to about 20% of the maximum the distance warning function are turned
system calculates that the distance to the deceleration ability of your vehicle. on or off.
vehicle ahead and your vehicles current Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to Press button or repeatedly
speed indicate that Distronic will not be ca- restore the preset distance or to maintain until you see one of the following dis-
pable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to the speed. The brake pedal is automatically plays.
maintain the preset following distance, applied as this happens which results in the
which creates a danger of a collision. brake pedal moving.
Immediately brake your vehicle to increase Keep drivers foot area clear at all times, in-
the distance between your vehicle and the cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob-
vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is jects stored in this area may impair pedal
intended as a final caution that you have not movement which could interfere with the
interceded with your own braking inputs to braking ability of the Distronic system.
avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do
not wait for the operation of the warning sig- Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
nal to intercede with your own braking, as your foot could become caught.
that will result in potentially dangerous
emergency braking which will not always re-
sult in an impact being avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
209
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic deactivated Distronic activated Cruise control lever

If Distronic is deactivated, the standard When you turn Distronic on, you will see The Distronic system is operated by means
display of Distronic appears in the multi- the set speed in the multifunction display of the cruise control lever.
function display. for about five seconds. You then see the
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
following display in the multifunction dis-
lever found on the left-hand side of the
play.
steering column.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected

2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle 1 Distronic activated
ahead
4 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
5 Your vehicle 1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Deactivate Distronic
4 Resume at last set speed
210
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Distronic Setting the current speed Setting a higher speed

You can activate Distronic if: Accelerate or decelerate to the desired Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
speed. direction of arrow 1 ( page 210) to
you are driving between 25 mph
increase vehicle speed in increments
(40 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h) Briefly lift or depress the cruise control
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
lever.
the ESP is activated ( page 79)
Distronic is activated and the current
If Distronic has not been activated after
speed is set. The stored speed is displayed in the multi-
pressing the cruise control lever you will
function display for approximately five sec-
see the message --- in the multifunction Remove your foot from the accelerator
onds ( page 210), and one or two
display. pedal.
segments around the stored speed come
In the following cases you cannot activate i on on the speedometer ( page 208).
Distronic:
If you do not take your foot off of the i
up to two minutes after starting the en- accelerator completely, the following
gine Depressing the accelerator pedal does
message will appear in the multifunc-
not deactivate Distronic. After brief ac-
when you brake tion display:
celeration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
DISTRONIC OVERRIDE.
if you have set the parking brake control will resume the last speed set.
Distronic will not work to maintain the
if the gear selector lever is in distance to a slower moving vehicles in
position P, R, or N front of you. Your vehicle speed will
then be determined only by the accel-
if the ESP is switched off
erator pedal position.
211
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a lower speed Fine adjustment in 1 mph Setting to last stored speed (Resume
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments function)
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2 ( page 210) to
decrease vehicle speed in increments
Faster
Warning! G
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 ( page 210). The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions per-
The stored speed is displayed in the multi- mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
function display for approximately five sec- differences arising from returning to preset
onds ( page 210), and one or two speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
segments around the stored speed come ous injury you and others.
on on the speedometer ( page 208).
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
i
direction of arrow 4 ( page 210).
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will au- Distronic is set to the last stored
tomatically downshift if the rate of de- speed.
celeration is too low. Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
212
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Deactivating Distronic Distronic deactivates automatically when: Setting the following distance in
Distronic
There are several ways to deactivate the you set the parking brake
Distronic system: You can set the specified following dis-
you drive slower than
tance for Distronic by varying the time set-
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the 25 mph (40 km/h)
ting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
direction of arrow 3 ( page 210).
the ESP is active ( page 79) or you de- this time setting and the current speed of
or activate the ESP your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
Step on the brake pedal. you move the gear selector lever into the required following distance to the vehi-
position N cle ahead. The set distance will be shown
Distronic will be deactivated. The last in the multifunction display field.
speed set will be stored into memory. A signal will sound. The DISTRONIC OFF
message appears in the multifunction The thumbwheel for making the time set-
i display for approximately five seconds. ting is located on the lower section of the
The following message will appear in center console.
the multifunction display for approxi-
Warning! G
mately five seconds: DISTRONIC OFF. Warning! G
The last stored speed is deleted when Distronic switches off and releases the
you turn off the engine. brakes when the vehicle decelerates below It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
the minimum speed of approximately select the appropriate setting given road
25 mph (40 km/h) by operation of the sys- conditions, traffic, drivers preferred driving
tem. At that time the driver must apply the style and applicable laws and driving recom-
brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed fur- mendations for safe following distance.
ther or bring it to a stop.
213
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Increasing distance Distance warning function

Increasing the distance setting causes Dis- When Distronic is deactivated, this func-
tronic to maintain a greater following dis- tion will continue to warn you when recog-
tance to the vehicle ahead. nizing a stationary obstacle or a slower
vehicle moving in the vehicles path and
Turn thumbwheel 2 towards .
the danger of a collision exists:
Decreasing distance The distance warning lamp l in the
Decreasing the distance setting causes instrument cluster comes on.
Distronic to maintain a shorter following An intermittent warning sounds.
1 Distance warning function on/off distance to the vehicle ahead.
switch If these warnings are issued, you must
2 Thumbwheel for setting distance Turn thumbwheel 2 towards . brake manually to maintain a safe distance
and avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.
When pressing the brake pedal, the warn-
ing sound stops. The warning sound also
stops when the distance to the vehicle
ahead is sufficient again without applying
the brake pedal. In this case the distance
warning lamp l also extinguishes.
214
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Driving with Distronic

Warning! G Press switch 1. This section describes a number of driving
If the Distronic warning lamp l in the in- situations where special precaution is re-
The indicator lamp on the switch
strument cluster comes on while driving quired on the part of the driver. Be pre-
comes on. A loudspeaker symbol ap-
and/or an intermittent warning sounds, im- pared to brake in such situations which will
pears in the multifunction display
deactivate the Distronic system.
mediate attention on the part of the driver is ( page 210).
required.
As required by the traffic situation, apply the Deactivating Warning! G
brakes and navigate around a possible ob- Press switch 1.
stacle. However, do not drive by relying on Distronic works to maintain the speed se-
The indicator lamp on the switch goes lected by the driver unless a moving obsta-
the distance warning function, as this will re-
out. cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
sult in an emergency braking application.
Especially depending on road surface condi- same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol-
tions and driver reaction, this will not always lowing another vehicle ahead of you at a dis-
enable you to avoid a collision. tance set by Distronic). This means that:
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you change lanes.
i
While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
Complex driving situations are not al-
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
ways fully recognized by Distronic. This lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
could result in wrong or missing dis- of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
tance warnings. to the previously selected speed.
215
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning Turns and bends

Distronic regulates only the distance be-
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
of it, but does not register stationary objects
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Dis-
in the road, e.g.:
tronic will switch off, and the message
a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPER.
a disabled vehicle MANUAL appears in the multifunction dis-
an oncoming vehicle play.
The driver must always be on the alert, ob- For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-
serve all traffic and intercede as required by sor, see Cleaning the Distronic* system
steering or braking the vehicle. sensor cover ( page 299).
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
i a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
Warning! G If the message CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE
to brake late or unexpectedly.
SEE OPER. MANUAL disappears during
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy driving and the last speed stored flash-
road conditions. es for approximately five seconds, the
dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic
is again operational.
216
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Offset driving Lane changing Narrow vehicles
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle Because of their narrow profile, the vehi-
from your direct line of travel may not be changing lanes. There will be insufficient cles traveling near the outer edge of the
detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi- distance to the lane-changing vehicle. lane have not yet been detected by Dis-
cient distance to the vehicle ahead. tronic. There will be insufficient distance to
the vehicles ahead.
217
Controls in detail
Driving systems
AIRMATIC Suspension tuning

The suspension tuning is set according to:
AIRMATIC automatically selects the opti-
mum suspension tuning and ride height for Your driving style
your vehicle. AIRMATIC consists of two Road surface conditions
components:
Your choice of suspension style,
Adaptive Damping System (ADS) sport or convenience, which you
Level control system select using the damping switch.
The ADS automatically selects the opti- The following suspension styles are avail-
mum damping for the respective driving able: 1 Indicator lamps
conditions. At the same time the suspen- Convenience 2 Damping switch
sion is set to either sporty or regular. Start the engine.
Both indicator lamps 1 are off.
Press the damping switch 2 until the
Sports 1
desired suspension style is set.
One indicator lamp 1 is on.
Sports 2
i
The selected suspension style is stored
Both indicator lamps 1 are on. in memory, even after the SmartKey is
removed from the starter switch.
218
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicle level control with AIRMATIC The following vehicle level settings can be The switch with the indicator lamps is lo-
selected when the vehicle is stationary: cated in the upper part of the center con-
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
sole.
height to:
Level
reduce fuel consumption
Normal For driving on normal roads.
increase vehicle safety The indicator lamp is off.
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or Raised For driving on rough roads or
lowered according to the selected level with snow chains.The indica-
setting and to the vehicle speed: tor lamp is on.
With increasing speed, ride height is re-
duced by up to approximately 3/4 in Select the "Raised" level setting only when
(20 mm). required by current driving conditions.
Otherwise: 1 Indicator lamp
With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the selected vehicle Fuel consumption may increase 2 Vehicle level control switch
level. Handling may be impaired Briefly press switch 2 to change from
one level setting to the other.
i
These height adjustments are so small Warning! G The message:
that you may not notice any change. AIRMATIC
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
VEHICLE RISING
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when low- appears in the multifunction display
ering the vehicle chassis. when changing from normal level to
raised level.
219
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The indicator lamp is then lit. The dis- Active Body Control (ABC)* The ABC switch with the indicator lamps is
play switches off when the vehicle is located in the upper part of the center con-
raised. The ABC system automatically selects the sole.
optimum suspension tuning and ride
Press switch 2 again to lower the ve-
height for your vehicle.
hicle. The indicator lamp is off.
The selected vehicle level setting remains Suspension tuning
stored in memory even if the engine is
The suspension tuning is set according to:
turned off and restarted except when you
Your driving style
exceed a speed of 75 mph (120 km/h)
Road surface conditions
or
The vehicle loading
maintain a speed of between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for Your choice of suspension style, 1 Indicator lamp
more than 5 minutes sporty or regular, which you select 2 ABC switch
using the ABC button
The vehicle then lowers to regular level. Start the engine.
The selected suspension style is stored
The message:
in memory, even after the SmartKey is
AIRMATIC removed from the starter switch.
LEV. SELECT. CANCELED!
appears in the multifunction display and
the indicator lamp is off. The display
switches off when the vehicle is raised.
220
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Suspension for sporty driving style Vehicle level control with ABC* i
The setting for sporty driving is selected Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride These height adjustments are so small
when indicator lamp 1 is illuminated. height to: that you may not notice any change.
Press switch 2. reduce fuel consumption
Select the level 1 and 2 settings only when
Indicator lamp 1 comes on. increase vehicle safety required by current driving conditions.
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or Otherwise:
Suspension for regular driving style
lowered according to the selected level Fuel consumption may increase
The setting for regular driving is selected setting and to the vehicle speed:
when indicator lamp 1 is off. Handling may be impaired
With increasing speed, ride height is re-
Press switch 2. duced by up to approximately 1.4 in
(35 mm). Warning! G
Indicator lamp 1 goes out.
With decreasing speed, the ride height To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
is again raised to the selected vehicle and feet away from wheel housing area, and
level. stay away from under the vehicle when low-
ering the vehicle chassis.
221
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can be

selected when the vehicle is stationary:
Vehicle level when Use for Ride height increase Automatic lowering Indicator lamps
stationary over normal
Normal Normal operation None Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm) Both lamps off
1
Raised level1 Driving with snow chains Max. 0.4 in (10 mm) Max. approx. 1.0 in (25 mm) One lamp lit
( page 293)
Raised level 2 Very rough road surface Max. 0.8 in (20 mm)1 Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm) Both lamps lit
conditions
1
Dependent on load
The switch with the indicator lamps is lo- Briefly press switch 2 to change from
cated in the upper part of the center con- one level setting to the next. When ve-
sole. hicle is at level 2, pressing the switch
will return the vehicle to normal level.
The message:
ACTIVE BODY CONTROL
VEHICLE RISING!
appears in the multifunction display.
The display switches off when the vehi-
1 Indicator lamps cle is raised.
2 Vehicle level control switch
222
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i Raised level 1 (see table) Raised level 2 (see table)

Pressing the switch twice in quick suc- Speed-dependent lowering of vehicle Speed-dependent lowering of vehicle
cession will cause the vehicle to imme- chassis (approximate values): chassis (approximate values):
diately raise or lower according to the
Between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 38 mph Between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 18 mph
starting level.
(60 km/h) - raised by approximately (30 km/h) - raised by approximately
The selected vehicle level setting re- 0.4 in (10 mm) 0.8 in (20 mm)
mains stored in memory even if the en-
Between 38 mph (60 km/h) and Between 18 mph (30 km/h) and
gine is turned off and restarted.
118 mph (190 km/h) - lowered 38 mph (60 km/h) lowered progres-
progressively by approximately 1.0 in sively by approximately 0.4 in (10 mm)
Normal level (see table) (25 mm)
Between 38 mph (60 km/h) and
Speed-dependent lowering of vehicle 118 mph (190 km/h) lowered pro-
chassis (approximate values): gressively by additional approximately
Between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 40 mph 1.0 in (25 mm)
(65 km/h) none
Between 40 mph (65 km/h) and
87 mph (140 km/h) lowered
progressively by approximately 0.6 in
(15 mm).
223
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic* (Parking assist) The Parktronic system monitors the sur-

Warning! G roundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
Warning! G Make sure that no persons or animals are in rear bumper.
the area in which you are maneuvering. You
The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It could otherwise injure them.
is not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
during parking and other critical maneuvers designed to assist the driver during park-
always rests with the driver. ing maneuvers. It visually and audibly indi-
Special attention must be paid to objects cates the relative distance between the
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes vehicle and an obstacle.
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road The Parktronic system is automatically ac-
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by tivated when you switch on the ignition
the system and can damage the vehicle. and release the parking brake. The Park- 1 Sensors in the front bumper
The operational function of the Parktronic tronic system deactivates at speeds over
system can be affected by dirty sensors, es- 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds the
pecially at times of snow and ice, see Parktronic system turns on again.
Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors
( page 299).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig-
nals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be tak-
en into consideration.
224
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Range of the sensors Front sensors Minimum distance

To function properly, the sensors must be
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm) Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
scratch or damage the sensors.
Rear sensors If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the warning lamps come on and
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm) closer than the minimum distance, the ac-
tual distance might no longer be indicated
by the system.
!
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
planters or trailer hitches). The Park-
tronic system will not detect such ob-
jects at close range and damage to
your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sourc-
es (e.g. truck air brakes or jackham-
mers) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.
225
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators The position of the gear selector lever de-

termines which warning indicators will be
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
activated.
ative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle. The warning indicators for the Selector lever po- Warning indicator
front area are located above the left air sition
vents and center air vents in the dash-
D Front area activated
board ( page 21). The warning indicator
for the rear area is integrated in the rear R or N Front and rear area
trim. activated
P Neither activated
1 Right front area warning indicator
Each warning indicator is divided into six
yellow and two red segments for either
side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system
is ready when the border around the indi-
cator is illuminated.
1 Left front area warning indicator
226
Controls in detail
Driving systems
As your vehicle approaches an object, one Switching the Parktronic system Switching off the Parktronic system
or more segments will come on, depending on/off
Press switch 2.
on the distance between your vehicle and You can switch off the Parktronic system
the object. When the eighth segment Indicator lamp 1 comes on.
manually.
comes on, you have reached the minimum
distance. The Parktronic switch is located in the up- Switching on the Parktronic system
per section of the center console.
Front area: An intermittent acoustic Press switch 2 again.
warning will sound as the first red seg- Indicator lamp 1 goes out.
ment comes on and a constant acous-
tic warning, both lasting a maximum of
three seconds, will sound for the eighth
segment, i.e. the second red segment.
The signal is canceled when the gear
selector lever is placed in position P.
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red seg-
ment comes on and a constant acous- 1 Indicator lamp
tic warning, both lasting a maximum of 2 Parktronic on/off
three seconds, will sound for the eighth
segment, i.e. the second red segment.
The signal is canceled when the gear
selector lever is placed in position D
or P.
227
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic malfunction If only the red segments of the Parktronic

warning indicator come on and no warning
There is a malfunction in the Parktronic
sounds, then the sensors of the Parktronic
system if the red segments of the Park-
system are dirty or malfunctioning. Mal-
tronic warning indicator come on and a
function may also be caused by interfer-
warning sounds. The Parktronic system
ence from other radio or ultrasonic signals.
will switch itself off after 30 seconds and
The Parktronic system will switch itself off
the indicator lamp on the Parktronic switch
after 20 seconds.
comes on.
Clean Parktronic system sensors
Have the Parktronic system checked
( page 299).
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter as soon as possible. Switch on ignition.
or
Check Parktronic operation at another
location to rule out interference from
outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
228
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading
Roof rack* Preparing roof rack installation Loading instructions
Open trim at the trim strips in the roof.
The total load weight including vehicle oc-
Warning! G Secure the roof rack according to man- cupants and luggage/cargo should not ex-
ufacturers instructions for installation. ceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated
Use only roof racks approved by Mer- on the corresponding label located on the
cedes-Benz for your vehicle model to avoid ! drivers door pillar.
damage to the vehicle. Follow manufactur- Load the roof rack in such a way that
ers installation instructions. the vehicle cannot be damaged while
driving.
Make sure
you can fully raise the
sliding/pop-up roof
you can fully open the trunk
229
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo tie-down hooks

Warning! G
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
ly as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause in-
jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care Six hooks are located in the trunk.
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or car-
Carefully secure cargo by applying
go in the trunk if possible. Do not pile lug-
even load on all hooks with rope of suf-
gage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
ficient strength to hold down the cargo.
Do not place anything on the rear-window
shelf.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve-
hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
230
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Storage compartments Glove box Unlocking the glove box
Insert mechanical key ( page 348)
into the glove box lock.
Warning! G
Turn the mechanical key to
To help avoid personal injury during a colli- position 1.
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug- Opening the glove box
gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
Press glove box lid release 3.
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. The glove box lid opens downward.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy 1 Unlocked
Closing the glove box
objects. 2 Locked
3 Glove box lid release Push lid up to close.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
Locking the glove box
an accident. Insert mechanical key ( page 348)
into the glove box lock.
Turn the mechanical key to
position 2.
231
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in the glove box Storage compartment in the center Storage compartment in front of arm-
console rest
A storage compartment is located in the
cover of the glove box. It can be used to The storage compartment is located in the
store check cards, pens, a flashlight, etc. lower portion of the center console.
1 Storage compartment
Opening
1 Storage compartment in glove box 1 Storage compartment
The compartment contains a cup holder
Lightly press the marking on the lid of
Opening ( page 236).
storage compartment 1.
Slide the mark on the compartment Lightly touch cover plate 1.
The lid opens upward.
cover forward.
The cover opens automatically.
Closing Closing
Lightly press the mark on the compart-
Lightly push cover plate 1 up until it
ment cover forward. The cover closes
engages.
automatically.
232
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment below the front Opening storage compartment Opening storage tray
armrest (except S 55 AMG)
The tray contains a coin holder.
The buttons are located under the cushion Press button 1 and lift the armrest lid.
Press button 2 and lift the armrest.
of the armrest.
i !
The storage compartment can be heat- Do not store any objects under the
ed or cooled. storage tray.
The compartment can get very warm Do not let bank cards, credit cards, or
due to its confined space. When storing other cards with a magnetic strip come
heat-sensitive objects in the compart- near the storage tray, as a magnet built
ment, close the air vent ( page 192) into the tray could erase or change the
while heating the passenger compart- information on the card.
ment.
1 Button to open storage compartment

!
(except S 55 AMG)
2 Button to open storage tray Do not obstruct the air vent in the stor-
age compartment.
233
Controls in detail
Useful features
Compartment for glasses Telephone holder* Storage compartments in the rear pas-
senger compartment
The compartment for glasses is located un- The telephone holder is located under the
der the armrest in the center console. armrest in the center console.
Armrest with integrated storage com-
partment
1 Compartment for glasses 1 Telephone holder

1 Rear armrest
Opening compartment for glasses Opening telephone holder
2 Lid handle
Fold the right side of the armrest up- Fold the right side of the armrest up-
Opening the storage compartment:
wards. wards.
Pull down the armrest by its strap.
Press handle 2 and lift lid.
!
Before storing the armrest in the back-
rest, close the storage compartment
lid.
234
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment between rear Storage compartment in rear shelf* Storage compartments under the front
seats* seats
1 Rear shelf compartment

1 Cover 1 Lid
Opening 2 Buttons
Opening
Lift the lid using the handle in the front.
Opening
Slide cover 1 rearward.
Press buttons 2 together and fold
Closing lid 1 down.
Slide cover 1 forward.
Closing
Close lid 1 until both buttons 2 of
lock engage.
235
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in front of seat armrest Folding out cup holder Folding in cup holder
The cup holder is located in the storage
Warning! G compartment in front of the armrest.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed

while traveling. Place only containers that fit
into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids
on open containers and do not fill containers
to a height where the contents, especially
hot liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.
1 Cup holder
! Swing cup holder 1 back and press it

1 Button for folding out the cup holder into the storage compartment until it
Only place containers with a maximum
engages.
diameter of 2 in (72 mm) in the cup Open the storage compartment in front
holder. Larger containers could dam- of armrest ( page 232).
age the holder arm. Push button 1.
The cup holder opens automatically.
236
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in rear seat armrest Parcel net in front passenger footwell
A small convenience parcel net is located
Warning! G in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
When not in use, keep the cup holder mail, etc.
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
Warning! G
a height where the contents, especially hot
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or ob-
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
1 Compartment for cup holder jects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
vers.
In an accident, during hard braking, or sud-
Opening cup holder den maneuvers they could be thrown
Push front of sliding compartment 1. around inside the vehicle and cause injury to
vehicle occupants.
The cup holder slides out.
Closing cup holder

Push sliding compartment 1 back un-
til it engages.
237
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel net in trunk Ashtrays Removing ashtray insert

You can hang a parcel net in the trunk. The
hooks and the parcel net in the trunk can Center console ashtray Warning! G
hold a load of up to 29.8 lbs (13.5 kg).
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to se-
cure vehicle from movement. Move gear se-
lector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N turn off the engine.
Secure vehicle from movement by set-

ting the parking brake. Move the gear
selector lever to position N.
1 Cover plate
Now you have more room to take out
1 Hook 2 Button for disengaging ashtray
the insert.
Hang the parcel net on hooks 1 on the
Opening ashtray Push sliding button 2 to the right.
left and right sides of the trunk.
Briefly touch cover plate 1. The ashtray is disengaged and slides
! out a short way.
The parcel net cannot protect or suffi- The ashtray opens automatically.
Remove insert from ashtray frame.
ciently secure goods in the event of an
accident.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
Install insert by pushing it back into the
frame until it engages.
238
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear door ashtray Cigarette lighters

Warning! G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Opening ashtray 1 Center console cigarette lighter
Lightly touch the back of the ashtray. Make sure the ignition is switched on. and/or serious personal injury.
Removing ashtray insert should come on. i
Pull the ashtray back slightly and re- The lighter socket can be used to ac-
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
move the insert (see arrows). commodate electrical accessories up
The lighter will pop out automatically
to a maximum 85 W.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert when hot.
Position the insert and press down
while sliding forward.
239
Controls in detail
Useful features
Heated steering wheel*

Warning! G
The steering wheel heating warms up the
Never touch the heating element or sides of leather area of the steering wheel.
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
The stalk with the heated steering wheel
knob only.
swith is on the lower left-hand side of the
To avoid possible injury to children sitting in steering wheel.
the rear seat, deactivate the operation of
the rear door windows, see ( page 74). De-
activation of the rear windows also deacti-
1 Rear door lighters vates the lighters.
Make sure the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
should come on.
Lightly touch the back of the ashtray to attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
open it ( page 239). unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
Push in cigarette lighter 1. cle equipment may cause an accident 1 Switching on
and/or serious personal injury. 2 Indicator lamp
The lighter will pop out automatically 3 Switching off
when hot.
i
Operation of the rear door lighters is
only possible, if the override switch
( page 74) is deactivated.
240
Controls in detail
Useful features
Switching on Telephone*
Switch on ignition.
Warning! G
All the lamps in the instrument cluster Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary re-
should come on. sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A drivers
Never operate radio transmitters equipped attention to the road must always be
Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the di-
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- his/her primary focus when driving. For
rection of arrow 1.
out being connected to an external antenna) your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator from inside the vehicle while the engine is ommend that you pull over to a safe location
lamp 2 comes on. running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- and stop before placing or taking a tele-
tion of the vehicles electronic system, pos- phone call.
Switching off sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious If you choose to use the telephone1 while
Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc- personal injury. driving, please use the hands-free device
tion of arrow 3. and only use the telephone when road,
The steering wheel heating is turned Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
off. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. phone or a citizens band unit, should only jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
be used inside the vehicle if they are con- cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
i nected to an antenna that is installed on Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
The steering wheel heating does not the outside of the vehicle. agement and Data System)1 if road, weather
turn off automatically. The external antenna must be approved by and traffic conditions permit.
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho- 1
Observe all legal requirements.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
241
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid The Tele Aid system

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is (Telematic Alarm Identification on De-
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- ! mand)
ly 14 m) every second. The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys-
The Tele Aid system consists of three
tem may only be performed by com-
types of response:
You can take and place telephone calls us- pleting the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the automatic and manual emergency
ing the s and t buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other tele- SOS button. Failure to complete either roadside assistance, and
phone functions, use the control system of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated. If the system is information
( page 134).
not activated, the indicator lamp in the The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
See separate operating manual for instruc- SOS button stays on after turning the ing that the vehicles battery is charged,
tions on how to use the telephone. SmartKey in starter switch to properly connected, not damaged and cel-
position 2, or pressing the lular and GPS coverage is available.
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
to position 2 . The message TELE AID
be adjusted when using the volume control
NOT ACTIVATED will be shown in the
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
multifunction display for approximately
raise, press button and to lower,
ten seconds.
press button .
If you have any questions regarding ac-
To activate, press the SOS button, the
tivation, please call the Response Cen-
Roadside Assistance button or
ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
the Information button , depend-
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
ing on the type of response required.
242
Controls in detail
Useful features
i System self-check
The SOS button is located above the in- Initially, after turning the ignition on, mal-
Warning! G
terior rear view mirror. functions are detected and indicated (the If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
The Roadside Assistance button indicator lamps in the SOS button, the the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
and the Information button are Roadside Assistance button and the the Information button do not come on dur-
located below the center armrest cov- Information button stay on longer ing the system self-check, or if any of these
er. than ten seconds or do not come on). The indicators remain illuminated continuously
message TELE AID DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! in red and/or the message TELE AID
appears for approximately ten seconds in DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! is displayed in the
Shortly after the completion of your Tele
the multifunction display. multifunction display after the system
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a
user ID and password via first call mail. By self-check, a malfunction in the system has
i
visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting been detected.
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
Tele Aid (USA only), you will have access If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
network for communication and the
to account information, remote door un- above, the system may not operate as ex-
GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
lock, and more. pected. Have the system checked at the
lites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the Tele nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
i possible.
Aid system may not function and if this
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
occurs, assistance must be summoned
network for communication and the
by other means.
GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
lites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.
243
Controls in detail
Useful features
Emergency calls Once the emergency call is in progress, the The Tele Aid system is available if
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
An emergency call is initiated automatical- it has been activated and is operation-
to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL
ly: al. Activation requires a subscription
CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunc-
for monitoring services, connection,
following an accident in which the tion display. When the connection is estab- and cellular air time
emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) lished, the message EMERGENCY CALL
or airbags deploy CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc- the relevant cellular phone network
tion display. All information relevant to the and GPS signals are available and pass
if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
emergency, such as the location of the ve- the information on to the Response
alarm stays on for more than
hicle (determined by the GPS satellite loca- Center
20 seconds, see Anti-theft alarm sys-
tem ( page 83) and tow-away alarm tion system), vehicle model, identification
number and color are generated. i
( page 85)
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
An emergency call can also be initiated A voice connection between the Response possible if the vehicle is able to receive
manually by opening the cover next to the Center and the occupants of the vehicle signals from the GPS satellite network
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then will be established automatically soon af- and pass the information on to the Re-
briefly pressing the button located under ter the emergency call has been initiated. sponse Center.
the cover. When a voice connection is established,
the audio system mutes and the message
For more information, see Initiating an TELE AID EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE ap-
emergency call manually ( page 245). pears in the multifunction display. The Re-
sponse Center will attempt to determine
more precisely the nature of the accident
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.
244
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually Wait for a voice connection to the

Warning! G Response Center.
Close cover 2 after the emergency
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is il-
luminated continuously and there was no call is concluded.
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could Warning! G
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
vant cellular phone network is not available). If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
The message EMERGENCY CALL vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve-
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction hicle in a dangerous road location), please
display for approximately ten seconds. 1 SOS button do not wait for voice contact after you have
Should this occur, assistance must be sum- 2 Cover pressed the emergency button. Carefully
moned by other means. leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
Briefly press on the cover 2. tion. The Response Center will automatically
The cover will open. contact local emergency officials with the
vehicles approximate location if they re-
Press SOS button 1 briefly. ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
The indicator lamp in SOS button 1 make voice contact with the vehicle occu-
will flash until the emergency call is pants.
concluded.
245
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button A voice connection between the Roadside These programs are only available in the
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants USA:
The Roadside Assistance button is
of the vehicle will be established. When a
located below the center armrest cover. Sign and Drive services: Services such
voice connection is established, the audio
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
Press and hold the button (for system mutes and the message TELE AID
the replacement of a flat tire with the
longer than two seconds). ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE ap-
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As- pears in the multifunction display.
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This func-
sistance dispatcher will be initiated. Describe the nature of the need for as-
The button will flash while the call is in tion permits the Mercedes-Benz Road-
sistance.
progress. The message ROADSIDE AS- side Assistance dispatcher to
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance download malfunction codes and actu-
SISTANCE CONNECTING CALL will ap-
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified al vehicle data.
pear in the multifunction display.
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
When the connection is established, the tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized i
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such The indicator lamp in the Roadside As-
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc- as labor and/or towing, charges may ap- sistance button remains illumi-
tion display. The Tele Aid system will trans- ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Man- nated in red for approximately
mit data generating the vehicle ual for more information. ten seconds during the system
identification number, model, color and lo- self-check after turning the ignition on
cation (subject to availability of cellular (together with the SOS button and the
and GPS signals). Information button ).
246
Controls in detail
Useful features
See system self-check ( page 243) Information button A voice connection between the Customer
when the indicator lamp does not come Assistance Center representative and the
The Information button is located be-
on in red or stays on longer than ap- occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
low the center armrest cover.
proximately ten seconds. lished. When a voice connection is estab-
Press and hold the button (for lished, the audio system mutes and the
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside longer than two seconds). message TELE AID INFO CALL ACTIVE
Assistance button is continuous-
A call to the Customer Assistance Cen- appears in the multifunction display.
ly illuminated and no voice connection
to the Response Center was estab- ter will be initiated. The button will Information regarding the operation of
lished, the Tele Aid system could not flash while the call is in progress. The your vehicle, the nearest authorized
initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. message INFO CONNECTING CALL will Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
the relevant cellular phone network is appear in the multifunction display. USA products and services is available to
not available). The message ROADSIDE When the connection is established, the you.
ASSISTANCE CALL FAILED appears in message INFO CALL CONNECTED appears For more details concerning the Tele Aid
the multifunction display. in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
Roadside Assistance calls can be ter- system will transmit data generating the use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
minated using the tbutton on the vehicle identification number, model, color arately) to learn more (USA only).
multifunction steering wheel. and location (subject to availability of cel-
lular and GPS signals).
247
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Information calls can be terminated us- Upgrade Signals

The indicator lamp on the Information ing the tbutton on the multifunc- The Tele Aid system processes calls using
button remains illuminated in red tion steering wheel. the following priority:
for approximately ten seconds during
Automatic emergency First priority
the system self-check after turning the !
ignition on (together with the SOS but- If the indicator lamps do not start flash- Manual emergency Second priority
ton and the Roadside Assistance ing after pressing one of the buttons or Roadside Assistance Third priority
button ). remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
Information Fourth priority
See System self-check ( page 243) the Tele Aid system has detected a
when the indicator lamp does not come fault or the service is not currently ac- Should a higher priority call be initiated
on in red or stays on longer than ap- tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit an while you are connected, an upgrade (al-
proximately ten seconds. Mercedes-Benz Center and have the ternating) tone will be heard, and the ap-
system checked or contact the Re- propriate indicator lamp will flash. If
If the indicator lamp in the Information sponse Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in certain information such as vehicle identi-
button is illuminated continuous- the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Cana- fication number or customer information is
ly and no voice connection to the Re- da) as soon as possible. not available, the operator may need to re-
sponse Center was established, then transmit.
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant During this time you will hear a beep and
cellular phone network is not avail- voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
able). The message INFO contact will resume once the retransmis-
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunc- sion is completed. Once a call is conclud-
tion display. ed, a beep will be heard and the respective
indicator lamp will stop flashing. The
COMAND system operation will resume.
248
Controls in detail
Useful features
! i Remote door unlock

If the indicator lamp continues to flash When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
or the system does not reset, contact the COMAND system audio is muted tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
the Response Center at and the selected mode (radio, tape or and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or CD) pauses. The optional cellular
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or phone (if installed) switches off. If you
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance must use this phone, the vehicle must
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Cus- and place the call. The COMAND navi- You will be asked to provide your pass-
tomer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in gation system (if engaged) will contin- word which you provided when you
Canada. ue to run. The display in the instrument completed the subscriber agreement.
cluster is available for use, and spoken Then return to your vehicle and press
i commands are only available by press- the trunk lid button for a minimum of
ing the RPT button on the COMAND 20 seconds until the SOS button is
The indicator lamp in the respective
unit. A pop-up window will appear in flashing.
button flashes until the call is conclud-
the COMAND display to indicate that a
ed. Calls can only be terminated by a The message EMERGENCY CALL
Tele Aid call is in progress.
Response Center or Customer Assis- CALL CONNECTED appears in the multi-
tance Center representative except function display.
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
pressing button ton the multifunc- cle via Internet using the ID and password
tion steering wheel. sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
249
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Response Center will then unlock your Stolen vehicle tracking services Garage door opener
vehicle with the remote door unlocking In the event your vehicle was stolen:
feature. The built-in remote control is capable of
Report the incident to the police. operating up to three separately controlled
i The police will issue a numbered inci- devices, for example garage door openers,
The remote door unlock feature is avail- dent report. gate openers, or other devices compatible
able if the relevant cellular phone net- with HomeLink or some other systems.
work is available. Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along You can program the signal transmitter
The SOS button will flash and the mes- with your password issued to you when buttons.
sage EMERGENCY CALL you subscribed to the service.
CALL CONNECTED will appear in the mul-
tifunction display to indicate receipt of The Response Center will then attempt
the door unlock command. to covertly contact the vehicles
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is lo-
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Re- cated, the Response Center will con-
sponse Center specialist will attempt tact the local law enforcement and you.
to establish voice contact with the ve- The vehicles location will only be pro-
hicle occupants. vided to law enforcement.
If the trunk lid button was pressed for
more than 20 seconds before door un-
lock authorization was received by the
Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pressing the trunk
lid button again.
250
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
Warning! G Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
Before programming the integrated remote
opener. If you should experience diffi-
control to a garage door opener or gate op-
culties with programming the transmit-
erator, make sure that people and objects
ter, contact an authorized
are out of the way of the device to prevent
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
potential harm or damage.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
When programming a garage door opener, Center (in the USA only) at
the door moves up or down. When program- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Remote control integrated into the interior ming a gate operator, the gate opens or
rear view mirror Service (in Canada) at
closes. 1-800-387-0100.
1 Indicator lamp
Do not use the integrated remote control
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button with any garage door opener that lacks safe-
5 Hand-held transmitter button ty stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
6 Hand-held remote control trans- any garage door opener model manufac-
mitter (not part of the vehicle tured before April 1, 1982). A garage door
equipment) that cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards.
251
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Programming or reprogramming the in- Step 3:

For operation in the USA only: tegrated remote control
Hold the end of the hand-held remote
This device complies with Part 15 of Step 1: control transmitter 6 of the device
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to you wish to train approximately 2 to
Switch on ignition.
the following two conditions: 5 in (5 cm to 12 cm) away from the sur-
Step 2: face of the integrated remote control
interference, and If you have previously programmed an located on the interior rear view mirror,
integrated signal transmitter button keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view.
this device must accept any inter-
and wish to retain its programming, Step 4:
ference received, including interfer-
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press
ence that may cause undesired Using both hands, simultaneously
and hold the two outer signal transmit-
operation. press the hand-held transmitter
ter buttons 2 and 4 and release
Any unauthorized modification to this them only when the indicator lamp be- button 5 and the desired integrated
device could void the users authority gins to flash after approximately signal transmitter button (2, 3
to operate the equipment. 20 seconds (do not hold the button for or 4). Do not release the buttons until
longer than 30 seconds). This proce- completing step 5.
dure erases any previous settings for The indicator lamp 1 on the integrat-
all three channels and initializes the ed remote control will flash, first slowly
memory. If you later wish to program a and then rapidly.
second and/or third hand-held trans-
mitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.
252
Controls in detail
Useful features
i i Step 8:
The indicator lamp 1 flashes the first If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly Locate training button on the garage
time the signal transmitter button is for about two seconds and then turns door opener motor head unit.
programmed. If this button has already to a constant light, continue with pro-
Exact location and color of the button
been programmed, the indicator lamp gramming steps 8 through 12 as your
may vary by garage door opener brand.
will only start flashing after 20 sec- garage door opener may be equipped
Depending on manufacturer, the train-
onds. with the rolling code feature.
ing button may also be referred to as
learn or smart button. If there is dif-
Step 5: Step 7: ficulty locating the transmitting button,
When the indicator lamp 1 flashes To program the remaining two buttons, refer to the garage door opener opera-
rapidly, release both buttons. repeat the steps above starting with tors manual.
step 3. Step 9:
Step 6:
Press and hold the just-trained inte- Rolling code programming Press training button on the garage
grated signal transmitter button and door opener motor head unit.
To train a garage door opener (or other roll-
observe the indicator lamp 1. The training light is activated.
ing code devices) with the rolling code fea-
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on con- ture, follow these instructions after You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-
stantly, programming is complete and completing the Programming portion ing step.
your device should activate when the (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
integrated signal transmitter button is Step 10:
person may make the following training
pressed and released. procedures quicker and easier.) Firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (2, 3
or 4).
253
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 11: Gate operator/Canadian programming Step 4:

Press, hold for two seconds and re- Canadian radio-frequency laws require Continue to press and hold the inte-
lease same button a second time to transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) grated signal transmitter button (2,
complete the training process. after several seconds of transmission 3 or 4) while you press and re-press
which may not be long enough for the inte- (cycle) your hand-held remote con-
Some garage door openers (or other rolling
grated signal transmitter to pick up the sig- trol transmitter 6 every two seconds
code equipped devices) may require you to
nal during programming. Similar to this until the frequency signal has been
perform this procedure a third time to
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators learned. Upon successful training, the
complete the training.
are designed to time-out in the same indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and
Step 12: manner. then rapidly after several seconds.
Confirm the garage door operation by If you live in Canada or if you are having dif- Proceed with programming step 5 and
pressing the programmed integrated ficulties programming a gate operator (re- step 6 to complete.
signal transmitter button (2, 3 gardless of where you live) by using the
or 4). programming procedures, replace step 4
Step 13: with the following:
To program the remaining two buttons,

repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
254
Controls in detail
Useful features
Operation of integrated remote control Erasing the integrated remote control Reprogramming a single integrated sig-
memory nal transmitter button
Switch on ignition.
Switch on ignition. To program a device using a signal trans-
Select and press the appropriate inte-
mitter button previously trained, follow
grated signal transmitter button (2, Simultaneously hold down the signal
these steps:
3 or 4) to activate the remote con- transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for ap-
trolled device. proximately 20 seconds, until the indi- Press and hold the desired signal trans-
The integrated remote control trans- cator lamp flashes rapidly 1. Do not mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not re-
mitter continues to send the signal as hold for longer than 30 seconds. lease the button.
long as the button is pressed up to The codes of all three channels are The indicator lamp will begin to flash af-
20 seconds. erased. ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
integrated signal transmitter button,
i proceed with programming starting
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes with step 3.
of all three channels.
255
Controls in detail
Useful features
Infrared reflecting windshield Your vehicle is equipped with infrared re-

flecting glass which reduces the amount of
radiated heat entering the interior through
the windows.
The infrared reflecting glass also prevents
the transmission of signals through the
glass by in-vehicle electronic devices (e.g.
electronic toll collection devices).
To allow the use of these devices in the ve-
hicle, two infrared transparent areas
(1 and 2) are placed in the windshield.
1 Mounting location for electronic toll
collection devices (infrared transpar-
ent)
2 Infrared transparent area
(pass-through for electronic signals)
3 31.5 in (80 cm)
4 19.0 in (48 cm)
5 1.75 in (4.5 cm)
256
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
257
Operation
In the Operation section you will find de- The more cautiously you treat your vehicle !
tailed information on operating, maintain- during the break-in period, the more satis- Additional instructions for AMG vehi-
ing and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later cles:
on.
During the first 1000 miles
Drive your vehicle during the first (1500 km), do not exceed a speed
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but of 85 mph (140 km/h).
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
During this period, avoid engine
During this period, avoid heavy loads speeds above 4500 rpm in each
(full throttle driving) and excessive en- gear.
gine speeds (no more than 2 3 of max-
imum rpm in each gear).
All of the above instructions, as may apply
Avoid accelerating by kick-down. to your vehicle type, also apply when driv-
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
down by shifting to a lower gear using the engine or the rear differential has been
the gear selector lever. replaced.
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when i

driving at moderate speeds (for hill Always obey applicable speed limits.
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
258
Operation
Drive sensibly save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-

pends on driving habits and operating con- Warning! G Warning! G
ditions.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Keep drivers foot area clear at all times. Ob-
To save fuel you should:
and driving are very dangerous combina- jects stored in this area may impair pedal
Keep tires at the recommended infla- tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or movement.
tion pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
Remove unnecessary loads. and judgement. Power assistance
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
Remove roof rack when not in use.
cident are greatly increased when you drink
Allow engine to warm up under low or take drugs and drive. Warning! G
load use.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
Avoid frequent acceleration and decel- anyone to drive who has been drinking or
power assistance for the brake and steering
eration. taking drugs.
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
Have all maintenance work performed in mind that a considerably higher degree of
at the intervals specified in the Service effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
Booklet and as required by the FSS. hicle.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips, and in hilly country.
259
Operation
Brakes To help prevent brake disk corrosion after If the parking brake is released and the
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly brake warning lamp in the instrument clus-
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the ter stays on, the brake fluid level in the res-
Warning! G vehicle with considerable force prior to ervoir is too low.
parking. The heat generated serves to dry Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
After driving in heavy rain for some time the brakes. be the reason for low brake fluid in the res-
without applying the brakes or through wa-
If your brake system is normally only sub- ervoir.
ter deep enough to wet brake components,
jected to moderate loads, you should occa-
the first braking action may be somewhat Have the brake system inspected immedi-
sionally test the effectiveness of the
reduced and increased pedal pressure may ately. Contact an authorized
brakes by applying above-normal braking
be necessary to obtain expected braking ef- Mercedes-Benz Center.
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
enhance the grip of the brake pads. All checks and service work on the brake
in front.
system should be carried out by qualified
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will ! technicians only. Contact an authorized
cause excessive and premature wear of the Be very careful not to endanger other Mercedes-Benz Center.
brake pads. road users when you apply the brakes. Only install brake pads and brake fluid
It can also result in the brakes overheating, Refer to the description of the Brake recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
thereby significantly reducing their effec- Assist System (BAS) ( page 78).
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
dent.
260
Operation
Driving off Parking

Warning! G
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
If other than recommended brake pads are driving off. Perform this procedure only Warning! G
installed, or other than recommended brake when the road is clear of other traffic.
fluid is used, the braking properties of the Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that bustible materials such as grass, hay or
place full load on the engine until the oper-
safe braking is substantially impaired. This leaves can come into contact with the hot
ating temperature has been reached.
could result in an accident. exhaust system, as these materials could be
When starting off on a slippery surface, do ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an ex-
! To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
tended period with the ESP switched off.
When driving down long and steep sult of inadvertent vehicle movement, be-
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
grades, relieve the load on the brakes fore turning off the engine and leaving the
drive train which is not covered by the
by shifting into a lower gear to use the vehicle always:
engines braking power. This helps pre- Keep right foot on brake pedal.
vent overheating of the brakes and re- ! Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
duces brake pad wear. Simultaneously depressing the acceler- Move the gear selector lever to
ator pedal and applying the brake reposition P.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive duces engine performance and causes
Slowly release brake pedal.
on for some time, rather than immediately premature brake and drivetrain wear.
parking, so that the air stream can cool When parked on an incline, turn front
down the brakes faster. wheel towards the road curb.
261
Operation
Tires The tread wear indicator appears as a solid

Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press band across the tread.
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
when leaving. Although the applicable federal motor vehi-
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
! when the tread wear indicators (TWI) be-
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
come visible at approximately 1 16 in
Set the parking brake whenever park- ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not al-
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition, tion to an area which is a safe distance from
low your tires to wear down to that level. As
move gear selector lever to position P. the road.
tread depth approaches 1 8 in (3 mm), the
When parking on hills, always turn front Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody adhesion properties on a wet road are
wheels towards the road curb. for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires sharply reduced.
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Depending upon the weather and/or road
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for re-
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
pairs.
widely.
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by

Specified tire pressures must be main-
law. These indicators are located in six
tained. This applies particularly if the tires
places on the tread circumference and be-
are subject to extreme operating condi-
come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
tions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high
mately 1 16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
ambient temperatures).
tire is considered worn and should be re-
placed.
262
Operation
Tire traction considerably greater than when the road is

Warning! G not covered with snow or ice. Exercise ap-
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or propriate caution.
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You Tire speed rating
You should pay particular attention to the
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
condition of the road whenever the outside
driving with a flat tire or driving at high Regardless of the tire rating, local speed
temperatures are close to the freezing
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driv-
point.
heat build-up and possibly a fire. ing speeds appropriate to prevailing condi-
tions.
Hydroplaning Warning! G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction Warning! G
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even will be substantially reduced. Under such
Even when permitted by law, never operate
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the with extreme caution.
mum speed rating of the tires.
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
rain. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
of approximately 1 6 in (4 mm) on all four
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
wheels for the winter season to ensure
personal injury and possible death, for you
normal balanced handling characteristics.
and for others.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance in compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
263
Operation
S 430, S 430 4MATIC, S 500, and S 430, S 430 4MATIC, S 500, Winter driving instructions
S 500 4MATIC S 500 4MATIC, and S 600 with
Sport Package* or Appearance The most important rule for slippery or icy
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
Package* roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
H-rated tires, which have a speed rating
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
of 130 mph (210 km/h). Your vehicle is factory equipped with
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
Y-rated tires, which have a speed rating
An electronic speed limiter prevents your system under such conditions.
of 186 mph (300 km/h).
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
130 mph (210 km/h). An electronic speed limiter prevents your
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
S 600 130 mph (210 km/h).
rective steering action.
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
S 55 AMG i
Y-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 186 mph (300 km/h). Your vehicle is factory equipped with For information on driving with snow
Y-rated tires, which have a speed rating chains, see Snow chains
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
of 186 mph (300 km/h). ( page 293).
130 mph (210 km/h). An electronic speed limiter prevents your
155 mph (250 km/h). Warning! G
i On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
For information on speed rating for win-
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
ter tires, see Winter tires
cle control. Your vehicles ABS will not pre-
( page 292).
vent this type of control loss.
264
Operation
Road salts and chemicals can adversely af- Standing water

fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal Warning! G
force may become necessary to produce !
the normal braking effect. If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
Do not drive through flooded areas or
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
Depressing the brake pedal periodically water of unknown depth. Before driving
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
when traveling at length on salt-strewn through water, determine its depth.
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
roads can bring road-salt impaired braking Never accelerate before driving into
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
efficiency back to normal. water. The bow wave could force water
terior resulting in unconsciousness and
into the engine and auxiliary equip-
If the vehicle is parked after being driven death.
ment, thus damaging them.
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien- To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
cy should be tested as soon as possible af- open a window slightly on the side of the ve- If you must drive through standing wa-
ter driving is resumed. hicle not facing the wind. ter, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
Warning! G these areas could cause damage to
Warning! G electrical components or wiring of the
Make sure not to endager any other road us-
engine or transmission, or could result
ers when carrying out these braking maneu- The outside temperature indicator is not de-
in water being ingested by the engine
vers. signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
through the air intake causing severe
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
internal engine damage. Any such dam-
dicated temperatures just above the freez-
age is not covered by the
ing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
For more information on winter driving, see

Winter driving ( page 292).
265
Operation
Passenger compartment Control and operation of radio trans- Telephones and two-way radios
mitters
COMAND*, radio, and telephone*
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
ly as possible. Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown Please do not forget that your primary re-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
tion of the vehicles electronic system, pos-
to vehicle occupants unless the items are Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
securely fastened in the vehicle. agement and Data System), radio, or tele-
personal injury.
phone1 if road, weather and traffic
The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob- conditions permit.
jects. Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
phone or a citizens band unit should only
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Driving abroad be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
ly 14 m) every second.
Abroad, there is an extensive the outside of the vehicle.
1
Mercedes-Benz service network at your Observe all legal requirements.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas structions regarding use of an external an-
which are not listed in the index of your tenna.
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
266
Operation
Catalytic converter Emission control

Warning! G
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with Certain systems of the engine serve to
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op- keep the toxic components of the exhaust
important element in conjunction with the erate this vehicle in areas where combusti- gases within permissible limits required by
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con- ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves law.
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis- can come into contact with the hot exhaust
These systems, of course, will function
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper system, as these materials could be ignited
properly only when maintained strictly ac-
operating condition by following our rec- and cause a vehicle fire.
cording to factory specifications. Any ad-
ommended maintenance instructions as
justments on the engine should, therefore,
outlined in your Service Booklet.
be carried out only by qualified
! Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni-
cians.
To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
verters, only use premium unleaded Engine adjustments should not be altered
gasoline in this vehicle. in any way. Moreover, the specified service
jobs must be carried out regularly accord-
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
ing to Mercedes-Benz servicing require-
operation should be repaired promptly.
ments. For details refer to the Service
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
Booklet.
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and start a fire.
267
Operation
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions,
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem- Driving when your engine is badly over-
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon perature may rise close to approximately heated can cause some fluids, which
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon- 248F (120C). may have leaked into the engine com-
sciousness and lead to death. partment, to catch fire. You could be se-
The engine should not be operated with riously burned.
Do not run the engine in confined areas the coolant temperature over 248F Steam from an overheated engine can
(such as a garage) which are not properly (120C). Doing so may cause serious en- cause serious burns and can occur just
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas gine damage which is not covered by the by opening the hood. Stay away from
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the engine if you see or hear steam com-
have the cause determined and corrected ing from it.
immediately. If you must drive under these
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
conditions, drive only with at least one win-
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
dow fully open at all times.
engine has cooled down.
268
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Refueling The fuel filler flap is located on the open, starter switch is now in
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the position 0, same as SmartKey re-
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with moved from starter switch).
Warning! G the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/un-
the point indicated by the arrow.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. locks the fuel filler flap.
It burns violently and can cause serious The fuel filler flap springs open.
injury. Whenever you are around gasoline,
Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extin-
to it until possible pressure is released.
guish all smoking materials. Never allow
sparks, flame or smoking materials near Take off the cap and set it in the recess
gasoline! on the fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
Turn the engine off
unit cuts out do not top up or over-
by turning the SmartKey to fill.
position 0. Remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button. Open the driv-
ers door (with the drivers door
269
Operation
At the gas station
i Check regularly and before a long trip

Warning! G Only use premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
sure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray Information on gasoline quality can
back out when removing the fuel pump noz- normally be found on the fuel pump.
zle, which could cause personal injury.
More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the Products pamphlet.
right.
You will hear when the fuel cap is tight- i 1 Windshield washer and headlamp
ened. Leaving the engine running and the fuel cleaning system*
Close the fuel filler flap. cap open can cause the ? malfunc- 2 Coolant level
tion indicator lamp to illuminate. 3 Brake fluid
For more information, see the Practi- i
cal hints section ( page 306).
Opening the hood, see ( page 272).
270
Operation
At the gas station
Windshield washer system and head- Brake fluid Engine oil level
lamp cleaning system* For more information on engine oil, see
!
For more information on refilling the wash- Engine oil ( page 273).
If you find that the brake fluid in the
er reservoir, see Windshield washer sys-
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
tem and headlamp cleaning system* Vehicle lighting
minimum mark or below, have the
( page 281).
brake system checked for brake pad Check function and cleanliness. For more
thickness and leaks immediately. information on replacing light bulbs, see
Coolant
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Replacing bulbs ( page 353).
For more information on coolant, see Center immediately. Do not add brake For more information, see Switching on
Coolant ( page 278) and see Fuels, fluid as this will not solve the problem. headlamps ( page 47).
coolants, lubricants, etc. ( page 391). For more information, see Practical
hints ( page 305). Tire inflation pressure
For information on brake fluid, see Brake For information on tire inflation pressure,
fluid ( page 394) see Checking tire inflation pressure
( page 283).
271
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood Pull release lever 1 in direction of ar- Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator
row. grille.
The hood is unlocked and handle 2 Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on
Warning! G will extend out of the radiator grille. the handle) and then release it.
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- ! The hood will be automatically held
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could open at shoulder height by gas-filled
To avoid damage to the windshield wip-
be forced open by passing air flow. struts.
ers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
Opening from the windshield. Warning! G
The hood lock release lever is located in
the drivers footwell to the left of the park- To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
ing brake pedal. moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
proximately 30 seconds or even restart af-
ter the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
2 Handle for opening the hood
1 Release lever
272
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing Engine oil

Warning! G
The amount of oil your engine needs will
If you see flames or smoke coming from the Warning! G depend on a number of factors, including
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem- driving style. Higher oil consumption can
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
perature gauge indicates that the engine is occur when
anyone.
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
the vehicle is new
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled down. If neces- Let the hood drop from a height of ap- the vehicle is driven frequently at
sary, call the fire department. proximately 1 ft. (30 cm). higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly. Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Warning! G Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed. i
The engine is equipped with a transistorized If you can raise the hood at a point Do not use any special lubricant addi-
ignition system. Because of the high voltage above the headlamps, then it is not tives, as these may damage the drive
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig- properly closed. Open it again and let it assemblies. Using special additives not
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic drop with somewhat greater force. approved by Mercedes-Benz will re-
socket) of the ignition system strict your warranty entitlement.
with the engine running More information on this subject is
while starting the engine available at any Mercedes-Benz
if ignition is on and the engine is Center.
cranked manually
273
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking the engine oil level with the ADD 1.5 QTS. TO
control system REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
When checking the oil level the vehicle (Canada: 1.5 LITERS)
must
ADD 2.0 QTS.
be parked on level ground TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
be at normal operating temperature After about three seconds this mes- (Canada: 2.0 LITERS)
have been stationary for at least five sage is displayed:
i
minutes with the engine turned off ENGINE OIL LEVEL If you want to interrupt the checking
To check the engine oil level via the multi- MEASURING NOW! procedure, press the k or j
function display, do the following: One of the following messages will sub- button on the multifunction steering
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch sequently appear in the indicator: wheel.
to position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO ENGINE OIL LEVEL
start/stop button* twice. If necessary, add engine oil.
OK
The standard display ( page 139) should ADD 1.0 QT. TO
For adding engine oil see ( page 277).
appear in the multifunction display. REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL! For more information on engine oil, see
Press button k or j on the (Canada: 1.0 LITER) the Technical data section ( page 391)
steering wheel until the following mes- and ( page 393).
sage is seen in the multifunction dis-
play:
CORRECT MEASUREMENT
ONLY IF VEH. LEVEL
274
Operation
Engine compartment
Other display messages If you see the message: !

If the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO start/stop ENGINE OIL LEVEL Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
button* is not in position 2, the following NOT WHEN ENGINE ON! off. It could cause damage to the en-
message will appear: gine and catalytic converter not cov-
Turn off the engine.
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL
If the engine is at normal operating Warranty.
IGNITION ON!
temperature, wait five minutes before
Switch on ignition. checking oil. i
If you see the message: If the engine is not yet at normal oper- Perform the engine oil level check with
ating temperature, you must wait the dipstick (S 430, S 500, and
PERF. SERV. ON TIME
30 minutes before checking oil. S 55 AMG only) if it cannot be complet-
If engine is at normal operating ed with the control system .
If there is excess engine oil with the engine
temperature, wait five minutes before
at normal operating temperature, the fol- In this case we recommend that you
repeating check procedure.
lowing message will appear: have the system checked at a
If engine is not yet at normal operating Mercedes-Benz Center.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
temperature, wait 30 minutes before
REDUCE OIL LEVEL
repeating check procedure.
For more information on messages in the
Have excess oil siphoned or drained
display concerning engine oil , see the
off. Contact an authorized
Practical hints section ( page 326).
Mercedes-Benz Center.
275
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking the engine oil level with the Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dip- i
oil dipstick (S 430, S 500, and stick guide tube. The filling quantity between the upper
S 55 AMG only) and lower marks on the oil dipstick is
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after ap-
When checking the oil level the vehicle proximately three seconds to obtain approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
must accurate reading.
If necessary, add engine oil.
be parked on level ground
be at normal operating temperature For adding engine oil see ( page 277).
have been stationary for at least five For more information on engine, see the
minutes with the engine turned off Technical data section ( page 391) and
( page 393).
i For more information on messages in the
The engine oil level can be checked by display concerning engine oil, see the
either the oil dipstick or via the multi- Practical hints section ( page 326).
function display in the instrument clus-
ter ( page 274). The amount of engine Oil dipstick
oil needed is shown more precisely in The oil level is correct when it is between
the multifunction display. the lower (min) and upper (max) mark of
the oil dipstick.
To check the engine oil level with the oil
dipstick, do the following:
Open the hood ( page 272).
Pull out oil dipstick 1 ( page 277).
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
276
Operation
Engine compartment
Adding engine oil !

Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
!
off. It could cause damage to the en-
Only use approved engine oils. For a gine and catalytic converter not cov-
listing of approved engine oils, refer to ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
the Factory Approved Service Products Warranty.
pamphlet in your vehicle literature port-
folio.
Screw filler cap 2 back on filler neck.
In addition, check the oil filler cap for
important information pertaining to the
engine oil needing to meet a specific S 430, S 430 4MATIC, S 500, S 500 4MATIC,
and S 55 AMG
Mercedes-Benz specification
(e.g. MB 229.5). If such information is 1 Oil dipstick (S 430, S 500, and
printed on the oil filler cap, only use an S 55 AMG only)
engine oil from the list of approved en- 2 Filler cap
gine oils in the Factory Approved Ser- Unscrew filler cap 2 from filler neck.
vice Products pamphlet that meets the
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
specification indicated on the oil filler
cap. not to overfill with oil.
S 600
Using engine oils of other specification Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
1 Filler cap
may cause the FSS to incorrectly deter- Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water. Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
mine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by Add engine oil as required. Be careful
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. not to overfill with oil.
277
Operation
Engine compartment
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Transmission fluid level Coolant
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water. The transmission fluid level does not need The engine coolant is a mixture of water
to be checked. If you notice transmission and anticorrosion/antifreeze.
! fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
When checking the coolant level,
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
off. It could cause damage to the en- check the automatic transmission. the vehicle must be parked on level
gine and catalytic converter not cov- ground, and
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Active Body Control* (ABC*) fluid level the engine must be cool.
Warranty.
Regular fluid level check is not required. If
Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck. you notice fluid leaks or malfunction mes-
sages in the multifunction display, have an
For more information on engine, see the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check
Technical data section ( page 391) and the ABC-system.
( page 393).
278
Operation
Engine compartment
The coolant expansion tank is located on !

Warning! G the passenger side of the engine compart- S 600:
ment. Only open the cap on coolant expan-
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
sion tank 1. Never open the cap be-
Use extreme caution when opening the tween the charge-air coolers.
hood if there are any signs of steam or Otherwise, the engine could be dam-
coolant leaking from the cooling system, aged.
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
The coolant level is correct if the level
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above for cold coolant: reaches the black top
158F (70C). Allow engine to cool part of the reservoir
down before removing cap. The coolant
for warm coolant: is approximately
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
1 Coolant expansion tank 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
pressure.
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx- Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx- Add coolant as required.
imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres- imately one half turn to the left to re-
Replace and tighten cap.
sure. If opened immediately, scalding lease any excess pressure.
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un- Continue turning the cap to the left and For more information on coolant, see
der pressure.
remove it. Coolants ( page 395).
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts.
279
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery Batteries contain materials that can harm

G Observe all safety instructions
and precautions when handling the environment if disposed of improperly.
Your vehicles battery is located on the Recycling of batteries is the preferred
automotive batteries.
right side of the trunk floor ( page 366). method of disposal. Many states require
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated ser-
A Risk of explosion sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
D Keep
vice life. Refer to Service Booklet for bat- flames or sparks away
tery maintenance intervals. from battery. Do not smoke.
B Battery
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-dis- acid is caustic. Do not
tance trips, you will need to have the bat- allow it to come into contact
tery charge checked more frequently. with skin, eyes or clothing.
When replacing the battery, always use In case it does, immediately

batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle necessary.
for an extended period of time, consult an
E Wear eye protection.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
C Keep children away.
F Follow the instructions in this

Operator's Manual.
280
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and During all seasons, add MB Windshield !

headlamp cleaning system* Washer Concentrate S to water. Premix Only use washer fluid which is suitable
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer
The windshield washer reservoir is located container. fluid can damage the plastic lenses of
in the engine compartment. the headlamps.
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed wind- i
shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de- If the windshield washer system on
pending on ambient temperatures). your vehicle is heated*, a fluid mixture
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze produced to resist freezing at tempera-
where temperatures may fall below tures of approximately 14F (10C)
freezing point. Failure to do so could re- should be sufficient.
sult in damage to the washer sys-
tem/reservoir. For more information, see Windshield and
1 Washer fluid reservoir headlamp washer system ( page 398).
Fluid for the windshield washer system and Warning! G
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
has a capacity of approximately: ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
3.2 US qt. (3.0 l) in vehicles without and burn. You could be seriously burned.
headlamp cleaning system
7.1 US qt. (6.7 l) in vehicles with head-
lamp cleaning system or heated reser-
voir
281
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Important guidelines
for information on tested and recommend- Warning! G
ed rims and tires for summer and winter Only use sets of tires and rims of the
operation. They can also offer advice con- Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
cerning tire service and purchase. tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
Tires must be of the correct size for the
sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
Warning! G When replacing rims, use only genuine
Break in new tires for approximately
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
Replace rims or tires with the same designa- speeds.
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an
original part. See an authorized accident. Regularly check the tires and rims for
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- damage. Dented or bent rims can
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- cause tire pressure loss and damage to
mounted: mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous the tire beads.
The wheel brakes or suspension compo- damage cannot always be recognized on If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
nents can be damaged. retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore pressure and correct as required.
not assure the operating safety of the vehi-
The correct operating clearance of the Do not allow your tires to wear down
wheels and the tires are no longer guar- cle when such tires are used.
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
anteed. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center roads are sharply reduced at tread
for information on tested and recommend- depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
ed rims and tires for summer and winter
When replacing individual tires, you
operation.
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
282
Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tires Direction of rotation Checking tire inflation pressure
The service life of a tire is dependent upon Unidirectional tires offer added advantag-
varying factors including but not limited to: es, such as better hydroplaning perfor- Warning! G
mance. To benefit, however, you must
Driving style
make sure the tires rotate in the direction If the tire pressure drops repeatedly:
Tire pressure specified. Check the tires for punctures from
Distance driven An arrow on the sidewall indicates the in- foreign objects.
tended direction of tire rotation. Check to see whether air is leaking from
Warning! G the valves or from around the rim.
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after Regularly check your tire pressure at inter-
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. vals of no more than 14 days.
Correct the tire pressure only when tires
! are cold.
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry If the tires are warm, you should only cor-
place with as little exposure to light as rect the tire pressure if it is too low for cur-
possible. Protect tires from contact rent operating conditions.
with oil, grease and gasoline.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the spec-
ified tire inflation pressures for warm and
cold tires as well as for various operating
conditions.
283
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Check the spare tire periodically for condi-

The pressures listed for light loads are
Warning! G tion and inflation pressure. Spare tires will
minimum values offering high driving age and become worn over time even if
Follow recommended tire inflation pres- never used, and thus should be inspected
comfort.
sures. and replaced when necessary or after a
Increased inflation pressures listed for Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires maximum of six years.
heavier loads may also be used for light can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
loads. These higher pressures produce cause they are more likely to become punc-
favorable handling characteristics. The tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
ride of the vehicle, however, will be etc.
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
max. values or inflate tires below the Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
min. values listed on the fuel filler flap. wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Tire pressure changes by approximately
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18F (10C) of air Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
temperature change. Keep this in mind specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat-
when checking tire pressure where the ed by the label on the pillar in the drivers
temperature is different from the outside door opening). Overloading the tires can
temperature. overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Tire temperature and tire pressure also in-

crease while driving, depending on the
driving speed and the tire load.
284
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire pressure electronically* i

(vehicles produced up to approximate- Possible differences between the read-
Warning! G
ly October 2003) ings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
The tire inflation pressure monitor does not
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and
i indicate a warning for wrongly selected in-
the vehicles control system can occur.
Check with an authorized flation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation
The readings issued by the control sys-
Mercedes-Benz Center to determine pressure according to the label on the fuel
tem are more precise.
the equipment installed in your vehicle. filler flap.
The tire inflation pressure monitor is not
Switch on ignition.
The tire inflation pressure monitor only able to issue a warning due to a sudden dra-
functions on wheels that are equipped with Press button or on the mul- matic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout
the proper electronic sensors. It monitors tifunction steering wheel repeatedly caused by a foreign object). In this case
the tire inflation pressure, as selected by until the standard display menu ap- bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply-
the driver, in all four tires. A warning is is- pears in the multifunction display ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
sued to alert you to a decrease in pressure ( page 134). maneuvers.
in one or more of the tires. Press button k or j repeatedly
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the until you see the current inflation pres- i
multifunction display ( page 134). The in- sures for each tire appear in the dis-
Operating radio transmission equip-
flation pressures are displayed only after a play.
ment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way
few minutes travel time. radios) in or near the vehicle could
You can select the unit of measure used for cause the tire inflation pressure moni-
the tire inflation pressure by changing the tor to malfunction.
setting in the control system ( page 134).
285
Operation
Tires and wheels
Activating the tire inflation pressure Press button j or k repeatedly

Warning! G monitor until you see the current inflation pres-
You must activate the tire inflation pressures for each tire appear in the display
Follow recommended tire inflation pres- or the following message appears in
sures. sure monitor in the following cases:
the display
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires If you have changed the tire pressure TIRE PRES.
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be- If you have replaced the wheels or tires DISPLAY AFTER DRIVING
cause they are more likely to become punc- A FEW MINS.
If you have installed new wheels or
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes, REACTIVATE USING
tires R-BUTTON
etc.
Make sure the tire pressure is correctly
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires i
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling set.
If transporting a deflated road wheel or
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail Press button or on the mul- additional wheel sensors in the vehicle,
from being overheated. tifunction steering wheel repeatedly the tire inflation pressure monitor
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the until the standard display menu ap- should not be reactivated until the de-
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat- pears in the multifunction display flated wheel or additional wheel sen-
ed by the label on the pillar in the drivers ( page 134). sors have been removed from the
door opening). Overloading the tires can vehicle. Otherwise, the deflated wheel
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. or additional sensors could cause the
tire inflation pressure monitor system
to malfunction.
286
Operation
Tires and wheels
Press the reset button on the instru- If you wish to cancel activation: Checking tire pressure electronically*
ment cluster ( page 22). (vehicles produced as of approximately
Press button.
October 2003)
The following message will appear in
If the following message appears in the
the multifunction display: i
multifunction display:
MONITOR CURRENT TIRE PRESSURE
REACTIVATE TIRE Check with an authorized
Press button. PRES. MONITOR Mercedes-Benz Center to determine
or the equipment installed in your vehicle.
TIRE PRES.
the multifunction display:
CHECK TIRES! The tire inflation pressure monitor only
TIRE PRESS. CONTROL ACTIVATED!
Check the tire inflation pressures and functions on wheels that are equipped with
The tire inflation pressure monitor will
correct them if necessary. the proper electronic sensors. It monitors
now monitor the tire inflation pressure
the tire inflation pressure, as selected by
values of all four tires. Reactivate the tire inflation pressure
the driver, in all four tires. A warning is is-
monitor.
The following message will appear in sued to alert you to a decrease in pressure
the multifunction display: in one or more of the tires.
TIRE PRES.
You can call up the tire pressure using the
DISPLAY AFTER DRIVING
control system ( page 134).
A FEW MINS.
REACTIVATE USING
R-BUTTON
This display appears until the individual
inflation pressure values are matched
with the tires. The individual values are
then displayed ( page 285).
287
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Switch on ignition.
After you have reactivated the tire Press button or on the mul-
Warning! G
pressure monitor, the current tire pres- tifunction steering wheel repeatedly When the tire pressure monitoring system
sures will only be shown after a few until the standard display menu ap- warning lamp is lit, one or more of your tires
minutes driving time. pears in the multifunction display is significantly under-inflated. You should
During this time, you will see the follow- ( page 134). stop and check your tires as soon as possi-
ing message in the display:
Press button k or j repeatedly ble, and inflate them to the proper pressure
TIRE PRES. DISPLAY
until you see the current inflation pres- as indicated on the vehicles tire information
APPEARS AFTER
sures for each tire appear in the dis- placard. Driving on a significantly under-in-
DRIVING A FEW MINUTES
play. flated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
i reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
Possible differences between the read- and may affect the vehicles handling and
ings of a tire pressure gauge of an air stopping ability. Each tire, including the
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and spare, should be checked monthly when
the vehicles control system can occur. cold and set to the recommended inflation
The readings issued by the control sys- pressure as specified in the vehicle placard
tem are more precise. and owners manual.
i
The recommended tire inflation pres-
sures for your vehicle can be found on
the inside of the fuel filler flap, not in
the owners manual.
288
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating the tire pressure monitor

Warning! G Warning! G The tire pressure monitor must be reacti-
The tire inflation pressure monitor does not Follow recommended tire inflation pres- vated in the following situations:
indicate a warning for wrongly selected in- sures. If you have changed the tire pressure
flation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires If you have replaced the wheels or tires
pressure according to the label on the fuel can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
filler flap. If you have installed new wheels or
cause they are more likely to become punc-
tires
The tire inflation pressure monitor is not tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
able to issue a warning due to a sudden dra- etc. Using the table on the fuel filler flap,
matic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires make sure the tire inflation pressure of
caused by a foreign object). In this case wear unevenly, adversely affect handling all four tires is correct.
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply- and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail Press button j or k repeatedly
ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering from being overheated. until you see the current inflation pres-
maneuvers.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the sures for each tire appear in the display
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat- or the following message appears in
i ed by the label on the pillar in the drivers the display
Operating radio transmission equip- door opening). Overloading the tires can TIRE PRES. DISPLAY
ment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. APPEARS AFTER
radios) in or near the vehicle could DRIVING A FEW MINUTES
cause the tire inflation pressure moni-
tor to malfunction.
289
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Press button. If you wish to cancel activation:

If you are transporting a deflated tire in The following message will appear in Press button.
the vehicle, do not activate the tire the multifunction display:
If one of the following messages appears in
inflation pressure monitor until TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATED
the multifunction display:
the deflated tire is no longer in the The tire inflation pressure monitor will
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
vehicle now monitor the tire inflation pressure REACTIVATE AFTER
you have inflated the tire to the cor- values of all four tires. CORRECTING PRESSURE!
rect pressure Afterward, the following message will
TIRE PRES.
appear in the display:
PLEASE CORRECT!
Press the reset button on the instru- TIRE PRES. DISPLAY
ment cluster ( page 22). APPEARS AFTER Check the tire inflation pressures and
DRIVING A FEW MINUTES correct them if necessary.
the multifunction display: This display appears until the individual Reactivate the tire inflation pressure
CHECK CURRENT TIRE PRES.? inflation pressure values are matched monitor.
with the tires. The individual values are
then displayed ( page 287).
290
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating wheels !
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire in- Warning! G
flation pressure monitor, there are
Warning! G electronic components built into the
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
wheel.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are loose if not tightened with a torque of
Do not use mounting tools in the area
of the same size. 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
of the valve as they could damage the
electronic components. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
On vehicles with the same wheel size all To prevent damage or incorrect instal- bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
around, wheels can be rotated every 3000 lation, have the tires changed at an au-
to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For information on wheel change, see the
sooner if necessary, according to the de- Practical hints section ( page 344) and
gree of tire wear. The same direction of tire ( page 361).
rotation must be retained.
Rotate the wheels before the characteris-
tic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and en-
sure proper tire inflation pressure. If nec-
essary, activate the tire inflation pressure
monitor.
291
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehi- Winter tires Always observe the speed rating of the
cle winterized at an authorized winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service in- Always use winter tires at temperatures maximum speed for which your tires are
cludes: below 45F (7C) and whenever wintry rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
is the only way to achieve the maximum ef- where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
concentration.
fectiveness of the ABS, ESP, and 4MATIC tices are available at your tire dealer or any
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the in winter operation. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
water of the windshield and headlamp
For safe handling, make sure that all
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
S to a premixed windshield washer
mounted winter tires are of the same make Warning! G
and have the same tread design.
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
for temperatures below freezing point
( page 396). Warning! G are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
Battery test. Battery capacity drops very well impair turning stability and that
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
with decreasing ambient temperature. 1 overall driving stability may be reduced.
6 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
A well charged battery helps to ensure longer suitable for winter operation. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
that the engine can be started even at
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
low ambient temperatures.
tire at the nearest authorized
Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom- Mercedes-Benz Center.
mends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
minimum tread depth of approximately
1
6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
292
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater (Canada only) i !

When driving with snow chains, you Even on vehicles with all-wheel drive,
The engine is equipped with a block heat- use snow chains on rear tires only.
may wish to deactivate the
er.
ESP ( page 80) before setting the ve- Do not use snow chains with tire sizes
The electrical cable may be installed at an hicle in motion. This will improve the 245/45 R 18 on 8 1/2 x 18 rims and
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. vehicles traction. 265/40 R 18 in general ( page 384).
Snow chains Please observe the following guidelines Do not use snow chains on tires mount-
when using snow chains: ed on AMG rims.
i Use of snow chains is not permissible
When using snow chains, vehicles with with all wheel/tire combinations.
AIRMATIC should only be driven at
Snow chains should only be used on
raised vehicle level ( page 219). Vehi-
cles with ABC* should only be driven at the rear wheels. Follow the manufac-
vehicle height 1 ( page 221). turer's mounting instructions.
Only use snow chains that are ap-
Snow chains should only be driven on proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho-
snow-covered roads at speeds not to rized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains glad to advise you on this subject.
as soon as possible when driving on roads Use of snow chains may be prohibited
without snow. depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
293
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have Clearing the service indicator
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with The service indicator is automatically
the Service Booklet at the times called for cleared after 30 seconds. You can also
by the FSS (Flexible Service System). clear it yourself.
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in Press the reset button on the instru-
accordance with the Service Booklet at the The type of service due is indicated in the ment cluster ( page 22).
designated times/mileage called for by multifunction display:
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not Service term exceeded
9 Minor service (A)
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. Major service (B) If you have exceeded the suggested ser-
vice term, you will see the following mes-
FSS will notify you when your next service i sage in the multifunction display:
is due. The interval between services depends SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XXXX MILES (KM)
Approximately one month before your next on your driving habits. A gentle driving SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XXX DAYS
service is due, one of the following mes- style, moderate engine speeds and the SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY X DAY
sages will appear in the multifunction dis- avoidance of short-distance trips will
play while you are driving or when you lengthen the interval between services. An acoustic signal will also sound.
switch on the ignition (example service A): The Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the
SERVICE A IN XXXXX MILES (KM) service indicator following a completed
SERVICE A IN XXX DAYS service.
SERVICE A IN X DAY
SERVICE A DUE NOW!
294
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the service indicator Resetting the service indicator To confirm, press reset button until you
hear a signal.
Switch on ignition. In the event that the service on your vehi-
The service indicator now displays the
cle is not carried out by an authorized
The standard display of the control sys- reset interval.
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
tem appears ( page 139).
service indicator yourself. i
Press button k or j on the mul-
Switch on ignition. If the service indicator was inadvertent-
tifunction steering wheel until FSS indi-
cator with the service symbol 9 or The standard display of the control sys- ly reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Center
and the service deadline appears tem appears ( page 139). correct it.
in the multifunction display. Only reset if the proper service has
Press button k or j on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel until the FSS been performed. Resetting the system
i without performing proper service as
indicator with the service symbol 9
If the battery is disconnected, the days called for by the FSS will cause the FSS
or and the service deadline ap-
of disconnection will not be included in to incorrectly determine the next ser-
pears in the multifunction display.
the count shown by the service indica- vice interval which will result in engine
tor. To arrive at the true service dead- Press reset button on the instrument damage not covered by the
line, you will need to subtract these cluster for about three seconds. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
days from the days shown in the ser- This message appears in the multifunc-
vice indicator. tion display:
Do not confuse the service indicator SERVICE INTERVAL...
with the engine oil level indicator :. RESET WITH
R BUTTON FOR 3 SEC.
295
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle Such damage is caused not only by ex- More frequent washings are necessary to
treme and varying climatic conditions, but deal with unfavorable conditions:
also by:
near the ocean
Warning! G Air pollution
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Road salt emissions)
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Tar during winter operation
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicles Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to
doors or windows when cleaning the inside. time for stone chipping or other damage.
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- diately remove:
possible to prevent corrosion.
signed for cleaning your vehicle. Grease and oil
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
Fuel of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
In operation, even while parked, your vehi-
cle is subjected to varying external influ- Coolant ough check is a washing of the underbody
ences which, if gone unchecked, can followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
Brake fluid
attack the paintwork as well as the under- aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
body and cause lasting damage. Bird droppings Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
Insects ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
Tree resins, etc.
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- neither necessary nor recommended by
nates the aggressiveness and potency of Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
the above adverse influences. of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others ap-
plied later.
296
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and Power washer Tar stains

compiled recommendations which are When using a power washer for cleaning Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
specially matched to our vehicles and the vehicle, always observe the manufac- and become more difficult to remove. A tar
which always reflect the latest technology. turers operating instructions. remover is recommended.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at an authorized i Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
should be applied when water drops on the
damage due to negligent or incorrect care water, and a SmartKey with
paint surface do not bead up, normally
cannot always be removed or repaired with KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
every three to five months, depending on
the car-care products recommended here. within approx. 3 ft. (approx. 1 m), the
climate and washing detergent used.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an au- vehicle could be inadvertently locked
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. or unlocked. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
The following topics deal with the cleaning shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
and care of your vehicle and give important !
gloss).
how-to information as well as references Never use a round nozzle to
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care prod- power-wash tires. The intense jet of Do not apply any of these products or wax
ucts. water can result in damage to the tire. if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Additional information can be found in the Always replace a damaged tire.
booklet Vehicle Care Guide. Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
Always keep the jet of water moving
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
across the surface. Do not aim directly
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehi-
at electrical parts, electrical connec-
cle doors, etc.).
tors, seals, or other rubber parts.
297
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry Ornamental moldings
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
agents to dry on the finish.
make sure to protect electrical compo- chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean-
nents and connectors from the intrusion of Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in ex- er.
water and cleaning agents. terior rear view mirrors prior to running the
vehicle through an automatic car wash to Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor-
prevent damage to the mirrors. turn signal lenses
rosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning. In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Before applying, all control linkage bush- of road salt as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
ings and joints should be lubricated. The When washing the underbody, do not for- poo, with plenty of water.
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be pro- get to clean the inner sides of the wheels. To prevent scratches, never apply strong
tected from any wax.
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
i cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not at-
Vehicle washing Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of or sponge.
in direct sunlight. Only use a mild car wash water, and a SmartKey with
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz ap- KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
proved Car Shampoo. within approx. 3 ft. (approx. 1 m), the
vehicle could be inadvertently locked
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
or unlocked.
fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
298
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor Cleaning the Parktronic* system To prevent scratches, never apply strong
cover sensors force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not at-
tempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
or sponge.
Wiper blades
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms away
from the windshield to a vertical posi-
tion only. They could otherwise dam-
1 Distronic* system sensor cover 1 Parktronic* sensors age the hood.
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Turn on the wipers and place it in a ver-
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham- Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
tical position.
poo, with plenty of water to clean sen- poo, with plenty of water to clean
sor cover 1. sensors 1. For information on placing the wipers to a
vertical position, see Replacing wiper
To prevent scratches, never apply strong When using a steam cleaner or power
blades ( page 359).
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a min-
cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do imum distance of 4 in (10 cm) at
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a sensors 1.
dry cloth or sponge.
299
Operation
Vehicle care
Window cleaning Use a window cleaning solution on all

Warning! G glass surfaces.
!
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re- An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
Fold the windshield wiper arms away
move SmartKey from starter switch before mended.
from the windshield in a vertical posi-
cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the tion only. They could otherwise dam- !
wiper motor might suddenly turn on and age the hood.
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
cause injury.
onto the windshield before turning the
Turn on the wipers and place it in a ver- SmartKey in the starter switch.
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a tical position.
clean cloth and detergent solution. Hold on to the wiper when folding the
For information how to place the wipers in wiper arm back. If released, the force
! a vertical position, see Replacing wiper of the impact from the tensioning
blades ( page 359). spring could crack the windshield.
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch. Warning! G
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
wiper arm back. If released, the force
move SmartKey from starter switch before
of the impact from the tensioning
cleaning the windshield, otherwise the wiper
spring could crack the windshield.
motor might suddenly turn on and cause in-
jury.
300
Operation
Vehicle care
Light alloy wheels Steering wheel and gear selector lever Seat belts
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly The webbing must not be treated with
should be used for regular cleaning of the or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved chemical cleaning agents. Only use clear,
light alloy wheels. Leather Care. lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176F
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Cup holder (80C) or in direct sunlight.
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, us-
ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
of water. mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a Warning! G
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
Follow the instructions on container.
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
i scouring agents. severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage Hard plastic trim items
the clear coat. Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
Instrument cluster with light pressure.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
Headliner and shelf below rear window
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist- Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
scouring agents. dirt.
301
Operation
Vehicle care
Upholstery Nubuck leather upholstery (S 55 AMG) Plastic and rubber parts

Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing The nubuck leather upholstery is treated Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
clothing that have the tendency to give off with a protective coating. Wipe nubuck
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause leather upholstery with damp microfiber Wood trims
the upholstery to become permanently dis- cloth to remove dust and other light stains.
Dampen cloth using water and use damp
colored. By lining the seats with a proper Carefully dab nubuck leather upholstery
cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration with a microfiber cloth to remove oil stains.
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
will be prevented.
! wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
Leather upholstery Do not use Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care or any solvents to clean
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
nubuck leather upholstery.
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leath-
Exercise particular care when cleaning per- er upholstery.
forated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
302
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
303
Practical hints
What to do if ?
What to do if ?
Lamps in instrument cluster General information: the ignition is turned on, have it checked
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to and replaced if necessary.
come on during the bulb self-check when
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

- The yellow ABS malfunction in- The ABS has detected a malfunction and Continue driving with added caution.
dicator lamp comes on while has switched off. The BAS and the ESP are Wheels may lock during hard braking,
driving. also switched off (see messages in display). reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning nor- Have the system checked at an autho-
mally but without the ABS available. rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning,
other systems such as Parktronic*, Distron- Failure to follow these instructions increas-
ic*, and the automatic transmission may es the risk of an accident.
also be malfunctioning.
The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value again,
10 volts and the ABS has switched off. the ABS is operational again.
If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
304
Practical hints
What to do if ?

; The red brake warning You are driving with the parking brake set. Release the parking brake ( page 45).
(USA only) lamp comes on while
driving and you hear a
3
warning sound.
(Canada only)
The red brake warning There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehi-
lamp comes on while voir. cle and notify an authorized
driving. Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the prob-
lem.
!
Warning! G If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
minimum mark or below, have the
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked for brake pad
brake system checked immediately if the
thickness and leaks.
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot en-
gine parts and the brake fluid catching fire.
You can be seriously burned.
305
Practical hints
What to do if ?

? The yellow malfunction There is a malfunction in: Have the vehicle checked as soon as
(USA only) indicator lamp comes on possible by an authorized
The fuel management system
while driving. Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ignition system An on-board diagnostic connector is
(Canada only)
The emission control system used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system.
Systems which affect emissions It allows the accurate identification of
Such malfunctions may result in excessive system malfunctions through the read-
emissions values and may switch the en- out of diagnostic trouble codes. It is lo-
gine to its limp-home (emergency opera- cated in the front left area of the
tion) mode. footwell next to the parking brake pedal.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly. Close the fuel cap.
Your gas tank is empty. After refuelling, start the engine three or
four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
306
Practical hints
What to do if ?

l The red Distronic warning lamp You are too close to the vehicle in front of Apply the brakes immediately to in-
comes on while driving. you to maintain selected speed. crease the following distance.
l The red Distronic warning lamp You are gaining too rapidly on the vehi- Apply the brakes immediately.
comes on while driving and you cle ahead of you.
Carefully observe the traffic situation.
hear a warning sound.
The distance warning system has recog- You may need to brake or maneuver to
nized a stationary obstacle on your avoid hitting an obstacle.
probable line of travel.
v The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP or traction control has come into When driving off, apply as little throttle
flashes while driving. operation because of detected traction loss as possible.
in at least one tire.
While driving, ease up on the accelera-
Distronic* is deactivated. tor.
Adapt your speed and driving to the pre-
vailing road and weather conditions.
Do not deactivate the ESP.
Exceptions: ( page 80).
Failure to follow these instructions increas-
es the risk of an accident.
307
Practical hints
What to do if ?

v The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP is deactivated. Switch the ESP back on ( page 81).
comes on while driving. Risk of accident! If the ESP cannot be switched back on, have
the system checked at an authorized
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
ing road, weather, and traffic conditions. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve Refuel at the next gas station
warning lamp comes on while mark. ( page 269).
driving.
< The red seat belt telltale illumi- The warning lamp reminds you to fasten Fasten your seat belt.
nates for a brief period after seat belts.
The warning lamp goes out.
starting the engine.
308
Practical hints
What to do if ?

H The yellow warning lamp for the The tire pressure monitor detects a loss of Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
tire pressure monitor comes on. pressure in at least one tire. abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
Observe the traffic situation around you.
Take note of the messages in the multi-
function display.
i
Warning! G Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- The recommended tire inflation pres-
cles handling and stopping ability. Each tire, sures for your vehicle can be found on
When the tire pressure monitoring system
including the spare, should be checked the inside of the fuel filler flap, not in
warning lamp is lit, one or more of your tires
monthly when cold and set to the recom- the owners manual.
is significantly under-inflated. You should
stop and check your tires as soon as possi- mended inflation pressure as specified in
ble, and inflate them to the proper pressure the vehicle placard and owners manual.
as indicated on the vehicles tire information
placard. Driving on a significantly under-in-
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure.
309
Practical hints
What to do if ?

1 The red SRS indicator lamp There is a malfunction in the restraint sys- Drive with added caution to the nearest
comes on while driving. tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
or fail to activate in an accident.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an acci-
dent, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could result in an acci-
dent and/or injury to you or to others.
310
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Lamp in center console

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the
lamp comes on. front passenger seat. Therefore the passen-
ger front airbag is switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when there is Have the system checked as soon as
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the possible by an authorized
front passenger seat. Mercedes-Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator The system is malfunctioning. Make sure that there is nothing between
lamp does not come on with a seat cushion and child seat and check
BabySmartTM1 child seat properly installed installation of the child seat.
on the front passenger seat.
If the light remains out, have the system
checked as soon as possible by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to
transport children on the front passen-
ger seat until the system has been re-
paired.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens AutomotiveCorp.
311
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Messages in the display i

Warning! G Turning the SmartKey in the starter
The control system shows warning and
switch to position 2, or pressing the
malfunction messages in the multifunction All categories of messages contain impor-
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice
display. tant information which should be taken note
causes all lamps as well as the multi-
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, ad-
Certain warning and malfunction messag- function display to come on. Make sure
dressed as soon as possible at an autho-
es are accompanied by an audible signal. that they are all in working order before
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Address these messages accordingly and starting your journey.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
follow the additional instructions given in damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
this Operators Manual. On the pages that follow, you will find a
Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
compilation of the most important warning
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in age or personal injury.
and malfunction messages that may ap-
the control system ( page 134) displays pear in the display. High priority messages
both cleared and uncleared messages. appear on a red background.
High-priority messages appear in the mul- Warning! G
tifunction display in red color.
No messages will be displayed if either the
Certain messages of high priority cannot instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
be cleared from the multifunction display play is inoperative.
using the reset button ( page 22).
Contact your nearest authorized
Other messages of high priority and mes- Mercedes-Benz Center.
sages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display us-
ing the reset button ( page 22). These are
then stored in the malfunction message
memory ( page 150).
312
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Text messages
Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution

ABC ACTIVE BODY CONTROL The capability of the ABC system is restrict- Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
DRIVE CAREFULLY! ed. This can impair the handling.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz center as
soon as possible.
The vehicle is losing oil. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
ACTIVE BODY CONTROL The vehicle is parked on an extremely Press the vehicle level control button to se-
STOP, CAR TOO LOW! uneven surface. lect level 2 ( page 221).
ABC is malfunctioning. Stop and press the vehicle level control but-
ton to select a higher vehicle level
( page 221).
Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid
damaging the front fenders.
Listen for scraping noises.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
soon as possible.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION The display for ABC or the ABC system itself Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
VISIT WORKSHOP! is malfunctioning. soon as possible.
313
Practical hints
What to do if ?

ABC ACTIVE BODY CONTROL The capability of the ABC system is restrict- Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
VISIT WORKSHOP! ed.
soon as possible.
ABS MALFUNCTION! The ABS has detected a malfunction and Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
VISIT WORKSHOP! has switched off. The ESP and the BAS are may lock during hard braking, reducing steer-
also deactivated. ing capability.
The brake system is still functioning nor- Have the system checked at an authorized
mally but without the ABS available. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION The ABS or the ABS display is malfunction- Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
VISIT WORKSHOP! ing. may lock during hard braking, reducing steer-
ing capability.
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
AIR FILTER CHANGE CARTRIDGE The air filter is clogged. Have the air filter checked by an authorized
VISIT WORKSHOP! Mercedes-Benz Center.
314
Practical hints
What to do if ?

CRUISE CON- CRUISE CONTROL Cruise control or Distronic* is malfunction- Have cruise control or Distronic* checked by
TROL VISIT WORKSHOP! ing. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
DISTRONIC EXTERNAL INTERFER- Distronic* is switched off and is temporarily Try activating Distronic* again later.
ENCE unavailable.
REACTIVATE!
CURRENTLY UNAVAIL- Distronic* is switched off because the Dis- Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator
ABLE tronic* cover in the radiator grille is dirty. grille ( page 299).
SEE OPER. MANUAL
Restart the vehicle.
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! Distronic* is malfunctioning or the display Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
is malfunctioning. soon as possible.
ESP MALFUNCTION! The ESP has detected a malfunction and Continue driving with added caution.
VISIT WORKSHOP! switched off.
The ABS may still be operational.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION The ESP or the ESP display is malfunction- Continue driving with added caution.
VISIT WORKSHOP! ing.
315
Practical hints
What to do if ?

ESP NOT AVAILABLE! The ESP was deactivated the power supply Synchronize the ESP. With the vehicle sta-
SEE OPER. MANUAL has been interrupted. tionary and the engine running, turn the
steering wheel completely to the left and
The ABS is still operational.
then to the right to synchronize the ESP.
If the ESP message does not go out:
Continue driving with added caution.
!
When synchronizing the ESP, make
sure you can turn the steering wheel in
both directions as far as it will go with-
out the wheel hitting any objects, e.g.
a road curb.
316
Practical hints
What to do if ?

P SHIFT You have tried to turn off the engine with Place the gear selector lever in position P.
TO P the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button with
the gear selector lever not in P.
PRE-SAFE INACTIVE If BAS or ESP malfunction messages are Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
SEE OPER. MANUAL! displayed simultaneously, PRE-SAFE has soon as possible.
been deactivated as a result of these mal-
functions. All other occupant safety sys-
tems, such as the airbags, are still available.
PRE-SAFE itself has failed. All other occu- Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
pant safety systems, such as the airbags, soon as possible.
are still available.
317
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Symbol messages
Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution

@ AIRMATIC The vehicle is parked on an extremely Press the vehicle level control button to
STOP, CAR TOO LOW! uneven surface. select the raised vehicle level
( page 219).
The vehicle level control is malfunction- Stop and press the vehicle level control
ing. button to select a higher vehicle level
( page 219).
Do not turn steering wheel too far to
avoid damaging the front fenders.
Listen for scraping noises.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz center
as soon as possible.
AIRMATIC The capability of the AIRMATIC system is Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
DRIVE CAREFULLY! restricted. (80 km/h).
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz center
as soon as possible.
318
Practical hints
What to do if ?

@ DISPLAY MALFUNCTION The display for AIRMATIC or the AIRMAT- Visit an authorized
VISIT WORKSHOP! IC system itself is malfunctioning. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possi-
ble.
AIRMATIC You have exceeded a speed of Press the vehicle level control button to
LEV. SEL. CANCELED! 75 mph (120 km/h). adjust the vehicle level ( page 219).
or
You have maintained a speed of be-
tween 50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph
(120 km/h) for more than 5 minutes.
319
Practical hints
What to do if ?

# BATTERY/ALTERNATOR The battery was charged with a battery Have the battery checked at a service
VISIT WORKSHOP! charger or jump started. station.
The battery is no longer charging. Stop immediately and check the
Possible causes: poly-V-belt.
alternator malfunctioning If it is broken:
broken poly-V-belt Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative
water pump which may result in damage
to the engine. Notify an authorized
If it is intact:
Drive immediately to the nearest autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driv-
ing to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
320
Practical hints
What to do if ?

2 BRAKE PAD WEAR The brake pads have reached their wear Have the brake pads replaced as soon as
VISIT WORKSHOP! limit. possible.
; BRAKE FLUID There is insufficient brake fluid in the res- Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and no-
(USA only) VISIT WORKSHOP! ervoir. tify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
3 Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve
(Canada only) the problem.
; PARK. BRAKE You are driving with the parking brake en- Release the parking brake ( page 45).
(USA only) RELEASE BRAKE! gaged.
!
(Canada only)
! !
Warning! G If you find that the brake fluid in the Brake pad thickness must be visually
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the checked by a qualified technician at the
Driving with this message displayed can re-
minimum mark or below, have the intervals specified in the Service Book-
sult in an accident. Have your brake system
brake system checked for brake pad let.
checked immediately. Dont add brake fluid
thickness and leaks.
before checking the brake system. Overfill-
ing the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
the brake fluid catching fire. You can be se-
riously burned.
321
Practical hints
What to do if ?

? VISIT WORKSHOP! There may be a malfunction in the: Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Fuel injection system
Ignition system
Exhaust system
Fuel system
B COOLANT The coolant level is too low. Add coolant ( page 278).
CHECK LEVEL!
If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Warning! G Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
the message and symbol displayed
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may cause serious engine damage not
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
Warranty.
Do not drive without a sufficient
amount of coolant in the cooling sys-
tem. The engine will overheat, causing
major engine damage.
322
Practical hints
What to do if ?

COOLANT The coolant is too hot. Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
Only start the engine again after the mes-
sage disappears. You could otherwise
damage the engine.
During severe operating conditions,

Warning! G e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to 248F (120C).
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
ed can cause some fluids which may have !
leaked into the engine compartment to The engine should not be operated with
catch fire. You could be seriously burned. the coolant temperature above 248F
Steam from an overheated engine can cause (120C). Doing so may cause serious
serious burns and can occur just by opening engine damage which is not covered by
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
323
Practical hints
What to do if ?

COOLANT The poly-V-belt could be broken. Stop immediately and check the
STOP, ENGINE OFF! poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative
water pump which may result in damage
to the engine. Notify an authorized
If it is intact:
Do not continue to drive the vehicle with
this message displayed. Doing so could
result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limit-
ed Warranty.
COOLANT The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc- Observe the coolant temperature display.
VISIT WORKSHOP! tioning.
Have the fan replaced as soon as possi-
ble.
324
Practical hints
What to do if ?

G DISPLAY MALFUNCTION The instrument cluster display is malfunc- Continue driving with added caution.
VISIT WORKSHOP! tioning.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter as soon as possible.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION Certain electronic systems are unable to Have the electronic systems checked by
VISIT WORKSHOP! relay information to the control system. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following systems may have failed:
Coolant temperature display
Tachometer
Cruise control display
J DOOR OPEN! You are attempting to drive with one or Close the doors.
more doors open.
325
Practical hints
What to do if ?

: USA only: The engine oil level is too low. Add engine oil ( page 277) and check
ADD 1.0 QT. ENGINE the engine oil level ( page 274).
OIL
AT NEXT REFUELING!
Canada only:
ADD 1.0 LITER ENGINE
OIL
AT NEXT REFUELING!
ENGINE OIL LEVEL There is no oil in the engine. There is a Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
STOP, ENGINE OFF! danger of engine damage. soon as possible.
Turn off the engine.
Add engine oil ( page 277) and check
the engine oil level ( page 274).
ENGINE OIL LEVEL You have added too much engine oil. Have excess oil siphoned or drained off.
REDUCE OIL LEVEL There is a risk of damaging the engine or Observe all legal requirements with re-
the catalytic converter. spect to its disposal.
326
Practical hints
What to do if ?

: ENGINE OIL It may be that there is water in the engine Have the engine oil level checked
VISIT WORKSHOP! oil. ( page 274).
ENGINE OIL LEVEL The engine oil has dropped to a critical Check the engine oil level ( page 274)
VISIT WORKSHOP! level. and add engine oil as required
( page 277).
If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
ENGINE OIL SENSOR The measuring system is malfunctioning. Have the measuring system checked by
VISIT WORKSHOP! an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
When the message ADD 1.0 QT. ENGINE When this occurs, the warning will first !
OIL AT NEXT REFUELING! (Canada: come on intermittently and then stay on if The engine oil level warnings should
1 Liter) appears while the engine is run- the oil level drops further. not be ignored. Extended driving with
ning and at operating temperature, the en- Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil the symbol displayed could result in
gine oil level has dropped to approximately leaks are noted, drive to the nearest ser- serious engine damage that is not
the minimum level. vice station where the engine oil should be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
topped to the required level with an ap- Warranty.
proved oil.
327
Practical hints
What to do if ?

_ ENTRY POSITION Seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel Wait until the seat, exterior mirrors and
DO NOT DRIVE! have not yet moved to their preset driving steering wheel have moved to their driv-
positions. ing positions.
The message will disappear.
Y HOOD OPEN! You are driving with the hood open. Close the hood ( page 273).
I REMOVE KEY! You have forgotten to remove the Remove the SmartKey from the ignition.
SmartKey.
REPLACE KEY! The batteries in the SmartKey are dead. Change the batteries ( page 349).
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
AUTOM. LIGHT ON Remove the SmartKey from the starter
REMOVE KEY! switch.
F KEY The battery in the KEYLESS-GO* key is Change the battery ( page 349).
CHECK BATTERY! discharged.
KEY SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not rec- Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
NOT RECOGNIZED! ognized while the engine is running be- so.
cause
Search for the SmartKey.
the SmartKey is not in the vehicle
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
there is strong radio-frequency inter- locked nor can the engine be started again
ference after it has been stopped.
328
Practical hints
What to do if ?

F KEY The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo- Change the position of the SmartKey with
NOT RECOGNIZED! mentarily not recognized. KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in
the starter switch if necessary.
KEY DETECTED A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
IN VEHICLE vehicle was recognized while locking the out of the vehicle.
vehicle from the outside.
KEY The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunction- Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! ing. ter as soon as possible.
. 3RD BRAKE LIGHT The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc- Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
CHECK LAMP! tioning. ter as soon as possible.
BRAKE LIGHT Brake lamp illumination is delayed or Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
VISIT WORKSHOP! lamp is permanently on. ter as soon as possible.
BRAKE LIGHT, L The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
CHECK LAMP! back-up bulb is being used. ter as soon as possible.
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
BRAKE LIGHT, R The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
CHECK LAMP! back-up bulb is being used. ter as soon as possible.
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION The display for the lamps or the system is Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
VISIT WORKSHOP! malfunctioning. ter as soon as possible.
329
Practical hints
What to do if ?

. FRONT FOGLAMP, L The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
CHECK LAMP! ter as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLAMP, R The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
FR. L. PARK. LAMP The left parking lamps are malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! ing. A back-up bulb is being used.
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
FR. R. PARK. LAMP The right parking lamps are malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! ing. A back-up bulb is being used.
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
HIGH BEAM, L The left high beam lamp is malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! ing.
HIGH BEAM, R The right high beam lamp is malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! ing.
LICENSE PLATE LAMP, L The left license plate lamp is malfunction- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! ing.
LICENSE PLATE LAMP, R The right license plate lamp is malfunc- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! tioning.
330
Practical hints
What to do if ?

. LIGHT SENSOR The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The In the control system, set lamp operation
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! headlamps switch on automatically. to manual ( page 154).
Switch on headlamps using the exterior
lamp switch.
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter as soon as possible.
LOW BEAM, L The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
LOW BEAM, R The right low beam lamp is malfunction- Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
CHECK LAMP! ing. ter as soon as possible.
MARKER LIGHT, FL The front left side marker lamp is mal- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! functioning.
MARKER LIGHT, FR The front right side marker lamp is mal- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! functioning.
REAR FOGLAMP The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP!
REVERSE LIGHT, L The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP!
REVERSE LIGHT, R The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP!
331
Practical hints
What to do if ?

. STANDING LIGHT, L The left standing lamp is malfunctioning. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! A back-up bulb is being used.
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
STANDING LIGHT, R The right standing signal lamp is malfunc- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! tioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
TAIL LIGHT, L The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! back-up bulb is being used.
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
TAIL LIGHT, R The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! back-up bulb is being used.
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
SWITCH OFF LIGHTS! Lamps have been turned on although the Turn off the headlamps.
SmartKey in the ignition is in position 0.
TURN SIGNAL F, L The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
TURN SIGNAL F, R The right front turn signal lamp is mal- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
CHECK LAMP! functioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
332
Practical hints
What to do if ?

. TURN SIGNAL, L The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
TURN SIGNAL, R The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!
TURN SIG. MIRROR, L The left turn signal in the side mirror is Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
CHECK LAMP! malfunctioning. This message will only ap- ter as soon as possible.
pear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
TURN SIG. MIRROR, R The right turn signal in the side mirror is Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
CHECK LAMP! malfunctioning. This message will only ap- ter as soon as possible.
pear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
< SEAT BELT SYSTEM The seat belt system is malfunctioning. Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
VISIT WORKSHOP! Center as soon as possible.
K CLOSE You have opened the drivers door with Close the sliding/pop-up roof
SUNROOF! the SmartKey removed from the starter ( page 199).
switch and the sliding/pop up roof open.
J CLOSE You have opened the drivers door with Close the sliding/pop-up roof
SUNROOF! the SmartKey removed from the starter ( page 199).
switch and the sliding/pop up roof open.
333
Practical hints
What to do if ?

L TELE AID One or more main functions of the Tele Have the Tele Aid system checked by an
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! Aid system are malfunctioning. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
TELE AID BATTERY The emergency power battery for the Tele Have the Tele Aid system checked by an
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! Aid system is malfunctioning. If the vehi- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
cle battery is also discharged, Tele Aid
will not be operational.
t FUNCTION This display appears if button t or
NOT AVAILABLE! s on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
TRUNK OPEN! This message will appear whenever the Close the trunk lid.
trunk lid is open.
W WASHER FLUID The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 Add washer fluid ( page 281).
CHECK LEVEL! of total reservoir capacity.
Warning! G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
334
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Tire pressure monitor messages

(vehicles produced up to approximately
October 2003)

H TIRE PRES. The tire pressure is being checked.
DISPLAY AFTER DRIVING
A FEW MINS. REACTIVATE
USING R-BUTTON
TIRE PRES. MONITOR The tire inflation pressure monitor* is un- Check the tire pressure at the next ser-
NOT ACTIVE able to monitor the tire pressure due to vice station.
the presence of several wheel sensors
in the vehicle.
excessive wheel sensor tempera-
tures.
a nearby radio interference source.
unrecognized wheel sensors mount-
ed.
Warning! G You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-

ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
335
Practical hints
What to do if ?

H TIRE PRES. MONITOR The tire inflation pressure monitor* is de- Activate the tire inflation pressure mon-
REACTIVATE! activated. itor* ( page 286).
TIRE PRES. MONITOR The tire inflation pressure monitor* is Have the tire inflation pressure moni-
VISIT WORKSHOP! malfunctioning. tor* checked by an authorized
Change the wheel ( page 361).
A wheel without proper sensor was in- Check and correct tire pressure as re-
stalled. quired ( page 283).
TIRE PRES. One or more tires are deflating. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT! avoiding abrubt steering and braking
maneuvers.
TIRE PRES. The tire pressure in one or more tires is Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
CHECK TIRES! already below the minimum value. avoiding abrubt steering and braking
maneuvers.
The tire pressure in one or more tires is
low. Change the wheel ( page 361).

336
Practical hints
What to do if ?

H TIRE PRES., RF The right front tire is deflating. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
maneuvers.
TIRE PRES., RF The right front tire pressure is low. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
CHECK TIRES!
Check the tire pressure.
TIRE PRES., LF The left front tire is deflating. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT! avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
TIRE PRES., LF The left front tire pressure is low. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
CHECK TIRES!

337
Practical hints
What to do if ?

H TIRE PRES., RR The right rear tire is deflating. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
maneuvers.
TIRE PRES., RR The right rear tire pressure is low. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
CHECK TIRES!
TIRE PRES., LR The left rear tire is deflating. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT! avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
TIRE PRES., LR The left rear tire pressure is low. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
CHECK TIRES!

338
Practical hints
What to do if ?
Tire pressure monitor messages

(vehicles produced as of approximately
October 2003)

H TIRE PRES. One or more tires are deflating. Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoid-
CAUTION, TIRE ing abrubt steering and braking maneu-
DEFECT! vers. Observe the traffic situation around
you
Repair or change the wheel ( page 361).
TIRE PRES. The pressure has fallen significantly in Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoid-
CHECK TIRES! one or more tires. ing abrubt steering and braking maneu-
vers. Observe the traffic situation around
you.
TIRE PRES. The pressure is too low in one or more Check and correct tire pressure as re-
PLEASE CORRECT! tires. quired ( page 283).

339
Practical hints
What to do if ?

H TIRE PRES., LF The left front tire is deflating. Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
CAUTION, TIRE abrubt braking maneuvers. Observe the
DEFECT! traffic situation around you.
TIRE PRES., LF The left front tire pressure is low. Bring the vehicle to a halt. Observe the
CHECK TIRES! traffic situation around you.
Check the tire.
Check and correct tire pressure as re-
quired.
TIRE PRES., RF The right front tire is deflating. Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding

340
Practical hints
What to do if ?

H TIRE PRES., RF The right front tire pressure is low. Bring the vehicle to a halt. Observe the
Check the tire.
quired.
TIRE PRES., LR The left rear tire is deflating. Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
TIRE PRES., LR The left rear tire pressure is low. Bring the vehicle to a halt. Observe the
Check the tire.
quired.

341
Practical hints
What to do if ?

H TIRE PRES., RR The right rear tire is deflating. Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
TIRE PRES., RR The right rear tire pressure is low. Bring the vehicle to a halt. Observe the
Check the tire.
quired.
TIRE PRES. MONITOR There was a tire pressure warning mes- Activate the tire pressure monitor after
REACTIVE AFTER sage. correcting the tire pressure values
CORRECTING PRESSURE! ( page 283).
The yellow warning lamp for the tire pres-
sure monitor comes on and you have not
reactivated the system since the last tire
pressure check.

342
Practical hints
What to do if ?

H TIRE PRES. MONITOR The tire pressure monitor is using the cur-
REACTIVATED rent pressure values as the basis for mon-
itoring.
TIRE PRES. MONITOR The tire inflation pressure monitor* is un- Remove any extra wheel sensors from the
CURRENTLY able to monitor the tire pressure due to: vehicle
UNAVAILABLE
the presence of several wheen sen- As soon as the causes of the malfunction
sors in the vehicle have been removed, the tire pressure moni-
tor automatically becomes active again.
excessive wheel sensor temperatures
a nearby radio interference source
unrecognized wheel sensors installed
TIRE PRES. MONITOR The tire pressure monitor or a wheel sen- Have the tire inflation pressure monitor
NOT OPERATIONAL sor is malfunctioning. checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP Center.
A wheel without proper sensor was in- Have the wheels checked.
stalled.

343
Practical hints
First aid kit Removing the first aid kit Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage
Press buttons 2 together and fold bowl, spare wheel
The first aid kit is located in the storage
lid 1 down.
compartments under the front passenger The spare wheel, the vehicle tools, and the
seat. Remove first aid kit. luggage bowl are stored in the compart-
ment underneath the trunk floor.
Storing the first aid kit
Place first aid kit in the storage com-
partments.
Close lid 1 until both buttons 2 of
lock engage.
i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
1 Lid
and replace missing/expired items.
2 Buttons 1 Jack
2 Storage tray with vehicle tool kit
3 Luggage bowl
4 Spare wheel
Lift up trunk floor cover and engage
trunk floor handle in upper edge of
trunk.
You can now remove the tools and ac-
cessories.
344
Practical hints
! Vehicle jack Storing the vehicle jack in the trunk

To prevent damage, always disengage Retract the vehicle jack arm to the
trunk floor handle from trunk lid and To prepare the vehicle jack for use
base of the vehicle jack.
lower trunk floor before closing the Remove the vehicle jack from the spare
Push the crank handle up.
trunk lid. wheel well under the trunk floor.
Turn the crank handle counterclock-
Push the crank handle up.
The vehicle tool kit includes: wise to the end of the stop (storage po-
Turn the crank handle clockwise until it sition).
One interchangeable slot/Phillips engages (operational position).
screwdriver
One towing eye bolt
One wheel bolt wrench with socket
wrench
One alignment bolt
One pair of gloves
One fuse extractor
One fuse chart for the main fuse box
Spare fuses
345
Practical hints
Spare wheel Spare wheel S 430, S 500 and S 600

Warning! G (except Sport Package*)
Removing the spare wheel
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full
Take out the vehicle tool kit tray 2. sized tire of the same type as on the vehi-
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
cle, and it is fully functional.
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help Loosen the luggage bowl 3. To do so,
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift turn the luggage bowl counterclock- However, that spare wheel rim is weight
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never wise optimized and has a limited service life of
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported 12000 miles (20000 km) use before a
Remove the spare wheel 4.
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from standard wheel rim must replace it.
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
Storing the spare wheel In case of flat tire, you may temporarily use
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
the spare wheel.
before raising vehicle with jack. Place spare wheel 4in wheel well.
Do not operate vehicle with more than one
Do not disengage parking brake while the Secure the spare wheel. To do so, turn
spare wheel mounted.
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is the luggage bowl 3 clockwise to its
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es- stop.
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
Place vehicle tool kit tray 2 in luggage
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
bowl.
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Al-
ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-
pacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
346
Practical hints
Spare wheel S 55 AMG and Sport

Warning! G Package* Warning! G
Never operate the vehicle with more than In case of a flat tire, you may temporarily The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif-
one spare wheel mounted. use the spare wheel when observing the ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
following restrictions: result, the vehicle handling characteristics
The spare wheel rim is for temporary use
only. Use for over a total of 12000 miles Do not exceed a vehicle speed of change when driving with a mounted spare
(20000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may 50 mph (80 km/h). wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
cause wheel rim failure leading to an acci- Drive to the nearest tire repair facility Never operate the vehicle with more than
dent and possible injuries. to have the flat tire repaired or re- one spare wheel mounted.
The spare wheel should only be used tempo- placed as appropriate. The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
rarily and replaced with a regular road wheel Do not operate vehicle with more than When driving with spare wheel mounted, en-
as quickly as possible. one spare wheel mounted. sure proper tire pressure and do not exceed
vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km).
For more information, see Rims and tires The spare wheel rim is for temporary use
( page 384). only. Use for over a total of 12000 miles
(20000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may
cause wheel rim failure leading to an acci-
dent and possible injuries.
The spare wheel should only be used tempo-
rarily and replaced with a regular road wheel
as quickly as possible.
For more information, see Rims and tires

( page 384).
347
Practical hints
Unlocking the vehicle Unlocking the drivers door
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with

the SmartKey, open the drivers door and
the trunk using the mechanical key.
i
Unlocking your vehicle with the me-
chanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the fol- 1 Mechanical key locking tab
lowing: 2 Mechanical key 1 Unlocking
2 Locking
With SmartKey Move locking tab 1 in direction of ar-
row and slide the mechanical key 2 Unlock the door with the mechanical
Press button or on the
out of the housing. key. To do so, push the mechanical key
SmartKey.
into the lock until it stops and turn it to
Insert the SmartKey in the starter the left.
switch.
With KEYLESS-GO*
button ( page 33).
Grasp the outside door handle
( page 55).
348
Practical hints
Unlocking the trunk Turn the mechanical key counterclock- Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
A minimum height clearance of 6 ft. wise to position 1. SmartKey ( page 348).
(1.85 m) is required to open the trunk lid. The trunk unlocks and opens. Lock the drivers door with the me-
chanical key ( page 348).
If you are unable to unlock the trunk with !
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the Lock the trunk lid if necessary with the
The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
trunk with the mechanical key. mechanical key (if applicable)
The trunk lid lock is located above the rear ( page 105).
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
license plate recess.
Replacing batteries in the SmartKey/
Locking the vehicle SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with If the batteries in the SmartKey or the
the SmartKey or the SmartKey with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are dis-
KEYLESS-GO*, lock it with the mechanical charged, the vehicle can no longer be
key as follows: locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
Close the passenger doors and the have the batteries replaced at an autho-
trunk lid. rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Press the central locking switch in the
1 Unlocking and opening center console ( page 107). Warning! G
Insert the mechanical key into the Check to see whether the locking knob
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
trunk lid lock. on the passenger door is still visible. If
necessary push it down manually. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
349
Practical hints
Batteries contain materials that can harm i

the environment if disposed of improperly. When changing batteries, always re-
Recycling of batteries is the preferred place both batteries.
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries The required replacement batteries are
for recycling. available at any authorized
SmartKey
Remove mechanical key 1
( page 348).
Insert the mechanical key 1 in side 3 Battery
opening and push gray slide. 4 Contact spring
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
The battery compartment is unlatched.
batteries 3 under the contact
Pull the battery compartment 2 out of spring 4 with the plus (+) side facing
the SmartKey housing in direction of up.
arrow.
Return battery compartment into hous-
Remove the batteries. ing until it locks into place.
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
350
Practical hints
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Replacement battery: Lithium, type Fuel filler flap
CR 2025 or equivalent.
In case the central locking system does
Remove mechanical key ( page 348).
not release the fuel filler flap, you can it
Insert the mechanical key in side open- manually.
ing and push gray slide.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
Pull the battery compartment out of the
SmartKey housing.
Using mechanical key 3, apply pres-
1 Battery sure to position 2.
2 Tilt battery up Battery 1 tilts up slightly.
3 Mechanical key
Pull out battery 1 in direction of ar-
i row. 1 Release knob
The required replacement battery is Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat- Open the trunk.
available at any authorized tery with the plus (+) side facing up.
Mercedes-Benz Center. Remove the trim inside the trunk on the
Return battery compartment into hous- right-hand side.
ing until it locks into place.
Pull release knob 1 in the direction of
arrow.
The fuel filler flap can be opened.
351
Practical hints
Sliding/pop-up roof Pry off lens 1 using a flat blade srew- Insert crank 2 through hole.
driver ( page 344).
Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
You can open or close the sliding/pop-up
roof manually should an electrical malfunc- close slide roof
to position 1 or 2.
tion occur. raise roof at the rear
Remove the crank from the operators
The driving mechanism for the slid- Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
manual pouch.
ing/pop-up roof is located behind the lens
of the interior overhead light. open slide roof
lower roof at the rear
The sliding/pop-up roof must be resyn-
chronized after being operated manually
( page 202).
2 Crank
1 Lens
352
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper Bulbs Front lamps
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as- Lamp Type
semblies are in good working order at all 1 Additional turn sig- LED
times. nal lamps
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely 2 Low beam1 H7-55 W
important. Have headlamps checked and Bi -Xenon*
readjusted at regular intervals and when a D2S-35 W
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
3 Turn signal lamp 2357 A
Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp ad-
justment. 4 Fog lamp H7-55 W
5 Parking and stand- W5W
i ing lamp
Backup bulbs will be brought into use
6 Side marker lamp W5W
when the following lamps malfunction:
7 High beam H7-55 W
Turn signal lamps
1
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps*: Low beam
Brake lamps and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do
Parking lamps not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. See an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tail lamps
353
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
Lamp Type
Warning! G Switch lights off before changing a bulb
8 Brake lamp LED to prevent short circuits.
9 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
a Tail and standing P 21/4 W Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al- handling bulbs.
lamp, side marker low the lamp to cool down before changing
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
a bulb.
b Backup lamp P 21 W and grease.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
c License plate lamps C 5 W If the newly installed bulb does not
bulb can explode if you:
d Tail lamp, Rear fog P 21/4 W come on, visit an authorized
touch or move it when hot Mercedes-Benz Center.
lamp
drop the bulb
e High mounted brake LED Have the LEDs and bulbs for the follow-
scratch the bulb ing lamps replaced by an authorized
lamp
Wear eye and hand protection. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon lamps, Additional turn signal lamps in the
it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair exterior rear view mirrors
the lamp and its components. We recom-
High mounted brake lamp
mend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician. Bi-Xenon lamps*
Front fog lamps
354
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps Replacing low beam bulbs
Bi-Xenon* headlamp
Warning! G
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
repair the lamp and its components. We rec-
4 Bulb socket for fog lamp ommend that you have such work done by a
5 Bulb socket for parking and standing qualified technician.
1 Headlamp cover for fog lamp lamp
2 Headlamp cover for high beam halogen 6 Electrical connector for high beam
headlamp bulb, parking and standing halogen headlamp bulb Halogen headlamp
lamp 7 Electrical connector for low beam Switch off the lights.
3 Headlamp cover for Bi-Xenon* (low and headlamp bulb
high beam) or halogen (low beam) Open the hood ( page 272).
8 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
headlamp bulb Press the tab on cover 3 and remove
cover.
Pull connector 7 off of the lamp.
Release the retaining springs and take
out the bulb.
355
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Insert the new bulb in the socket so Replacing halogen high beam bulbs Front turn signal lamp bulb
that the base is in the recess on the
Switch off the lights. Switch off the lights.
lower left.
Open the hood ( page 272). Open the hood ( page 272).
Attach the retaining springs.
Press the tab on cover 2 and remove Twist bulb socket 8 counterclockwise
Insert connector 7 into the bulb. cover. and pull out.
Press cover 3 onto the housing until Pull connector 6 off of the bulb. Gently push bulb into socket, turn
the tab engages. counterclockwise and remove.
Apply pressure on the bulb contacts
from above until the bulb releases from Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
the retaining springs. twist clockwise.
Remove bulb. Reinstall bulb socket in lamp and twist
clockwise until it engages.
Insert the new bulb in the socket with
the marking facing upward.
Press the bulb upward on the contacts
until it engages in the retaining springs.
Insert connector 6 onto the bulb.
Press cover 2 onto the housing until
the tab engages.
356
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Parking and standing lamp bulb Side marker lamp bulb Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.
Switch off the lights. Insert new bulb in socket.
Open the hood ( page 272). Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist
clockwise.
Press the tab on cover 2 and remove
cover. To reinstall lamp, set rear end in
bumper and let front end snap into
Pull out the bulb socket 5 with the
place.
bulb.
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
Insert a new bulb in the socket.
Switch off the lights.
Reinstall the bulb socket.
Carefully slide lamp towards rear.
Press cover 2 onto the housing until
Remove front end first.
the tab engages.
Twist bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out.
357
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps Switch off the lights. License plate lamp
Open trunk.
Tail lamp assemblies Turn the catch, and move the trim to
the side.
Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull out.
Gently twist bulb counterclockwise and
pull out of bulb holder.
Insert new bulb into the holder and turn
it clockwise. 1 Screws
Reinstall bulb socket. Switch off the lights.
1 Turn signal lamp (white socket) The bulb socket should audibly click. Loosen both screws 1 and remove
2 Tail, parking, standing, and side marker lamp.
lamp (red socket) Replace trim and secure with lock.
3 Tail lamp, rear fog lamp (red socket) Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall
4 Backup lamp (black socket) it.
Retighten the screws.
358
Practical hints
! Removing wiper blades Fold the wiper arm forward until it
To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper snaps into place.
Turn SmartKey in starter switch
arms should only be folded forward
when in the vertical position. position 1.
Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II ( page 48).
With wiper arm in vertical position, turn
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 0.
Warning! G
Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from wiper arm (arrow 1).
starter switch before replacing a wiper Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly the retainer in the direction of
Wiper blades in vertcal position
turn on and cause injury. arrow 2.
359
Practical hints
Installing wiper blades !

Never open the hood when the wiper
Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm arm is folded forward.
until it locks in place
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
Rotate the wiper blade into position wiper arm back. If released, the force
parallel to wiper arm. of the impact from the tensioning
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on spring could crack the windshield.
the windshield. Make sure you hold Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
onto the wiper when folding the wiper the windshield glass without a wiper
arm back. blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
360
Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle Vehicles with SmartKey with Mounting the spare wheel
KEYLESS-GO*:
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
Turn off the engine by pressing the
moving traffic on a hard surface.
KEYLESS-GO* button on the gear se-
Warning! G
Turn on the hazard warning flashers. lector lever once ( page 54).
Never operate the vehicle with more than
Turn the steering wheel so that the Open the drivers door (this puts the one spare wheel mounted.
front wheels are in a straight ahead starter switch in position 0, same as The spare wheel rim is for temporary use
position. with the SmartKey removed from the only. Use for over a total of 12 000 miles
Set the parking brake. starter switch). The drivers door then (20 000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may
can be closed again. cause wheel rim failure leading to an acci-
Move the gear selector lever to P.
dent and possible injuries.
Vehicles with SmartKey: i
Open door only when conditions are The spare wheel should only be used tempo-
Turn off the engine ( page 53). rarily and replaced with a regular road wheel
safe to do so.
Remove the SmartKey from the starter as quickly as possible.
switch. Have any passenger exit the vehicle at S 55 AMG and Sport Package* only:
a safe distance from the roadway. The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted, en-
sure proper tire pressure and do not exceed
vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif-
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a mounted spare
wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
361
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle

Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle
Warning! G
jack out of trunk . The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
Take the spare wheel out of wheel well up the vehicle at the jack tubes built both
( page 344). sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal
injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle
Lifting the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath
the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
Keep hands and feet away from the area un-
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
der the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set park- Take the two-piece wheel wrench out
(not included) or other sizable objects.
ing brake and block wheels before raising of the vehicle tool kit tray. Assemble
When changing wheel on a level surface: vehicle with jack. wheel wrench.
Place one chock in front of and one be- Do not disengage parking brake while the On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
hind the wheel that is diagonally oppo- vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap-
site to the wheel being changed. always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es- proximately one full turn with wrench).
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
When changing wheel on a hill: The tube openings are located directly be-
on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
Place chocks behind the downhill sides fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower hind the front wheel housings and in front
of both wheels of the axle not being the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jack- of the rear wheel housings.
worked on. stands before working under the vehicle.
362
Practical hints
Flat tire
Keeping jack in this position, turn

crank 3 clockwise until the jack base
meets the ground. Make sure the jack
is vertical (plumb line).
Continue to turn the crank until the tire
is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.
Warning! G
1 Jack support tube cover 1 Jack support tube hole
2 Jack arm The jack is intended only for lifting the vehi-
Move cover 1 toward rear by pressing
3 Crank cle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited
at point indicated by arrow. for performing maintenance work under the
Insert jack arm 2 fully into tube
Remove cover 1 carefully to avoid vehicle.
hole 1 up to the stop.
damage to the locking tabs. Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.
Warning! G Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
Insert the jack arm fully into the jack sup-
port tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise the
vehicle may fall from the jack and cause per-
sonal injury or damage to the vehicle.
363
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel Mounting the new wheel Guide the spare wheel onto the align-
ment bolt and push it on.
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub. Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
!
Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
against hub and hold it there while in-
stalling first wheel bolt.
Warning! G
Warning! G Use only genuine equipment
1 Alignment bolt Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and re- Always replace wheel bolts that are dam- bolts may come loose.
move. aged or rusted. Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve-
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
tip over.
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit. Damaged wheel hub threads should be re-
paired immediately. Do not continue to drive
Remove the remaining bolts.
under these circumstances! Contact an au-
! thorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. Roadside Assistance.
This could result in damage to the bolt Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
and wheel hub threads. ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident.
Remove the wheel. Make sure you are using the correct wheel
bolts.
364
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle Replacing jack support tube cover

Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
Warning! G Slide tongue of cover under the upper
terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful- Have the tightening torque checked after edge of the tube opening.
ly on its own weight. changing a wheel. The wheels could come Applying even pressure, press cover
Remove the jack. loose if they are not tightened to a torque of until it snaps into place. Be careful not
110 lb-ft. (150 Nm). to damage the locking tabs or clamp
the plastic retaining strap.
Before storing the jack in the trunk, it
!
should be fully collapsed, with handle
folded in. You can also screw the faulty wheel
down into the spare wheel well in the
Place the wheel bolt wrench, alignment trunk.
bolt and jack back in the vehicle tool kit
in the trunk and close the covering lid. Do not activate the tire inflation pres-
sure monitor* until the depressurized
tire is no longer in the vehicle.
1 - 5 Wheel bolts
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol-
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat-
ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
365
Practical hints
Battery
Battery
! The battery is located on the right side of
Warning! G Never loosen or detach battery termi- the trunk under the battery cover.
nal clamps while the engine is running
Failure to follow these instructions can re-
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
sult in severe injury or death.
Otherwise the alternator and other
Never lean over batteries while connecting, electronic components could be se-
you might get injured. verely damaged.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not Have the battery checked regularly by
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately Refer to Service Booklet for mainte-
flush affected area with water and seek nance intervals or contact an autho-
medical help if necessary. rized Mercedes-Benz Center for further 1 Battery cover
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, information.
which is flammable and explosive. Keep Pull on the outer, right-hand side of
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid cover 1 and remove it in the direction
improper connection of jumper cables, Warning! G of the arrow.
smoking, etc.
With a disconnected battery
you will no longer be able to turn the
Warning! G SmartKey in the starter switch and
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
Do not place metal objects on the battery as button on the gear selector lever will
this could result in a short circuit. have no effect
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk the gear selector lever will remain
of acid burns in the event of an accident. locked in position P
366
Practical hints
Battery
Disconnecting the battery Charging and reinstalling battery
Turn off all electrical consumers. Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
Open the trunk lid ( page 97).
manufacturer.
Remove the battery cover 1.
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
Use a 10 mm open-end wrench to dis- the previously described steps in re-
connect the battery negative lead 3. verse order.
Remove cover from the positive
2 Positive terminal terminal 2. Warning! G
3 Negative terminal Disconnect the battery positive
lead 2. Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg-
Removing the battery ing and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
Remove the screw securing the bat-
tery.
Remove the battery support and
bracket.
Take out the battery.
367
Practical hints
Battery
Reconnecting the battery i Batteries contain materials that can harm

The following procedures must be car- the environment if disposed of improperly.
Turn off all electrical consumers. Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
ried out following any interruption of
Connect the positive lead and fasten its battery power (e.g. due to reconnect- lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
cover 2. ing): method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
Connect negative lead 3. Set the clock (see COMAND opera- for recycling.
tors manual).
!
Resynchronize the ESP
Never invert the terminal connections.
( page 316).
! Resynchronize side windows

( page 198).
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed Resynchronize sliding/pop-up roof
when the vehicle is in operation. ( page 202).
Resynchronize rear seats if they
were adjusted five seconds or less
before the battery was disconnect-
ed .
368
Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can !
Warning! G be started with jumper cables and the bat- Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at-
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow- tempts.
Failure to follow these directions will cause ing:
damage to the electronic components, and Do not attempt to start the engine us-
Jump starting should only be performed ing a battery quick charge unit.
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death. when the engine and catalytic convert-
er are cold. If engine does not run after several un-
Never lean over batteries while connecting successful starting attempts, have it
or jump starting, you might get injured. Do not start the engine if the battery is checked at the nearest authorized
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, Only use 12 volt battery to jump start Excessive unburned fuel generated by
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately your vehicle. Jump starting with a more repeated failed starting attempts may
flush affected area with water, and seek powerful battery could damage the ve- damage the catalytic converter and
medical help if necessary. hicles electrical system, which will not may present a fire risk.
be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, Make sure the jumper cables do not
ited Warranty.
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep have loose or missing insulation.
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid Only use jumper cables with sufficient
improper connection of jumper cables, cross-section and insulated terminal Make sure the cable clamps do not
smoking, etc. clamps. touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery Always make sure that the jumper ca-
can result in it exploding, causing personal bles are not on or near pulleys, fans or
injury. other parts that move when an engine
!
is started or running. Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
369
Practical hints
Jump starting
!
Warning! G Never invert the terminal connections.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke. Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
tions when handling automotive batteries Connect negative terminals 2 and 4
( page 366). of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 4
first.
The battery is located on the right side of
the trunk under the battery cover Start the engine of the disabled vehi-
( page 366). cle.
Make sure the two vehicles do not Now you can again turn on the electrical
touch. consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
1 Positive terminal of discharged battery any circumstances.
Turn off all electrical consumers.
2 Negative terminal of discharged Remove the jumper cables first from
Apply parking brake. battery negative terminals 2 and 4 and then
Shift gear selector lever to position P. 3 Positive terminal of charged battery from positive terminals 1 and 3.
4 Negative terminal of charged battery
Open the trunk lid. You can now turn on the lights.
Connect positive terminals 1 and 3
Remove battery cover ( page 366). Have the battery checked at the near-
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Remove red cover from positive Clamp cable to charged battery 3 est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
terminal 1. first.
370
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehi- When circumstances do not permit the !
cle be transported with all wheels off the recommended towing methods, the vehi- If the vehicle is towed with the front
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel cle may be towed with all wheels on the axle raised (not permissible for vehicles
lift/dolly equipment. This method is pref- ground or front wheels raised (except vehi- with 4MATIC), the engine must be shut
erable to other types of towing. cles with 4MATIC) only so far as necessary off (SmartKey in starter switch
to have the vehicle moved to a safe loca- position 0 or 1). Otherwise the ESP will
! tion where the recommended towing immediately be engaged and will apply
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip- methods can be employed. the rear wheel brakes.
ment with SmartKey in starter switch
turned to position 0. ! When towing the vehicle with all wheels
Vehicles with 4MATIC: on the ground, the selector lever must
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing be in position N and the SmartKey
Towing with sling-type equipment over
so could damage the transfer case, must be in starter switch position 2.
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports. which is not covered by the Mer- When towing the vehicle with all wheels
cedes-Benz Limited Warranty. on the ground or the front axle raised,
To prevent damage during transport, the vehicle may be towed only for dis-
All wheels must be on or off the ground.
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or tances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
Observe instructions for towing the ve-
suspension parts. speed not to exceed 30 mph
hicle with all wheels on the ground.
Switch off the tow-away alarm (50 km/h).
( page 85) and the automatic central
locking ( page 106).
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
371
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
! If the SmartKey is left in starter switch i

To be certain to avoid a possibility of position 0 for an extended period of time, it To signal turns while being towed with
damage to the drive train, however, we can no longer be turned in the switch. In this the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
recommend the drive shaft be discon- case, the steering is locked. To unlock, re- SmartKey in starter switch to
nected at the rear axle drive flange (ve- move SmartKey from starter switch and reposition 2 and activate the combina-
hicles with 4MATIC: disconnected at insert. tion switch for the left or right turn sig-
the front and rear axle drive flanges) for nal in the usual manner only the
any towing beyond a short tow to a selected turn signal will operate.
nearby garage. Warning! G Upon canceling the turn signal, the haz-
ard warning flasher will operate again.
Warning! G power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
If circumstances require towing the vehicle in mind that a considerably higher degree of
with all wheels on the ground, always tow effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
with a tow bar if: hicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
the engine will not run
there is a malfunction in the power sup- i
ply or in the vehicles electrical system The gear selector lever will remain
as that will be necessary to adequately con- locked in position P and the SmartKey
trol the towed vehicle. will not turn in the starter switch if the
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on battery is disconnected or discharged.
the ground, make certain that the SmartKey See notes on the battery ( page 366)
is in starter switch position 2. or on jump starting ( page 369).
372
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
! Installing towing eye bolt Removing cover

When towing the vehicle with all wheels Press mark on cover in direction of ar-
on the ground, please note the follow- row.
ing:
Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for
With the automatic central locking acti- towing eye bolt.
vated and the SmartKey in starter
switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO* Installing towing eye bolt
start/stop button in position 2, the ve-
Take towing eye bolt and wheel wrench
hicle doors lock if the left front wheel
out of trunk ( page 344).
as well as the right rear wheel are turn-
ing at vehicle speeds of approximately Screw towing eye bolt clockwise into
9 mph (15 km/h) or more. 1 Cover on right side of front bumper its stop and tighten with wheel wrench.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
Removing towing eye bolt
( page 85).
Loosen towing eye bolt counterclock-
To prevent the vehicle doors from lock-
wise with wheel wrench.
ing, deactivate the automatic central
locking ( page 106). Unscrew towing eye bolt.
Towing of the vehicle should only be Store towing eye bolt and wheel
done using the properly installed tow- wrench in trunk.
ing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis, Installing cover
frame or suspension parts. 2 Cover on right side of rear bumper
Fit cover and snap into place.
373
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
Your vehicles electrical fuses are located i Fuse boxes in passenger compartment
in various fuse boxes: Only install fuses that have been tested
There are two fuse boxes. One fuse box is
In the dashboard on the passenger side and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
located in the dashboard on the front pas-
that have the specified amperage rat-
In the rear passenger compartment un- senger side. An additional fuse box is lo-
ing.
der the right rear seat cated under the right rear seat.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
In the engine compartment on the driv-
blown fuse. Have the cause determined Fuse box in dashboard
ers side
and remedied by an authorized
In the engine compartment on the pas- Mercedes-Benz Center.
senger side
The following implements are located in
the vehicle tool kit in the trunk
( page 344):
The fuse chart. The amperages of the
fuses are also given there.
Spare fuses
Special fuse extractor 1 Recess in the cover
2 Cover
374
Practical hints
Fuses
! Fuse box in the rear passenger Fuse boxes in engine compartment

Do not use sharp objects such as a compartment
screw driver to open the fuse box in the There are fuse boxes located in the engine
dashboard, as this could damage it. compartment on both the drivers and
front passenger side in front of the firewall
(dividing wall between engine compart-
Opening
ment and passenger compartment).
Open the front passenger door.
Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in
recess 1 on the edge of cover 2.
Loosen cover 2 from the dashboard
using lever. 1 Cover
Using your hands, pull cover 2 in the
direction of the arrow and remove. Opening
Pull cover 1 away from fuse box in di-
Closing rection of arrow.
1 Fuse box cover, drivers side
Press cover 2 back onto the dash- Remove cover rearward. 2 Slide
board.
Closing
Press cover back on until it engages.
375
Practical hints
Fuses
Closing Emergency engine shut-down

Replace cover 1 and press it down by
If the engine can no longer be stopped us-
hand.
ing the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO*
Push both slides 2 to the sym- start/stop button, the engine can be
bol. turned off by withdrawing two fuses.
! For easy removal of fuses, use the fuse
The cover must fit properly and the extractor (supplied with vehicle tool kit) to
slide must be positioned at the pull out the fuses marked on the fuse chart
symbol, as moisture or dirt may impair as "ENGINE EMERGENCY STOP".
1 Fuse box cover, front passenger side
2 Slide the functionality of the fuses. The fuse chart is also located in the vehicle
tool kit ( page 344).
Opening
Push both slides 2 to the sym-
bol.
Remove cover 1.
376
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions and weights
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Consumer information
377
Technical data
Spare parts service
Spare parts service
The Technical data section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers !
necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of genuine The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz parts required for mainte- parts and accessories not authorized
nance and repair work. In addition, strate- by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
gically located parts distribution centers vehicle, which is not covered by the
provide quick and reliable parts service. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
More than 300 000 different spare parts could compromise the vehicles dura-
for Mercedes-Benz models are available. bility or safety.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject-
ed to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, man-
ufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
378
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts Information Booklet
Warranty Information booklet. Your and Accessories warranties, copies of
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will ex- which are available at any authorized Should you lose your Service and Warranty
change or repair any defective parts origi- Mercedes-Benz Center. Information booklet, have an authorized
nally installed on the vehicle in accordance Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a re-
with the terms of the following warranties: placement. It will be mailed to you.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emission System Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
379
Technical data
1 Certification label 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 3 Engine number (engraved on engine)
(below drivers door latch) (below right rear passenger seat) 4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
5 Emission control label
6 Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission con-
trol system
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
380
Technical data
S 430 / S 500 (all models) S 55 AMG S 600
1 Automatic belt tensioner The S 55 AMG has two poly-V-belts (belt one 1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 ABC tandem pump (pump for shown in purple/belt two shown in black). 2 ABC tandem pump (pump for
power-steering assistance and ABC 1 Idler pulley power-steering assistance and ABC
chassis) 2 Automatic belt tensioner chassis)
3 Air conditioning compressor 3 ABC tandem pump (pump for 3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft power-steering assistance and ABC 4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump chassis) 5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator) 4 Air conditioning compressor 6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley 5 Crankshaft 7 Idler pulley
6 Coolant pump 8 Idler pulley
7 Generator (alternator) 9 Idler pulley
8 Idler pulley
9 Automatic belt tensioner
a Supercharger
381
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model S 430 (220.070, 220.170)1 S 500 (220.175)1
S 430 4MATIC (220.183)1 S 500 4MATIC (220.184)1
Engine 113 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8 8
Bore 3.54 in (89.90 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 260.3 cu in (4266 cm ) 303.0 cu in (4966 cm3)
Compression ratio 10:1 10:1
2
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 275 hp/5750 rpm 302 hp/5600 rpm2
(205 kW/5750 rpm) (225 kW/5600 rpm)
Maximum torque 295 lb-ft/3000 - 4400 rpm 339 lb-ft/2700 - 4250 rpm
acc. to SAE J 1349 (400 Nm/3000 - 4400 rpm) (460 Nm/2700 - 4250 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2380 mm 2380 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
2
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
382
Technical data
Engine
Model S 55 AMG (220.174)1 S 600 (220.176)1

Engine 113 275
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8 12
Bore 3.82 in (97.00 mm) 3.23 in (82.00 mm)
Stroke 3.60 in (92.00 mm) 3.43 in (87.00 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 331.8 cu in (5439 cm ) 336.4 cu in (5513 cm3)
Compression ratio 9:1 9:1
2
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 493 hp/6 100 rpm 493 hp/5000 rpm 2
(368 kW/6100 rpm) (368 kW/5000 rpm)
Maximum torque 516 lb-ft/2750 - 4000 rpm 590 lb-ft/1 800 - 3500 rpm
acc. to SAE J 1349 (700 Nm/2750 - 4000 rpm) (800 Nm/1 800 - 3500 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm 5950 rpm
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9
Poly-V-belt Belt one: 1289 mm 2335 mm
Belt two: 2462 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
2
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
383
Technical data
Rims and tires
Rims and tires
Use only tires and rims which have been ! i
specifically developed for your vehicle and Moreover, tires and rims not approved Further information on tires and rims is
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, ex- available at any authorized
Other tires and rims can have detrimental hibit dimensional variations and differ- Mercedes-Benz Center. A tire inflation
effects, such as: ent tire deformation characteristics pressure table is located on the fuel fill-
Poor handling characteristics that could cause them to come into er flap of the vehicle. The tire pressure
contact with the vehicle body or axle should be checked regularly and
Increased noise
parts. This may result in damage to the should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Increased fuel consumption tires or the vehicle. Follow tire manufacturers mainte-
nance recommendation included with
vehicle.
384
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
S 430, S 430 4MATIC S 600 S 430, S 430 4MATIC

S 500, S 500 4MATIC (except Sport Package* and S 500, S 500 4MATIC
(except Sport Package* and except Appearance S 600
except Appearance Package*) (Appearance Package*)
Package*)
Rims (light alloy) 7 J x17 H2 8 J x18 H21 8 J x18 H21
Wheel offset 1.81 in (46 mm) 1.73 in (44 mm) 1.73 in (44mm)
1
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) - 245/45 R18 96Y 245/45 R18 96Y1
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R17 97H M+S - -
1
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R17 97H M+S 245/45 R18 100V XL M+S 245/45 R18 100V XL M+S1
or or
245/45 R18 96H M+S1 245/45 R18 96H M+S1
1 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
385
Technical data
Rims and tires
S 430, S 500 S 430 4MATIC, S 500 4MATIC

S 600 (Sport Package*)
(Sport Package*)
S 55 AMG
Rims (light alloy) 8 J x18 H22 8 J x18 H21,2 or 8 J x18 EH23
or
8 J x18 EH23
Wheel offset 1.73 in (44mm) 1.73 in (44 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) - 245/45 R18 100Y XL
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) - -
2
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 245/45 R18 100V XL M+S 245/45 R18 100V XL M+S2
or or
245/45 R18 96H M+S2 245/45 R18 96H M+S2
1
For use with winter tires only
2
For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
3
Must not be used with snow chains
386
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
S 430 , S 500, S 600 (Sport Package*) S 55 AMG

Front axle: AMG light alloy rims 8 J x 18 EH21 8 J x 18 EH21
Wheel offset 1.73 in (44 mm) 1.73 in (44 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/45 R18 100Y XL 245/45 R18 100Y XL
or
245/45 R18 96Y
Rear axle: AMG light alloy rims 9 J x 18 EH21 9 J x 18 EH21
1
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 265/40 R18 101Y XL 265/40 R18 101Y XL1
or
265/40 R18 97Y 1
1 Must not be used with snow chains
387
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
S 430, S 430 4MATIC S 430, S 430 4MATIC, S 500, S 500 4MATIC

S 500, S 500 4MATIC (Sport Package* and Appearance Package*),
(except Sport Package* and except S 600, S 55 AMG
Appearance Package*)
Rims (light alloy) 7 J x 17 H2 8 J x 18 H2
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) - 245/45 R18 96Y
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R17 97H M+S -
388
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model S 430, S 500 S 55 AMG S 600
Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/180 A 14 V/220 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/1.7 kW
Battery 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch F 8 DPP 332 NGK IL FR 6 A NGK IFR 6Q-G
NGK PFR 5 R-11
Electrode gap 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.028 in (0.7 mm)
Tightening torque 15 22 lb-ft (20 30 Nm) 18 22 lb-ft (25 30 Nm) 15 22 lb-ft (20 30 Nm)
389
Technical data
Main dimensions
Model S 430 (220.070) S 430 (220.170) S 55 AMG (220.174) S 600 (220.176)

S 430 4MATIC (220.183)
S 500 (220.175)
S 500 4MATIC (220.184)
Overall vehicle length 198.3 in (5038 mm) 203.1 in (5158 mm) 203.1 in (5158 mm) 203.1 in (5158 mm)
Overall vehicle width 73.0 in (1855 mm) 73.0 in (1855 mm) 73.0 in (1855 mm) 73.0 in (1855 mm)
Overall vehicle height 57.2 in (1454 mm) 57.2 in (1454 mm) 57.2 in (1454 mm) 57.4 in (1457 mm)
Wheelbase 116.7 in (2965 mm) 121.5 in (3085 mm) 121.5 in (3085 mm) 121.5 in (3085 mm)
Track, front 62.0 in (1574 mm) 62.0 in (1574 mm) 62.1 in (1578 mm) 62.0 in (1574 mm)
Track, rear 62.0 in (1574 mm) 62.0 in (1574 mm) 62.1 in (1578 mm) 62.0 in (1574 mm)
Weights
Max. roof load 220 lbs (100 kg)

Max. trunk load 220 lbs (100 kg)
390
Technical data
Capacities Vehicle components and their respective Please refer to the Factory Approved Ser-
lubricants must match. Therefore use only vice Products pamphlet, or inquire at your
brands tested and approved by us. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine with oil filter S 430 8.5 US qt. (8.0 l) Approved engine oils
S 500 8.5 US qt. (8.0 l)
S 55 AMG 7.9 US qt. (7.5 l)
S 600 9.5 US qt. (9.0 l)
Automatic transmission 9.1 US qt. (8.6 l) MB Automatic Transmission Oil
S 600 8.1 US qt. (7.7 l)
Rear axle 1.7 US qt. (1.6 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
S 55 AMG 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l)
S 600 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l)
Front axle S 430 4MATIC 0.63 US qt. (0.6 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
S 500 4MATIC
Transfer case S 430 4MATIC 0.62 US qt. (0.585 l) MB Transfer Case Oil
S 500 4MATIC
Hydraulic system for ADS or ABC 4.2 US qt. (4.0 l) MB Hydraulic Fluids
Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt. (1.0 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin
CHF 11S)
391
Technical data
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Front wheel hubs approx. 3.5 oz. (100 g) High-temperature roller bearing
each grease
Brake system 0.7 US qt. (0.7 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system S 430, S 500 approx. 12.1 US qt. (11.5 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
S 55 AMG approx. 14.3 US qt. (13.5 l)
S 600 approx. 15.85 US qt. (15 l)
Low temperature cooling system S 600 2.3 US qt. (2.2 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Fuel tank S 430, S 500, 23.2 US gal. (88.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline:
including a reserve of S 55 AMG 2.9 US gal. (11.0 l)) Minimum Posted Octane 91
S 600 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG
lubricant oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer 3.2 US qt. (3.0 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Windshield washer and 7.1 US qt. (6.7 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
headlamp cleaning system:
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available pre-
mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios ( page 398).
392
Technical data
Engine oils ! Engine oil additives

Always check the oil filler cap
Engine oils are specifically tested for their ( page 277) for important information Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
suitability in our engines. Therefore, only pertaining to the engine oil needing to They may damage the engine.
use engine oils approved by meet a specific Mercedes-Benz specifi- Damage or malfunctions resulting from
Mercedes-Benz. Information on approved cation (e.g. MB 229.5). If such informa- blending oil additives are not covered by
brands is available in the Factory Approved tion is printed on the oil filler cap, only the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Service Products pamphlet, or at an autho- use an engine oil from the list of ap-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. proved engine oils in the Factory Ap- Air conditioning refrigerant
proved Service Products pamphlet that
meets the specification indicated on R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
the oil filler cap. lubricating oil is used in the air condition-
ing system.
Using engine oils of other specification
may cause the FSS to incorrectly deter- Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu-
mine the next service interval and will bricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
result in engine damage not covered by system will occur.
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Please follow FSS recommendations for

scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so
could result in engine damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
393
Technical data
Brake fluid Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements
During vehicle operation, the boiling point ! Use only premium unleaded fuel:
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
To maintain the engines durability and The octane number (posted at the
through the absorption of moisture from
performance, premium unleaded gaso- pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenu-
line must be used. If premium unleaded of both the Research (R) octane num-
ous operating conditions, this moisture
gasoline is not available and low octane ber and the Motor (M) octane number:
content can lead to the formation of bub-
fuel is used, follow these precautions: (R+M)/2). This is also known as the
bles in the system, thus reducing the sys-
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
tems efficiency. Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
Therefore, the brake fluid must be re-
up with premium unleaded as soon such as Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
placed every two years, preferably in the
as possible. used provided the ratio of any one of these
spring.
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
Only brake fluid approved by 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
acceleration.
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your au-
The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will pro- Do not exceed an engine speed of
exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.
vide you with additional information. 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is
persons and no luggage. not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline,
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum
can be used.
accelerator pedal position if the ve-
hicle is fully loaded or operating in These blends must also meet all other fuel
mountainous terrain. requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
394
Technical data
Gasoline additives Do not blend any specific fuel additives Coolants

with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
A major concern among engine manufac- cost and may be harmful to the engine op- The engine coolant is a mixture of water
turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso- eration. and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro-
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the vides:
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
use of quality gasoline containing additives
poor fuel quality or from blending specific Corrosion protection
that prevent the build-up of carbon depos-
fuel additives are not covered by the Freeze protection
its.
After an extended period of using fuels Boiling protection (by increasing the
without such additives, carbon deposits boiling point)
can build up especially on the intake valves The cooling system was filled at the factory
and in the combustion area, leading to en- with a coolant providing freeze protection
gine performance problems such as: to approximately -22F (-30C) and corro-
Warm-up hesitation sion protection.
Unstable idle If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22F (-30C), the boiling point of the cool-
Knocking/pinging ant in the pressurized cooling system is
Misfire reached at approximately 266F (130C).
Power loss
395
Technical data
The coolant solution must be used bility of the solution. Therefore, do not use Anticorrosion/antifreeze
year-round to provide the necessary corro- more than this amount of Your vehicle contains a number of alumi-
sion protection and increase boil-over pro- anticorrosion/antifreeze. num parts. The use of aluminum compo-
tection. Refer to Service Booklet for If the coolant level is low, water and nents in motor vehicle engines
replacement interval. MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
Coolant system design and coolant used should be used to bring it up to the proper coolant used in such engines be specifical-
stipulate the replacement interval. The re- level (have cooling system checked for ly formulated to protect the aluminum
placement interval published in the Ser- signs of leakage).
parts. (Failure to use such anticorro-
vice Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0
The water in the cooling system must meet sion/antifreeze coolant will result in a sig-
anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other
minimum requirements, which are usually nificantly shortened service life.)
Mercedes-Benz approved products of
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you Therefore, the following product is strongly
equal specification (see Factory Approved
are not sure about the water quality, con- recommended for use in your vehicle:
Service Products pamphlet) are used to re-
sult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Mercedes-Benz 325.0
new the coolant concentration or bring it
back up to the proper level. Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent.
To provide important corrosion protection, Before the start of the winter season (or
the solution must be at least 45% once a year in hot southern regions), you
anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
freeze protection to approximately - 22F concentration checked. The coolant is also
(-30C)]. If you use a solution that is more regularly checked each time you bring your
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
protection to approximately - 49F Center for service.
(-45C)], the engine temperature will in-
crease due to the lower heat transfer capa-
396
Technical data
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection

35F ( 37C) 49F ( 45C)
S 430, S 500 6.1 US qt. (5.75 l) 6.7 US qt. (6.3 l)
S 600 (main cooling system) 7.9 US qt. (7.5 l) 8.7 US qt. (8.25 l)
S 600 (low temperature cooling system) 1.2 US qt. (1.1 l) 1.3 US qt. (1.2 l)
S 55 AMG 7.1 US qt. (6.75 l) 7.8 US qt. (7.4 l)
397
Technical data
Windshield and headlamp washer Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
system Washer Concentrate and water (or con- mixing ratio
centrate and commercially available For temperatures above freezing point, use
Both the windshield and headlamp washer premixed windshield washer MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S
systems are supplied from the windshield solvent/antifreeze, depending on am- and water:
washer fluid reservoir. bient temperatures).
1 part S to 100 parts water
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approximately: Warning G [40 ml S to 1 gallon (4 liters) water].
3.2 US qt. (3.0 l) in vehicles without For temperatures below freezing point, use
headlamp cleaning system* Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma- MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze and commercially available premixed
7.4 US qt. (7.0 l) in vehicles with head- on hot engine parts, because it may ignite windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
lamp cleaning system* or heated reser- and burn. You could be seriously burned.
voir 1 part S to 100 parts solvent
[40 ml S to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent].
398
Technical data
The following text is published as required Tread wear Traction
of all manufacturers of passenger cars un- The tread wear grade is a comparative rat- The traction grades - from highest to low-
der Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regula- ing based on the wear rate of the tire when est - are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep-
tions, Part 575 pursuant to the National tested under controlled conditions on a resent the tires ability to stop on wet
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of specified government test course. For ex- pavement as measured under controlled
1966. ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one conditions on specified government test
and one-half (1) times as well on the gov- surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
Uniform tire quality grading ernment course as a tire graded 100. The marked C may have poor traction perfor-
relative performance of tires depends mance.
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
upon the actual conditions of their use,
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
Warning G
example:
habits, service practices and differences in The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Tread wear Traction Temperature road characteristics and climate. based on straight-ahead braking traction
200 AA A tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
399
Technical data
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the high-
Warning G
est), B, and C, representing the tires resis- The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
tance to the generation of heat and its lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ability to dissipate heat when tested under not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
controlled conditions on a specified indoor flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- rately or in combination, can cause
perature can cause the material of the tire excessive heat build-up and possible tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- failure.
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
400
Technical terms
ABC BabySmartTM airbag deactivation BAS

(Active Body Control) system (Brake Assist System)
Active, computer-controlled system This system detects if a special system System for potentially reducing braking
that hydraulically adjusts the suspen- compatible child restraint seat is in- distances in emergency braking situa-
sion at all four wheels in response to stalled on the front passenger seat. The tions. The system is activated when it
various driving situations. system will automatically deactivate senses an emergency based on how
the passenger front airbag when such fast the brake is applied.
ABS
a seat is properly installed (indicator
(Antilock Brake System) Bi-xenon headlamps
lamp PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF in the
Prevents the wheels from locking up Headlamps which use an electric arc as
center console comes on). See an au-
during braking so that the vehicle can the light source and produce a more in-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
continue to be steered. tense light than filament headlamps.
availability.
Bi-xenon headlamps produce low beam
Alignment bolt
BabySmartTM compatible child seats and high beam.
Metal pin with thread. The centering
Special restraint system for children.
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
The sensor system for the passenger
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
seat prevents deployment of the pas-
senger front airbag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed.
401
Technical terms
CAC COMAND Distronic*

(Customer Assistance Center) (Cockpit Management and Data Sys- A driving convenience cruise control
Mercedes-Benz customer service cen- tem) system which helps the driver maintain
ter, which can help you with any ques- Information and operating center for a pre-selected speed:
tions about your vehicle and provide vehicle sound and communications
If there is no vehicle directly ahead,
assistance in the event of a break- systems, including the radio and navi-
the system operates in the same
down. gation system, as well as other optional
way as conventional ->cruise con-
equipment (CD changer, telephone,
CAN system trol.
etc.).
(Controller Area Network)
If a slower moving vehicle is ahead,
Data bus network serving to control ve- Control system
Distronic will reduce your vehicle
hicle functions such as door locking or The control system is used to call up
speed to the extent permitted by re-
windshield wiping. vehicle information and to change
duced throttle and up to 20% brak-
component settings. Information and
Cockpit ing power to maintain the preset
messages appear in the multifunction
All instruments, switches, buttons and minimum following distance.
display. The driver uses the buttons on
indicator/warning lamps in the passen-
the multifunction steering wheel to Engine number
ger compartment needed for vehicle
navigate through the system and to ad- The number set by the manufacturer
operation and monitoring.
just settings. and stamped on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine pro-
Cruise control
duced.
Driving convenience system for auto-
matically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
402
Technical terms
Engine oil viscosity FSS KEYLESS-GO*

Measurement for the inner friction (vis- (Flexible Service System) System for entering and operating the
cosity) of the oil at different tempera- Service indicator in the multifunction vehicle without the use of a SmartKey.
tures. The higher the temperature an display that informs the driver when Kickdown
oil can tolerate without becoming thin, the next vehicle maintenance service is Depressing the accelerator past the
or the lower the temperature it can tol- due. point of resistance shifts the transmis-
erate without becoming viscous, the
Gear range sion down to the lowest possible gear.
better the viscosity.
Number of gears which are available to This very quickly accelerates the vehi-
ESP the automatic transmission for shifting. cle and should not be used for normal
(Electronic Stability Program) The automatic gear shifting process acceleration needs.
Improves vehicle handling and direc- can be adapted to specific operating
Lock button
tional stability. conditions using the selector lever.
Button on the door which indicates
ETD GPS whether the door is locked or un-
(Emergency Tensioning Device) (Global Positioning System) locked. Pushing the lock button down
Device which deploys in certain frontal Satellite-based system for relaying on an individual door from inside will
and rear collisions exceeding the sys- geographic location information to and lock that door.
tem's threshold to tighten the seat from vehicles equipped with special re- Memory function*
belts. ceivers. Employs DVD digital maps for Used to store three individual seat,
->SRS navigation. steering wheel and exterior mirror posi-
Instrument cluster tions for each SmartKey or SmartKey
The displays and indicator/warning with KEYLESS-GO*.
lamps in the drivers field of vision, in-
cluding the tachometer, speedometer,
engine temperature and fuel gauge.
403
Technical terms
MON Overspeed range Power train

(Motor Octane Number) Engine speeds within the red marking Collective term designating all compo-
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline of the tachometer dial. Avoid this en- nents used to generate and transmit
as determined by a standardized meth- gine speed range, as it may result in se- motive power to the drive axles, includ-
od. It is an indication of a gasoline's rious engine damage that is not ing:
ability to resist undesired detonation covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Engine
(knocking). The average of both the Warranty.
MON (Motor Octane Number) and Clutch/torque converter
Parktronic*
->RON (Research Octane Number) is System which uses visual and acoustic Transmission
posted at the pump, also known as AN- signals to assist the driver during park- Transfer case
TI-KNOCK INDEX. ing maneuvers.
Multifunction display Drive shaft
Poly-V-belt drive
Display field in the speedometer used Differential
Drives engine components (alternator,
to present information provided by the
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine. Axle shafts/axles
control system.
Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmis-
Steering wheel with buttons for operat-
sion between standard operation S and
ing the control system.
comfort operation C.
S 55 AMG with steering wheel gearshift
control and manual shift program: in
addition to S and C (see above), you
can use M for manual operation
404
Technical terms
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics RON Tele Aid System

Transmission of vehicle data and cur- (Research Octane Number) (Telematic Alarm Identification on
rent location to the Mercedes-Benz The Research Octane Number for gaso- Demand)
Customer Assistance Center for sub- line as determined by a standardized The Tele Aid system consists of three
scribers to the Tele Aid service. method. It is an indication of a gaso- types of response: automatic and man-
REST line's ability to resist undesired detona- ual emergency, Roadside Assistance
(Residual engine heat utilization) tion (knocking). The average of both and information. Tele Aid is initially ac-
Feature that uses the engine heat the ->MON (Motor Octane Number) tivated by completing a subscriber
stored in the coolant to heat the vehi- and RON (Research Octane Number) is agreement and placing an acquain-
cle interior for a short time after the en- posted at the pump, also known as AN- tance call.
gine has been turned off. TI-KNOCK INDEX. The Tele Aid system is operational pro-
Shift lock vided that the vehicles battery is
Restraint systems charged, properly connected, not dam-
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and aged and cellular and GPS coverage is
prevents the transmission selector le-
child restraint systems. As indepen- available.
ver from being inadvertently moved out
dent systems, their protective func-
of position P without the SmartKey Telematics*
tions complement one another.
turned and the brake pedal depressed. A combination of the terms telecom-
munications and informatics.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System) Tightening torque
Seat belts, emergency tensioning de- Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
vice and airbags. Though independent wrench) with which threaded fasteners
systems, they are closely interfaced to such as wheel bolts are tightened.
provide effective occupant protection.
405
Technical terms
Tire speed rating

Part of a tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is ap-
proved.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the
road via the tires.
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and stamped on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio sys-
tems (radio, CD, etc.).
406
Index
A Exterior rear view mirror parking Adjustable air vents, rear passenger
ABC 220, 401 position 175 compartment 192
Messages in display 313, 318 Front and rear fog lamp 126, 127 Adjusting 34
Setting vehicle level 219, 221 Hazard warning flasher 129 Air distribution 184
ABS 77, 401 Headlamps 47 Air volume 186
Malfunction indicator lamp 304 High beams 128 Backrest tilt 35
Messages in display 314 Ignition 31 Drive-dynamic seat 163
Warning lamp 304 Ignition with KEYLESS-GO* Exterior rear view mirror 38
Accelerator position, automatic start/stop button 33 Head restraint height 36
transmission 170 Immobilizer 53, 83 Head restraint tilt 36
Accident Limiting opening height of Instrument cluster illumination 131
In case of 50 trunk lid* 159 Interior rear view mirror 38
Activating Rear window defroster 189 Lumbar support 112
Air conditioner (cooling) 191 Residual heat 191 Mirrors 38
Air conditioning 190 Seat heater 114, 116 Multicontour backrest* 112
Air recirculation mode 187 Seat ventilation* 117 Power seat bench* 118
Anti-theft alarm system 84 Tow-away alarm 85 Seat cushion depth 35, 112
Central locking (control system) 159 Windshield wipers 48 Seat cushion tilt 35
Charcoal filter 188 Activating steering wheel gearshift control Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Distance warning function* 215 Downshifting 169, 172 Seat height 35
Distronic* 211 Upshifting 169, 172 Seat in the lumbar region 113
Easy-entry/exit feature 160 Adding Seat in the shoulder region 112
ESP 81 Coolant 279 Seats 34
Exterior lamps 125 Engine oil 277 Steering column height 37
Additional turn signals 353 Steering column in or out 37
407
Index
Steering column up or down 37 AIRMATIC 218 Ashtray 238

Steering wheel 37 Alarm At the gas station 269
Air conditioning Audible 76, 84 ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid) 278
Turning off 190 Canceling 84 AUDIO menu 139
Turning on 190 Visual 83 Operating
Air pressure see Tire inflation Alarm system Cassette player 141
pressure 283 Anti-theft 83 Selecting radio station 140
Air recirculation mode 187 Alignment bolt 364 Selecting satellite radio* station
Activating 187 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 345, 401 (USA only) 140
Deactivating 188 Antiglare Audio system
Air vents, rear passenger compartment Automatic 174 CD mode 142
Adjustable 192 Antilock brake system (ABS) 401 Automatic antiglare for rear view
Air volume Anti-theft alarm system mirror 174
Adjusting 186 Arming 84 Automatic central locking
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 311 Canceling alarm 84 Activating/deactivating
Airbags 59 Disarming 84 (control system) 159
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation Anti-theft systems 83 Automatic climate control 180
system 71, 401 Anti-theft alarm system 83 Air recirculation mode 187
Children 60 Immobilizer 83 Defrosting 187
Front 63 Tow-away alarm 85 Rear window defroster 189
Passenger 63 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning 263 Setting the temperature 183
Safety guidelines 62 Armrest Automatic headlamp mode 125
Side impact 63 Storage compartment in front of 232,
Window curtain 63 233, 234
408
Index
Automatic lighting control B Battery, vehicle 280, 366

Activating 129 BabySmartTM Charging 367
Deactivating 130 Airbag deactivation system 71 Disconnecting 367
Automatic locking when driving 106 Compatible child seats 71, 401 Reconnecting 368
Automatic transmission 164 Self-test 71 Reinstalling 367
Accelerator position 170 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation Removing 367
Comfortable program mode 170 system 401 Bi-Xenon headlamps 401
Deactivating steering wheel gearshift Backrest supports Block heater (Canada only) 293
control 173 Lumbar region 113 Blocking
Emergency operation Shoulder region 112 Rear window operation 74
(Limp Home Mode) 173 Backup lamps 354, 358 Brake assist system (BAS) 401
Fluid level 278 Bulbs 354 Brake fluid 270, 394
Gear ranges 166 BAS 78, 401 Brake lamp bulbs 354
Gear selector lever position 167 Messages in display 315 Brake lamp, high mounted 354
Gear shifting malfunctions 173 Batteries, SmartKey Brake pads
Kickdown 170 Changing 350 Message in display 321
One-touch gearshifting 165 Check lamp 90, 91 Brakes 260
Program mode selector switch 170 Replacing 349 Warning lamp 305
Selector lever position 164 Battery discharged Break-in period 258
Starting the engine 43 Jump starting 369 Bulbs, replacing 353
Steering wheel gearshift control Battery, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Additional turn signals 353
(Speedshift) S 55 AMG 168 Changing 351 Backup lamps 354
Transmission fluid 278 Check lamp 95 Brake lamps 354
Winter program mode 171
Auxiliary fuse box 374
409
Index
Fog lamps 353 Cassette player SmartKey setting 160

Front lamps 353 Operating 141 Vehicle level 219, 222
High beam 353 Catalytic converter 267 Charcoal filter 188
High mounted brake lamp 354 CD changer* 142 Activating 188
License plate lamps 354, 358 CD mode 142 Deactivating 189
Low beam 353 CD player Charging
Parking and standing lamps 353 Operating 141 Vehicle battery 367
Parking lamps 354, 357 Center console 25 CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator
Rear fog lamp 354 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 311 lamp 306
Rear fog lamps 358 Centigrade Checking
Side marker lamps 353, 357 Setting temperature units 154 Brake fluid 270
Standing lamps 353, 354, 357 Central locking Coolant level 278
Tail lamp assemblies 354, 358 Automatic 106 Oil level 271, 273
Turn signal lamps 353, 354 From inside 107 Oil level via control system 274
Switch 107 Tire inflate pressure 271
C
Switching on/off (control Vehicle lighting 271
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 402
system) 159 Child safety 69
Calling up
Unlocking from inside 107 Airbags 60
Distronic* settings 147
Changing Infant and child restraint systems 64,
Range (distance to empty) 150
Batteries (SmartKey) 350 69
Service indicator 295
Battery (SmartKey with LATCH child seat anchors 73
CAN system 402
KEYLESS-GO*) 351 Cigarette lighter 239
Cargo tie-down hooks 230
CDs 142
410
Index
Cleaning Closing COMAND 402

Cup holder 301 Cup holder 237 COMAND* see separate operating instruc-
Distronic* system sensor cover 299 Glove box 231 tions
Gear selector lever 301 Hood 273 Combination switch 128
Hard plastic trim items 301 Power windows with High beam flasher 48, 128
Headlamps 177 KEYLESS-GO* 198 Turn signals 47
Headliner and shelf below rear Side windows 196 Windshield wipers 48
window 301 Sliding/pop-up roof 199, 352 Comfortable driving
Instrument cluster 301 Sliding/pop-up roof with Transmission program mode 170
Leather upholstery 302 KEYLESS-GO* 202 Consumer information 399
Light alloy wheels 301 Sliding/pop-up roof with Control and operation of radio
Nubuck leather upholstery 302 SmartKey 201 transmitters 266
Parktronic* system sensor 299 Trunk lid 98 Control system 134, 402
Plastic and rubber parts 302 Windows 195 AUDIO menu 139
Seat belts 301 Windows with SmartKey 197 Checking oil level 274
Steering wheel 301 Closing from the inside Convenience submenu 160
Upholstery 302 Trunk 100 Display digital speedometer 139
Windows 300 Closing sliding/pop-up roof Distronic* menu 147
Windshield 49 In an emergency 352 Functions 136, 138
Wiper blades 299 Cockpit 20, 402 Instrument cluster submenu 154
Wood trims 302 Cockpit management and data system Lighting submenu 155
Clock 23 (COMAND) 402 Malfunction memory menu 150
411
Index
Menus 137, 138 Coolant level D

Multifunction display 134 Checking 278 Daytime running lamp mode 126
Multifunction steering wheel 135 Coolant temperature gauge 23 Setting 156
NAVI menu 147 Courtesy lighting 130 Deactivating
Settings menu 151 Cruise control 203, 402 Air conditioner (cooling) 190
Standard display menu 139 Canceling 204 Air recirculation mode 188
Submenus 136, 138 Driving downhill 204 Alarm 84
TEL* menu 144 Driving uphill 204 Anti-theft alarm system 84
Trip computer menu 148 Fine adjustment 205 Automatic climate control 190
Vehicle submenu 159 Lever 210 Central locking (control system) 159
Convenience submenu 160 Setting current speed 204 Charcoal filter 189
Activating easy-entry/exit Setting to last stored speeds 205 Cruise control 204
feature 160 Cruise control lever 203 Defrost 187
Adjusting drive-dynamic seat 163 Cup holder Distance warning function* 215
Setting Key-dependency 160 Cleaning 301 Distronic* 213
Setting parking position for exterior Closing 237 Engine with the SmartKey 53
rear view mirror 162 In front seat armrest 236 ESP 80
Coolant 278 In rear seat armrest 237 Exterior lamps 125
Adding 279 Opening 237 Hazard warning flasher 129
Checking level 278 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 402 Headlamps 53
Messages in display 322, 323 Immobilizer 83
Temperature 268 Interior illumination delayed
Temperature gauge 132 switch-off 158
Warning lamp 323
412
Index
Limiting opening height of Discharged battery Distronic* 206, 402

trunk lid* 159 Jump starting 369 Activated 210
Rear window defroster 189 Disconnecting Activating 211
Residual heat 191 Vehicle battery 367 Calling up settings 147, 209
Seat heater 115, 116 Displays Cleaning system sensor 299
Seat ventilation* 117 Digital speedometer 139 Cruise control lever 210
Tow-away alarm 85 Distronic* 208 Deactivated 210
Deactivating steering wheel gearshift Messages 275, 312 Deactivating 213
control 173 Service indicator 294 Deceleration 209
Deceleration Showing malfunctions 150 Decreasing distance 214
With Distronic* 209 Distance Decreasing time interval 213
Deep water see Standing water 265 Decreasing in Distronic* 214 Displays in the speedometer dial 208
Defrosting 187 Increasing in Distronic* 214 Distance warning function 214
Delayed switch-off Setting in Distronic* 213 Driving hints 215
Interior illumination 158 Warning function 214 Fine adjustment 212
Dialing Distance to empty (range) Increasing distance 214
A number (telephone) 145 Calling up 148 Increasing time interval 213
Difficulties Distance warning function* 214 Intermittent signal tone 208
While driving see Problems while Activating 215 Menu 209
driving 50 Deactivating 215 Messages in display 315
Digital clock 23 DTR* warning lamp 214 Sensor cover 299
Digital speedometer 139 Intermittent warning sound 214 Setting a higher speed 211
Direction of rotation (tires) 283 Symbol in multifunction display 147 Setting a slower speed 212
413
Index
Setting following distance 213 In winter 264 E

Setting the current speed 211 Problems 50 Easy-entry/exit feature 108
Setting to last stored speed Safety systems 77 Activating 160
("Resume" function) 212 Through standing water 265 Interrupting movement 161
Warning and indicator lamps 208 With Distronic* 215 Electrical fuses 374
Door control panel 19, 28 Driving abroad 266 Electrical system 389
Door unlock Driving instructions 259 Electrically folding exterior rear view
With Tele Aid* 249 Driving off 261 mirrors 176
Doors Driving safety systems Electronic Stability Program see ESP 79,
Message in display 325 4MATIC 82 403
Opening from inside vehicle 96 ABS 77 Emergency call system* 242
Opening from outside 89 BAS 78 Emergency calls
Downhill driving ESP 79 Initiating an emergency call 245
Cruise control 204 Driving systems 203 With Tele Aid* 244
Downshifting 165, 169, 172 ABC 220 Emergency engine shut-down 376
Drink holder see Cup holder 236 AIRMATIC 218 Emergency operation
Drinking and driving 259 Cruise control 203 (Limp Home Mode) 173
Drive-dynamic seat Distronic* 206 Emergency operations
Adjusting 163 Driving safety systems 77 Closing sliding/pop-up roof 352
Drive-dynamic seat* 113 Parktronic* 224 Locking the vehicle 349
Driving Vehicle level control 219, 221 Opening sliding/pop-up roof 352
Abroad 266 Remote door unlock 249
General instructions 40, 259 Unlocking the trunk lid 349
Hydroplaning 263 Unlocking the vehicle 348
414
Index
Emergency tensioning device see Display messages 326 F

ETD 67, 403 Filler neck 277 Fahrenheit
Emission control 267 Messages in display 275, 326 Setting temperature units 154
Ending Viscosity 403 Fastening the seat belts 40
A call (telephone) 145 Engine oil level see Oil level 271 Fine adjustment
Engine 382 Engine shut down in an emergency 376 Cruise control 205
Compartment 272 Entry position Distronic* 212
Message in display 306 Messages in display 328 First aid kit 344
Starting 43 ESP 79, 403 Flat tire 361
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 44 Four wheel electronic traction system Lowering the vehicle 365
Starting with the SmartKey 43 with ESP 82 Mounting the spare wheel 361
Turning off with the SmartKey or the Switching off 80 Preparing the vehicle 361
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 53 Switching on 81 Flexible Service System (FSS) 294, 403
Engine cleaning 298 Synchronizing 316 Fog lamp, rear 127, 354
Engine compartment 272 Warning lamp 307, 308 Fog lamps
Fuse box in 375 ETD 403 Replacing bulbs 353
Hood 272 Safety guidelines 62 Fog lamps, front
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 306 ETD (Emergency tensioning device) 67 Messages in display 330
Engine number 402 Exterior lamp switch 124 Replacing bulbs 354
Engine oil 273 Exterior rear view mirrors Switching on 127
Adding 277 Adjusting 38 Folding electrically
Additives 393 Folding electrically 176 Exterior rear view mirrors
Checking level 273 Parking position for 162 176
Consumption 273
415
Index
Four wheel electronic traction system Fuel filler flap 269 G

(4MATIC) Locking 269 Garage door opener 250
with ESP 82 Opening 351 Erasing in remote control 255
4MATIC 82 Unlocking 269 Integrated remote control 252
Front airbags 63 Fuel tank Rolling code programming 253
Front lamps Filler flap 269 Gasoline see Fuel 270
Messages in display 330333 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 391 Gear range 403
Replacing bulbs 353, 355 Functions (control system) 136, 138 Automatic transmission 166
Switching on 124 Resetting 152 Limiting 166
Front seat head restraints Fuse box 374, 375 Shifting into optimal 165
Installing 109 Fuse chart 345 Gear range limit
Power seat 109 Fuses 374 Canceling 165
Removing 109 Auxiliary fuse box in trunk 374 Gear selector lever
FSS (Flexible Service System) 294, 403 Fuse box in engine compartment 375 Cleaning 301
Fuel 270 Fuse box in passenger Position 167
Fuel reserve warning lamp 308 compartment 374 Glasses
Premium unleaded gasoline 270 Fuse boxes in the engine Storage compartment in front of
Fuel consumption statistics compartment 376 armrest 234
After start 148 Fuse chart 345 Global
Since last reset 149 Fuse extractor 345 Locking 89
Spare fuses 345 Unlocking 89
416
Index
Global Positioning System (GPS) 403 Headlamps Hood 272

Glove box 231 Automatic control 125 Closing 273
Closing 231 Bi-Xenon 401 Message in display 328
Locking 231 Cleaning 298 Opening 272
Opening 231 Cleaning system* 177, 281 Hydroplaning 263
Unlocking 231 Refilling washer fluid 281
I
Gloves (vehicle tool kit) 345 Switching off 53
Identification labels 380
Good visibility 174 Switching on 47
Ignition 31, 33
GPS 243, 403 Headliner
Switching on 43, 44
Cleaning 301
H Immobilizer 83
Heated steering wheel* 240
Hand-held transmitter Activating 83
Height adjustment
Programming integrated remote Deactivating 83
Head restraints 36
control 252 Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
Steering wheel 37
Hands-free microphone 27 warning
Height adjustments
Hard plastic trim items Individual seats* 118
Vehicle level 219, 221
Cleaning 301 Infant and child restraint systems 69
High beam
Hazard warning flasher 128 Installing 72
Replacing bulbs 353
Switching off 129 LATCH child seat anchors 73
High beam flasher 48, 128
Switching on 129 Information
High beam headlamps
Head restraint folding 119 About service and warranty 10
Messages in display 330
Head restraints 109 Button for Tele Aid* 247
Switching on 128
Headlamp cleaning system* 281 Infrared reflecting windshield 256
High mounted brake lamp 354
417
Index
Inside rear view mirror Interior lighting 129 Locking the vehicle 95
Antiglare 174 Activating automatic control 129 Loss of SmartKey with
Installing Deactivating automatic control 130 KEYLESS-GO 96
Infant and child restraint systems 72 Manual operation 130 Messages in display 328
Towing eye bolt 373 Interior rear view mirror Starting the engine 44
Wiper blades 360 Adjusting 38 Turning off engine 54
Instrument cluster 22, 131, 403 Kickdown 170, 403
J
Cleaning 301 Kilometers/miles in speedometer 154
Jump starting 369
Coolant temperature gauge 132 Km/h or mph in speedometer 154
Illumination 131 K
L
Multifunction display 134 Key see SmartKey 30, 53
Lamp bulbs, exterior 353
Outside temperature indicator 133 Key, mechanical 348
Lamps, exterior
Selecting language 155 Key, SmartKey
Front 353
Integrated remote control Positions in starter switch 31
Light sensor 331
Canadian programming 254 Key, SmartKey, SmartKey with
Messages in display 331
Erasing memory 255 KEYLESS-GO*
Rear 354
Hand-held transmitter 252 Replacing the battery 349
Lamps, indicator and warning
Operating 255 Key-dependency memory
ABS 304
Rolling code programming 253 Settings 160
Airbag Off 63
Interior illumination KEYLESS-GO* 403
Battery (SmartKey with
Delayed switch-off 158 Activating ignition with 33
KEYLESS-GO*) 94
Closing power windows 198
Battery (SmartKey) 89
Closing sliding/pop-up roof 202
Brakes 305
418
Index
CHECK ENGINE 306 Lighter see Cigarette lighter 239 Locator lighting 126
Coolant 322 Lighting 124 Setting 156
DTR* 208 Automatic headlamp mode 125 Lock button 403
Engine diagnostics 306 Combination switch 128 Lock buttons
ESP 307, 308 Daytime running lamp mode 126 Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 55
Fuel reserve 308 Exterior lamp switch 124 Locking 51, 88
Instrument cluster 308 Front fog lamps 127 Fuel filler flap 269
Seat belts 308 High beam flasher 128 Global (SmartKey with
Service indicator 294 High beams 128 KEYLESS-GO*) 94
SRS 59 Instrument cluster illumination 131 Global, SmartKey 89
Language Interior 129 Glove box 231
Multifunction display 155 Locator lighting 126 The vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 95
Setting 155 Low beam 124 Trunk lid, separately 105
LATCH child seat anchors 73 Manual headlamp mode 125 Vehicle in an emergency 349
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 381 Night security illumination 126 Loss of SmartKey 91
Leather upholstery Parking lamps 124 Loss of Smartkey with KEYLESS-GO* 96
Cleaning 302 Rear fog lamp 127 Low beam headlamps
Lever Settings (control system) 155 Messages in display 330, 331
For cruise control 210 Limiting the gear range 166 Replacing bulbs 353
License plate lamps Limp Home Mode 173 Lowering
Replacing bulbs 354, 358 Loading 229 Vehicle 365
Light alloy wheels Cargo tie-down hooks 230 Lumbar support adjustment 112
Cleaning 301 Instructions 229
Light sensor 331 Roof rack 229
419
Index
M Storing key dependent settings 122 Interior rear view mirror 38

Main 390 Menus 136 Storing exterior rear view mirror
Main Dimensions 390 AUDIO 139 parking position 122
Maintenance 12, 294 Distronic* 147, 209 MON 270
Malfunction In control system 137, 138 MON (Motor Octane Number) 404
Displaying 150 Malfunction memory 150 Mph or km/h in speedometer 154
Malfunction memory 150 NAVI 147 Multicontour backrest* 112
Calling up 150 Settings menu 151 Multifunction display 134, 404
Manual headlamp mode 125 Standard display 139 Selecting language 155
Manual operations Submenus 136 Standard display 138
Fuel filler flap 351 TEL* 144 Multifunction display messages
Interior lighting control 130 Trip computer 148 ABC 313, 318
Locking the vehicle 349 Microphone ABS 314
Sliding/pop-up roof 352 Hands-free microphone 27 BAS 315
Unlocking the drivers door 348 Miles/kilometers in speedometer Brake fluid 321
Unlocking the trunk lid 349 Setting 154 Brake pads 321
Massage function 113 Mirrors Check engine 306
MAXCOOL Activating exterior rear view mirror Coolant 323
Maximum cooling 186 parking position 175 Coolant level 322
Mechanical key 348 Adjusting 38 Distronic* 315
Memory function 121, 403 Automatic antiglare for rear view Doors 325
Recalling positions from mirror 174 Engine 306
memory 122 Exterior rear view mirror 38 Engine oil level 326
Storing exterior rear view mirror Exterior rear view mirror parking
parking positions 122 position 162
420
Index
Entry position 328 O Opening

Hood 328 Occupant safety 58 Ashtray 238
Lamps 331 Airbags 59 Cup holder 237
Parking brake 321 Children and airbags 60 Doors from the inside 96
Selector lever 317 Children in the vehicle 69 Fuel filler flap 269
SmartKey 328 Fastening the seat belt 40 Fuel filler flap manually 351
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 328 Infant and child restraint systems 69 Glove box 231
TeleAid 334 LATCH child seat anchors 73 Hood 272
Telephone* 334 Seat belts 40, 62 Side windows 196
Tires 336, 339 Oil Sliding/pop-up roof 199, 352
Trunk 334 Adding 277 Sliding/pop-up roof in an
Washer fluid 334 Consumption 273 emergency 352
Multifunction steering wheel 24, 135, Dipstick 273 Sliding/pop-up roof with
404 Filler neck 277 SmartKey 201
Buttons 135 Viscosity 403 Storage compartment in the center
Oil level console 232
N
Checking 271 Storage compartments in the
Navigation system
Oil level via control system armrest 233
Operating 147
Checking 274 Storage compartments in the center
See separate COMAND* operating
One-touch gearshifting 165 console 233, 234
instructions
Canceling gear range limit 165 Trunk 97
Night security illumination 126
Downshifting 165 Trunk lid from the inside 97
Nubuck leather upholstery
Upshifting 165 Windows 195
Cleaning 302
Windows with SmartKey 197
421
Index
Opening from the inside Override switch see Blocking of rear Parking position
Trunk 99 window operation 74 Exterior rear view mirrors 122, 162,
Operating Overspeed range 404 175
Cassette player 141 Parktronic 224
P
CD player 141 Parktronic* 224, 404
Paintwork 297
COMAND* see separate operating Malfunctioning 228
Panic alarm 76
instructions Sensor 299
Panic button on SmartKey 76
Garage door opener 255 Passenger compartment 266
Parcel net in front passenger
Integrated remote control 255 Fuse box in 374
footwell 237
Navigation system 147 Interior lighting 129
Parcel net in trunk 238
Radio 140 Interior rear view mirror 38
Parking 51, 261
Radio transmitters 266 Parcel net in front passenger
Parking and standing lamps
Telephone* 144 footwell 237
Replacing bulbs 353
Vehicle outside the USA and Passenger safety see Occupant
Parking assist see Parktronic* 224
Canada 13 safety 58
Parking brake 45, 52
Operators Manual 10 Passenger seat fore and aft
Engaging 52
Ornamental moldings 298 adjustment 120
Message in display 321
Outside temperature indicator 133 Passenger seat head restraint
Releasing 45
Overdue service 294 height 120
Warning sound 46
Overhead control panel 27 Passenger seat height 120
Parking lamps
Garage door opener 27 Pedals 259
Replacing bulbs 354, 357
Reading lamp 27 Phone book*
Switching on 124
Rear view mirror 27 Loading 146
Tele Aid button 27 Quick search 146
422
Index
Phone number* Power windows 195 Q

Dialing 145 Blocking of rear window operation 74 Quick search
Redialing 146 Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 198 Phone book* 146
Plastic and rubber parts Side windows 195
R
Cleaning 302 Synchronizing 198
Radio
Poly-V-belt drive 404 Practical hints
Selecting satellite radio*
Positions (Memory function) First aid kit 344
stations 140
Recalling from memory 122 Fuses 374
Selecting stations 140
Positions (Memory function*) Lamp in center console 311
Radio transmitters, control and
Storing into memory 122 Lamps in instrument cluster 304
operation 266
Power assistance 259 Messages in the display 312
Range (distance to empty)
Power seat Towing the vehicle 371
Calling up 150
Adjusting backrest tilt 35 Vehicle tool kit 344
Rear fog lamp 354
Adjusting head restraint height 36 PRE-SAFE see Preventive occupant
Bulb 354
Adjusting head restraint tilt 36 safety 68
Switching on 127
Adjusting seat cushion depth 35 Preventive occupant safety
Rear lamp bulbs
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 35 (PRE-SAFE) 68
Replacing 358
Adjusting seat height 35 Problems
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Front seat head restraints 109 While driving 50
Rear passenger compartment
Seat fore and aft adjustment 35 With vehicle 17
Adjustable air vents 192
Power seat bench* 118 Product information 9
Rear seat head restraints
Power train 404 Program mode selector switch 404
Folding back with switch 110
Power washer 297 Automatic transmission 170
Placing upright 110
PULSE function (Massage function) 113
Rear seats 110
423
Index
Rear seats 118 Refueling 269 Rear turn signal bulbs 358
Fore and aft adjustment 119 Regular checks 270 Side marker lamp bulbs 357
Head restraint folding 119 Regular driving style 221 Standing lamp bulbs 357
Individual seats* 118 Reinstalling vehicle battery 367 Wiper blades 359
Passenger seat fore and aft Remote controls Reporting
adjustment 120 Integrated 252 Safety defects 18
Passenger seat head restraint SmartKey 88, 92 Reset button in the instrument
height 120 Remote door unlock cluster 151
Passenger seat height 120 With Tele Aid* 249 Resetting
Rear seat head restraints 110 Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 405 All functions (control system) 151
Seat height 119 Removing All functions of a submenu 152
Setting front passenger seat position Vehicle battery 367 Fuel consumption 149
from rear* 119 Wheel 364 Service indicator (FSS) 295
Rear view mirror 27 Wiper blades 359 Trip odometer 132
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 174 Replacing Residual heat utilization 191, 405
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Backup lamp bulbs 358 Residual ventilation 191
Rear window Brake fluid 394 REST (Residual engine heat
Blocking operation 74 Brake lamp bulbs 358 utilization) 405
Rear window defroster 189 Bulbs 353 Restraint system see Infant and child
Activating 189 Front lamp bulbs 355 restraint systems 69, 72
Deactivating 189 License plate lamp bulbs 358 Rims and Tires 384
Rear window sunshade* 179 Parking lamp bulbs 357 Roadside assistance 12
Reconnecting Rear fog lamp bulbs 358 Tele Aid* 246
Vehicle battery 368 Rear lamp bulbs 354, 358 Rolling code programming 253
424
Index
RON 270 Seat for and aft adjustment 119 Self-test

RON (Research Octane Number) 405 Seat heater BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
Roof rack 229 Switching off 115 system 71
Rotating wheels 291 Switching on 114 Tele Aid* 243
Rubber parts Seat height 119 Service
Cleaning 302 Seat ventilation* Calling up the service indicator 295
Switching off 117 Major service (Service B) 294
S
Switching on 117 Minor service (Service A) 294
Safety
Seats 108 Overdue 294
Occupant 58
Adjusting 34 Types 294
Safety belts see Seat belts 40
Adjusting lumbar support 113 When due 294
Safety defects
Adjusting shoulder support 112 Service (maintenance) 294
Reporting 18
Easy entry/exit feature 108 Service and warranty information 10
Safety systems
Heater 114 Service indicator 294
Driving 77
Massage function 113 Calling up 295
Screwdriver (vehicle tool kit) 345
Multicontour backrest* 112 Clearing 294, 295
Seat belt force limiter 67
Rear power seat bench* 118 Service life (tires) 283
Seat belts 64
Rear seats 118 Service System see FSS 294
Cleaning 301
Securing cargo Setting
Fastening 40
Cargo tie-down hooks 230 Convenience functions 160
Proper use of 42, 66
Selector lever Cruise control 204
Safety guidelines 62
Lock 43 Daytime running lamp mode 156
Warning lamp 308
Message in display 317 Digital clock 23
Seat cushion depth
Position 164 Distronic* time interval 213
Adjusting 112
Following distance in Distronic* 213
425
Index
Higher speed in cruise control 205 Time 23 Shift lock 405

Higher speed in Distronic* 211 To last stored speed in Distronic* Shifting
Individual vehicle settings 151 ("Resume" function) 212 Gear selector lever positions 167
Interior illumination delayed Units Into optimal gear range (automatic
switch-off 158 Speedometer 154 transmission) 165
Lamps and lighting (control Temperature 154 Shoulder support
system) 155 Vehicle level control 219, 221 Seat adjustment 112
Language, multifunction display 155 Setting current speed 204 Side impact airbags 63
Locator lighting 156 Setting front passenger seat position Side marker lamps
Lower speed in cruise control 205 from rear* 119 Replacing bulbs 353, 354, 357
Lower speed in Distronic* 212 Settings Side windows
Miles/kilometers in Calling up Distronic* 147, 209 Automatic closing 196
speedometer 154 Convenience functions 160 Automatic opening 196
Parking position for exterior rear view Factory, SmartKey 89 Cleaning 300
mirrors 162 Individual (SmartKey) 160 Closing 195, 196, 197
Slower speed in cruise control 205 Lighting (control system) 155 Closing fully (Express-close) 196
Slower speed in Distronic* 212 Menus and submenus 136 Closing with SmartKey 197
SmartKey dependent memory 160 Resetting all (control system) 151 Opening 195, 196, 197
Speed in cruise control 205 Resetting in the submenu 152 Opening fully (Express-open) 196
Speed in Distronic* 211 Selective 89, 94 Opening with SmartKey 197
Speedometer display mode 154 Settings menu Stopping 197
Suspension tuning 220 Functions in 151 Synchronizing power windows 198
Temperature (interior) 183 Individual vehicle settings 151
Temperature indicator 154 Submenus 152
426
Index
Simultaneous wiping and washing Opening and closing windows Spare fuses 345
Windshield wipers 49 with 197 Spare parts service 378
Single wipe 49 Remote controls 88, 92 Spare wheel
Sliding/pop-up roof 199 Replacing the batteries 349 Mounting 361
Closing 199, 352 Restoring to factory setting 90 Speed
Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 202 Selective setting 89 Setting current 204
Closing with SmartKey 201 Starting the engine 43 Setting to last stored speed in
Messages in display 333 Turning off the engine 53 Distronic* ("Resume"
Opening 199, 352 Unlocking with 30 function) 212
Opening with SmartKey 201 SmartKey positions in starter switch 31 Speed settings
Stopping 200 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Cruise control 205
Synchronizing 202 Checking the battery 95 Distronic* 211, 212
SmartKey 30, 88 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 91 Speedometer
Battery check lamp 89, 94 Changing the battery 351 Displaying gear range 166
Changing the batteries 350 Factory setting 94 Displays 208
Checking the batteries 91 Global locking 94 Settings units 154
Factory setting 89 Global unlocking 94 Speedometer display mode
Global locking 89 Loss of 96 Selecting 154
Global locking and unlocking 89 Messages in display 328 Sporty driving style 221
Global unlocking 89 Replacing the battery 349 SRS 66, 405
Locking and unlocking 88 Selective setting 94 Indicator lamp 310
Loss of 91 Unlocking 91 SRS indicator lamp 58
Opening and closing the Unlocking with 32 Standing lamps 124
sliding/pop-up roof with 201 Snow chains 293 Replacing bulbs 353, 354, 357
427
Index
Standing water Glove box 231 Suspension tuning

Driving instructions 265 In front of armrest 234 For regular driving style 221
Starter switch 31 Parcel net 237 For sporty driving style 221
Positions 31 Storage compartment in front of Setting 220
Starting difficulties 44 armrest 232, 233 Switching off
Starting position 31 Storage tray 232, 233, 234 Automatic central locking (control
Starting the engine 43 Under the front seats 235 system) 159
Steering column Storing (Memory function*) Engine 53
Height adjustment 37 Positions into memory 122 ESP 80
Length adjustment 37 Submenus Hazard warning flasher 129
Steering wheel Convenience 160 Headlamps 53
Adjusting 37 For settings 136 Switching on
Adjustment 37 In control system 138 Automatic central locking (control
Cleaning 301 Instrument cluster 154 system) 159
Heated steering wheel* 240 Lighting 155 ESP 81
Steering wheel adjustment 37 Resetting functions in Control Front fog lamps 127
Stolen vehicle system 152 Front lamps 124
Tracking services 250 Selecting 152 Hazard warning flasher 129
Stopping Settings menu 152 Headlamps 47
Sliding/pop-up roof 200 Vehicle 159 High beams 128
Windows 197 Sun visors 178 Parking lamps 124
Storage compartments 231 Supplemental Restraint System Rear fog lamp 127
Armrest 232, 233, 234 (SRS) 405 Windshield wipers 48
Cup holder 236, 237
428
Index
Symbol (Distronic*) Stolen vehicle tracking services 250 Tightening torque 405
Distance warning function* 147 System self-check 243 Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 365
Synchronizing Upgrade signals 248 Time
ESP 316 TeleAid Setting digital clock 23
Power windows 198 Messages in display 334 Tire inflation pressure
Sliding/pop-up roof 202 Telematics* 405 Checking 271, 283
Telephone holder* Tire inflation pressure see the placard on
T
Storage compartment in front of the fuel filler flap
Tachometer 133
armrest 234 Tire speed rating 263, 406
Overspeed range 133
Telephone* 241 Tire traction 263
Tail lamps
Answering a call 145 Tires 282, 399
Cleaning 298
Dialing a number from the phone Direction of rotation 283
Replacing bulbs 354, 358
book 145 Driving instructions 262
Tar stains 297
Ending a call 145 Messages in display 336, 339
Tele Aid
Hands-free microphone 27 Retreads 282
Information 247
Loading phone book* 146 Service life 283
Initiating an emergency call
Messages in display 334 Temperature 284
manually 245
Operating 144 Tire pressure monitor warning
Roadside assistance 246
Redialing 146 lamp* 309
Tele Aid System 242
Temperature Tread depth 292
Tele Aid button 27
Display mode 154 Wear pattern 291
Tele Aid System 405
Setting interior temperature 183 Winter 292
Tele Aid* 242
Setting units in display 154 Tools 344
Emergency calls 244
Tires 284
Remote door unlock 249
Tie-down hooks (Trunk) 230
429
Index
Tow-away alarm 85 Parcel net 238 U

Arming 85 Tie-down hooks 230 Units
Disarming 85 Trunk lid 97, 99, 100 Setting speedometer units 154
Disarming for transport 85 Trunk lock 349 Setting temperature units 154
Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit) 345 Unlocking in an emergency 349 Unlocking 30, 88
Installing 373 Unlocking separately 105, 106 Drivers door in an emergency 348
Towing the vehicle 371 Unlocking with SmartKey 90 Fuel filler flap 269
Tracking services Trunk lid Global 89
For stolen vehicle 250 Closing 98 Global (SmartKey with
Traction 170, 406 Trunk lid emergency release 104 KEYLESS-GO*) 94
Transmission see Automatic Trunk lid opening/closing system* 99 Glove box 231
transmission 278 Turn signal lamps In an emergency 348
Tread depth (tires) 292 Replacing bulbs 353, 354 Selective settings 89, 94
Trip computer 148 Turn signals 47 Trunk in an emergency 349
Trip odometer Additional in mirrors 353 Trunk lid with SmartKey 90
Resetting 132 Cleaning lenses 298 Trunk lid, separately 105, 106
Trunk Front bulbs 353, 356 Vehicle in an emergency 249
Auxiliary fuse box 374 Rear bulbs 354, 358 With the SmartKey 30
Closing from the inside 100 Turning off With the SmartKey with
Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 95 Engine 53 KEYLESS-GO* 32, 91
Locking separately 105 Turning off the engine 54 Upgrade signals
Message in display 334 Tele Aid* 248
Opening 97 Uphill driving
Opening from inside vehicle 97 Cruise control 204
Opening from the inside 99
430
Index
Upholstery Gear selector lever 301 Vehicle level 219, 221

Cleaning 302 Hard plastic trim items 301 Changing 219, 222
Upshifting 165, 169, 172 Headlamps 298 Setting 219, 222
Useful features 231 Instrument cluster 301 Automatic 219, 222
Ashtrays 238 Leather upholstery 302 Manual 219, 222
Cigarette lighter 239 Light alloy wheels 301 Vehicle lighting
Garage door opener 250 Nubuck leather upholstery 302 Checking 271
Heated steering wheel* 240 Ornamental moldings 298 Vehicle submenu
Storage compartments 231 Paintwork 297 Limiting opening height of trunk
Tele Aid* 242 Parktronic* system sensor 299 lid*(Control system) 159
Telephone* 241 Plastic and rubber parts 302 Vehicle tool kit 344, 345
Power washer 297 Alignment bolt 345
V
Seat belts 301 Fuse chart 345
Vehicle
Side markers 298 Fuse extractor 345
Individual settings 151, 153
Steering wheel 301 Gloves 345
Locking in an emergency 349
Tail lamps 298 Screwdriver 345
Lowering 365
Tar stains 297 Spare fuses 345
Service battery 366
Turn signals 298 Wheel wrench 345
Towing 371
Upholstery 302 Vehicle washing 298
Unlocking in an emergency 348
Vehicle washing 298 Ventilated storage compartment 192
Vehicle battery 366
Window cleaning 300 Ventilation
Vehicle care 296
Wiper blades 299 Storage compartment 192
Cup holder 301
Wood trims 302 VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 406
Distronic* system sensor cover 299
Voice control system* 406
Engine cleaning 298
Hands-free microphone 27
431
Index
W Windshield washer fluid Removing 359

Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and Message in display 334 Replacing 359
warning Refilling 281 Wiping
Warning sounds Wiping with 49 And washing simultaneously 49
Distance warning function* 214 Windshield wipers 48, 177 Interval 48
Distronic* 208 Fast wiper speed 48 With windshield washer fluid 49
Drivers seat belts 64 Intermittent wiping 48 Wood trims
Parking brake 46 Replacing wiper blades 359 Cleaning 302
Warranty coverage 379 Single wipe 49 Wrench, wheel (vehicle tool kit) 345
Washing the vehicle 296 Switching on 48
X
Wear pattern (tires) 291 Wiping with windshield washer
Xenon headlamps
Weights 390 fluid 49
Bi-Xenon 401
Wheel change Winter driving 292
Tightening torque 365 Block heater (Canada only) 293
Wheels Snow chains 293
Rotating 291 Tires 292
Tires and wheels 282 Transmission program mode 171
Window curtain airbags 63 Winter driving instructions 264
Windows see Side windows Winter tires 292
Windshield Wiper blades
Refilling washer fluid 281 Cleaning 299
Replacing wiper blades 359 Installing 360
Washer fluid 281
432
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider
this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operators Manual. Re-
printing, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2396-31
Press time 01/09/04
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany
Order No. 6515 2164 13 Part No. 220 584 87 96 USA Edition B 2004

2004 s430 s500 S55amg s600 S4305004matic

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2004 s430 s500 S55amg s600 S4305004matic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S-Class Operators Manual

Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 19 Getting started ................................... 29

Rear seat head restraints............. 110

Useful features .................................. 231 At the gas station .............................. 269

Maintenance...................................... 294 Replacing wiper blades ...................... 359

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 391

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership

Reporting safety defects

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Lower part Item Page

5 Exterior mirror adjustment 38,

Starter switch positions !

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* i

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be Ignition (or position 2)

Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can

Switch on ignition. Seat cushion tilt

Steering wheel Steering wheel adjustment Adjusting steering column in or out

Mirrors Interior rear view mirror Exterior rear view mirror

The buttons are located on the drivers Switch on ignition. i

According to accident statistics, children

Starting the engine Automatic transmission Starting with the SmartKey

Repeat the starting procedure Parking brake

Release the parking brake by pulling

Driving Once the vehicle is in motion, the automat-

! Switching on headlamps Turn signals and high beam

High beam Windshield wipers Switching on windshield wipers

Problems while driving The coolant temperature is above In case of accident

Switching off headlamps i

Turning off the engine with !

After exiting the vehicle, press lock

For more information, see Locking and

Adjust the driver seat as far as possible

Safety guidelines for the seat belt,

The side impact airbags and window cur- Seat belts i

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries

Warning! G rollovers (window curtain airbags and

Emergency tensioning device (ETD), In an impact, emergency tensioning devic- !

You execute an emergency braking ma- The locking mechanism releases.

Children in the vehicle All lap-shoulder belts except the drivers

Override switch for rear passenger

The override switch is located on the driv- i

The - indicator lamp in the instrument Emergency brake maneuver BAS

! Switching off the ESP

The ESP is deactivated.

Four wheel electronic traction system !

i i Canceling the alarm

Press switch 2. Canceling tow-away alarm With KEYLESS-GO*

Factory setting Selective setting

Restoring to factory setting Use the mechanical key to lock the i

Factory setting Selective setting Restoring to factory setting

Closing the trunk lid from the outside

1 Trunk lid closing switch switch 1, or the button on the

Closing the trunk lid from the outside

Closing the trunk lid and locking the ve-

The vehicle is locked and the trunk lid

Trunk lid emergency release i i

Power closing assist for doors and i

Removing and installing front seat i Removing front head restraints

1 Switch in the front center console

Lumbar support Multicontour backrest*

Lumbar region support Massage function (PULSE) Drive-dynamic seat*

Activating Deactivating Seat heating*